Buhler Versatile Genesis II 2145, 2160, 2180, 2210 tractor Operator's Manual

Buhler

Versatile

2145

2160

2180

2210

Genesis II

89007102 01/06

TO THE OWNER:

The warranty coverage that is extended to your tractor is explained in the Warranty and Limitation of Liability form.

Your dealer will provide you with a copy of the warranty and retain a copy which you have signed. After you read the warranty, ask your dealer to explain any points that you may not understand.

This tractor was designed to power and propel itself. It is intended for use in normal and customary agricultural applications.

Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to modify or alter this tractor or any of its components or any tractor function without first consulting an authorized Buhler Versatile dealer. If you have any questions regarding tractor modifications, contact Buhler Versatile Inc., 1260 Clarence Avenue, Winnipeg, MB R3C 4E8

A safety cab incorporating a Roll Over Protection Structure (ROPS) and a seat belt were standard equipment for the tractor at the time of factory assembly. If the safety cab/ROPS has been modified or removed by the original purchaser, it is recommended that you equip your tractor with a safety cab/ROPS and seat belt. A safety cab/ROPS is effective in reducing injuries during tractor overturn accidents. Overturning a tractor without a

ROPS can result in serious injury or death. Safety cab/ROPS and seat belts are available for your tractor. If your tractor is not equipped with a safety cab/ROPS and seat belt, see your Buhler Versatile dealer.

Your safety and the safety of those around you depends upon the care and good judgment you use while operating this equipment. Read the safety precautions carefully.

For a complete list of the delivery service checks performed by your dealer, refer to DELIVERY REPORT in this manual. The first copy is your record of the service performed and the second copy, which is to be removed from the manual, is your dealer’s record. MAKE SURE THAT YOU AND THE DEALER SIGN BOTH COPIES.

After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take your tractor and this manual to your selling dealer. He will perform the factory recommended 50-hour service. You will be responsible for the cost of lubricants, fluids, filters and other items replaced as part of normal maintenance. Prior to taking the tractor to your selling dealer for service, it is recommended that you contact them to determine any other charges for which you may be responsible.

All data given in this book is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition. For exact information about any particular tractor please consult your Buhler Versatile dealer.

CAUTION

This symbol is used throughout this book whenever personal safety is involved. Take time to read and follow the instructions. Be careful!

Pictures in this manual may show protective shielding open or removed to better illustrate a particular feature or adjustment.

Be certain, however, to close or replace all shielding before operating the machine.

IMPROVEMENTS

Buhler Versatile Inc. is continually striving to improve its products. We reserve the right to make improvements or changes when it becomes practical and possible to do so, without incurring any obligation to make changes or additions to the equipment sold previously.

CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT

YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

The California Air Resources Board and Buhler Versatile are pleased to explain the emission control system warranty on your engine. In California, new 1996 and later heavy-duty off-road engines from 175 to 750 HP must be designed, built, and equipped to meet the State’s stringent anti-smog standards. Buhler Versatile must warrant the emission control system on your engine for the periods of time listed below, provided there has been no abuse, neglect, or improper maintenance of your engine.

Your emission control system includes parts such as the fuel injection system and the air induction system.

Where a warrantable condition exists, Buhler Versatile will repair your heavy-duty off-road engine at no cost to you, including diagnosis, parts, and labor.

Manufacturer’s Warranty Coverage:

The 1996 and later heavy-duty off-road engines are warranted from the original date of delivery for five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. If any emission-related part on your engine is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by Buhler Versatile.

Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities:

D

As the heavy-duty off-road engine owner, you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance listed in your owner’s manual. Buhler Versatile recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance on your heavy-duty off-road engine, but Buhler

Versatile cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for your failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled maintenance.

D As the heavy-duty off-road engine owner, you should, however, be aware that Buhler Versatile may deny you warranty coverage if your heavy-duty off-road engine or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance, or unapproved modifications.

D

Your engine is designed to operate on commercially available diesel fuel only. Use of any other fuel may result in your engine no longer operating in compliance with California’s emissions requirements.

D

You are responsible for initiating the warranty process. The ARB suggests that you present your heavy-duty off-road engine to a Buhler

Versatile dealer as soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed by the dealer as expeditiously as possible.

If you have questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should contact the Buhler Versatile Warranty Department.

D

Prior to the expiration of the warranty, you must give notice of any failure of an emission control warranted part. Such notice must be given to Buhler Versatile or an authorized dealer, and you must deliver the engine to the repair location.

D You, the owner, are responsible for incidental costs incurred by yourself or your employees as a result of a warrantable failure. Examples of such costs are communication expenses, meals and lodging.

D

The owner is responsible for any business costs or losses, any “downtime” expenses and any “cargo” damage which result from the failure of a warranted part. Buhler Versatile is not responsible for other incidental or consequential damages, including but not limited to fines, theft, vandalism or collisions.

Parts covered:

This emission control system warranty applies to the following 675TA/KA emission control parts.

Fuel Injection Pump

Fuel Injectors

Turbocharger

Intake Manifold

Charge Air Cooler

Exhaust Manifold

Any replacement part, equivalent in performance and durability, may be used in the performance of any maintenance or repairs and must be provided without charge to the owner. The use of these parts does not reduce the warranty obligations of Buhler Versatile. However, Buhler

Versatile recommends the use of new, genuine Buhler Versatile service parts or Buhler Versatile approved rebuilt parts and assemblies. Buhler Versatile also recommends that the engine be serviced by a Buhler Versatile authorized dealer.

Buhler Versatile Responsibilities

Warranty work will be provided at no charge to the owner at any authorized dealer, using new genuine Buhler Versatile service parts or Buhler

Versatile approved rebuilt parts or assemblies..

The owner will not be charged for diagnostic labor which leads to the determination that a warranted part is defective, if the diagnostic work was performed at a warranty station.

Buhler Versatile is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure under warranty of any warranted part.

Warranty Limitations

Buhler Versatile is not responsible for failures resulting from abuse or neglect by owner or operator.

Buhler Versatile warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the engine is designed, built, and equipped so as to conform with all applicable regulations adopted by the Air Resources Board, and that it is free from defects in materials and workmanship which cause the failure of a warranted part.

Any warranted part which is not scheduled for replacement as required maintenance, or which is scheduled only for regular inspection to the effect of “repair or replace as necessary” is warranted for the warranty period.

Any warranted part which is scheduled for replacement as required maintenance is warranted for the period of time prior to the first scheduled replacement point for that part.

Buhler Versatile is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure under warranty of any warranted part.

0-1

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

FEDERAL EMISSIONS WARRANTY

Buhler Versatile warrants that your new 2003 and later heavy-duty off-road diesel engine was designed, built, and equipped to conform to applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations for a period of use of five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first.

The new model year, class of diesel engine, and emission application determination for your engine are identified on the emission control information label affixed to the top of your engine’s rocker arm cover. The warranty period begins on the date the new equipment is sold to the first retail purchaser.

Any emission control system parts which are proven defective during normal use will be repaired or replaced during the warranty period. The warranty repairs and service will be performed by any authorized Buhler Versatile dealer at the dealer’s place of business, with no charge for parts or labor (including diagnosis).

As the engine owner, you are responsible to perform all the required maintenance listed in your owner’s manual. Buhler Versatile will not deny an emission warranty claim solely because you have no record of maintenance; however, a claim may be denied if your failure to perform maintenance resulted in the failure of a warranted part. Receipts covering regular maintenance should be retained in the event of questions and these receipts should be passed on to each subsequent owner of the engine.

It is recommended replacement parts used for maintenance or repairs be Buhler Versatile Service Parts to maintain the quality originally designed into your emission certified engine. The use of non-Buhler Versatile parts does not invalidate the warranty on other components unless the use of such parts causes damage to warranted parts.

Buhler Versatile wishes to assure the emission control systems warranty is being properly administered. If you believe you have not received the service entitled to under this warranty, you should contact the Buhler Versatile Service Department.

Service Department

Buhler Versatile Inc.

1260 Clarence Avenue, Box 7300

Winnipeg, MB R3C 4E8

(204) 284--6100

Please note that the Emission Warranty does not cover:

1.

Systems and parts that were not first installed on the new equipment or engine as original equipment by Buhler Versatile.

2.

Part malfunctions caused by abuse, misuse, improper adjustment, modification, alteration, tampering, disconnection, improper or inadequate maintenance, or use of non-recommended fuels and lubricating oils.

3.

Accident caused damage, acts of nature, or other events beyond Buhler Versatile’s control.

4.

Replacement of expendable items made in connection with scheduled maintenance.

5.

Parts requiring replacement, inspection or adjustment maintenance intervals for reasons other than being defective.

6.

Parts which are not Buhler Versatile Service Parts.

7.

Loss of time, inconvenience, loss of use of equipment/engine or commercial loss.

8.

Equipment with altered or disconnected hourmeter where the hours cannot be determined.

9.

Equipment normally operated outside the United States.

10.

Non-defective parts replaced by other than Buhler Versatile dealers.

Coverage

This emission control system warranty applies to the following 675TA/** emission control parts.

Fuel Injection Pump

Fuel Injectors

Turbocharger

Intake Manifold

Charge Air Cooler

Exhaust Manifold

0-2

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

CONTENTS

SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0-4

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-27

DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-31

SERVICE REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-40

0-3

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

PERSONAL SAFETY

Throughout this manual and on machine decals, you will find precautionary statements (“CAUTION”,

“WARNING”, and “DANGER”) followed by specific instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal safety of you and those working with you. Please take the time to read them.

CAUTION

The word “CAUTION” is used where a safe behavioral practice according to operating and maintenance instructions and common safety practices will protect the operator and others from accident involvement.

WARNING

The word “WARNING” denotes a potential or hidden hazard which has a potential for serious injury. It is used to warn operators and others to exercise every appropriate means to avoid a surprise involvement with machinery.

DANGER

The word “DANGER” denotes a forbidden practice in connection with a serious hazard.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE “CAUTION”, “WARNING”, AND “DANGER” INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN

SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.

MACHINE SAFETY

Additional precautionary statements (“ATTENTION” and “IMPORTANT”) are followed by specific instructions.

These statements are intended for machine safety.

ATTENTION: The word “ATTENTION” is used to warn the operator of potential machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.

IMPORTANT: The word “IMPORTANT” is used to inform the reader of something he needs to know to prevent minor machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.

0-4

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-5

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To help prevent accidents, read and take the following precautions before operating the tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those who are responsible and instructed to do so.

THE TRACTOR

1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge can lead to accidents.

2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons to operate the tractor.

3. To prevent falls, use the assist rails and step plates when getting on and off the tractor.

Keep steps and platform clear of mud and debris.

4. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on the tractor. There is no safe place for extra riders.

5. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety decals.

6. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.

7. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to modify or alter the tractor or any of its components or any tractor function without first consulting an authorized dealer.

8. Install all shields before starting or operating the tractor.

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or driving the tractor.

2. When driving on public roads, have consideration for other road users. Pull to the side of the road so that any following traffic may pass.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3. Dim the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming vehicle.

4. Reduce speed before turning or applying the brakes. Lock the brake pedals together when traveling at road speeds or when on the highway. Brake both wheels simultaneously when making an emergency stop.

5. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at road speeds.

6. Any towed vehicle whose total weight exceeds that of the towing tractor must be equipped with brakes for safe operation.

7. Never apply the differential lock when turning. When engaged, the differential lock will prevent the tractor from turning.

8. Always check overhead clearance, especially when transporting the tractor. Watch where you are going, especially at row ends, on roads and around trees and low overhanging obstacles.

9. Use extreme caution when operating on steep slopes.

10. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and at speeds compatible with safety, especially when operating over rough ground, when crossing ditches or slopes and when turning corners.

11. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tires are frozen to the ground, engage a reverse gear to free the tractor and prevent overturning.

12. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going downhill as would be used when going uphill.

Do not coast or freewheel down hills.

0-6

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the PTO control in the “OFF” position, the lift control lever in the down position, the remote control valve levers in the neutral position and the transmission lever in neutral before starting the tractor.

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls

(other than the external hydraulic lift switches) while standing beside the tractor.

Always sit in the tractor seat when starting the engine or operating the controls.

3. Do not bypass the transmission neutral start switch. Consult your authorized dealer if your neutral start controls malfunction. Use jumper cables only in the recommended manner. Improper use can result in a tractor runaway.

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift lever while the engine is running. Unexpected tractor movement can result from such contact.

5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.

6. Shut off the engine and PTO and apply the parking brake before getting off the tractor.

7. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.

8. Do not operate the tractor engine in an enclosed building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust fumes can cause death.

9. The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air but will not exclude chemical vapor. Follow the chemical manufacturers directions regarding protection from dangerous chemicals.

10. Always wear a protective mask when working with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions on the chemical container.

11. If the power steering or engine ceases to operate, stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be more difficult to control.

12. Stop the engine and relieve pressure before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic, steering or fuel lines.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

13. Tighten all connections before starting the engine or pressurizing lines.

14. Pull only from the swinging drawbar. Use only a drawbar pin that locks in place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any point above the axle may cause the tractor to overturn.

15. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when heavy implements are attached to the three-point hitch, install front end weights.

Do not operate the tractor with a light front end.

16. Always select Position Control when attaching equipment and when transporting equipment. Be sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted and will disconnect safely in case of accidental detachment of the implement.

17. Do not leave equipment in the raised position when the vehicle is stopped or unattended.

18. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories are correctly installed, are approved for use with the tractor, do not overload the tractor and are operated and maintained in accordance with the instructions issued by the equipment or accessory manufacturer.

19. Remember that your tractor, if abused or incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become a hazard both to the operator and to bystanders. Do not overload or operate with attached equipment which is unsafe, not designed for the particular task or is poorly maintained.

20. The cab is designed to provide the minimum noise level at the operator’s ears and, in fact, meets or exceeds applicable standards in this respect. However, noise (sound pressure level) in the workplace can exceed 86dB(A) when working between buildings or in confined spaces, when the cab windows are open. Therefore, it is recommended that the operators wear suitable ear protectors when operating in high noise level conditions.

0-7

OPERATING THE PTO

1. When operating PTO-driven equipment, shut off the engine and wait until the PTO stops before getting off the tractor and disconnecting the equipment.

2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the power take-off or when near rotating equipment.

3. When operating stationary PTO-driven equipment, always apply the tractor parking brake and block the rear wheels front and back.

4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or service PTO driven equipment when the tractor engine is running.

5. Make sure the PTO master shield is in position at all times and always replace the

PTO cover when the PTO is not in use.

SERVICING THE TRACTOR

Most accidents can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To help prevent accidents, read and take the following precautions before servicing the tractor.

1. The cooling system operates under pressure which is controlled by the radiator cap. It is dangerous to remove the cap while the system is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before removing the cap entirely.

2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor.

Keep any type of open flame away. Wait for the engine to cool before refuelling.

3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and comply with legal requirements.

4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames away from battery or cold weather starting aids. To prevent sparks which could cause explosion, use jumper cables according to instructions.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten or injured by escaping refrigerant.

Special equipment and instruments are required to service the air conditioning system. See your authorized dealer for service.

6. Stop the engine before performing any service on the tractor.

7. Escaping diesel/hydraulic fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

• DO NOT use your hand to check for leaks.

Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before connecting or disconnecting lines.

• Tighten all connections before starting the engine or pressurizing lines.

• If fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention immediately or gangrene may result.

8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to modify or alter the tractor or any of its components or any tractor function without first consulting an authorized dealer.

9. The fuel oil in the injection system is under high pressure and can penetrate the skin.

Unqualified persons should not remove or attempt to adjust a pump, injector nozzle or any other part of the fuel injection system.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.

10. Continuous long term contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged contact with used engine oil.

Wash skin promptly with soap and water.

11. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot fall and cause injury.

12. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters properly.

0-8

DIESEL FUEL

1. Under no circumstances should gasoline, alcohol or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel. These combinations can create an increased fire or explosive hazard. In a closed container such as a fuel tank, these blends are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends.

2. Ignition switch to OFF position.

3. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the engine running. Allow the tractor to cool off before fueling.

4. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame away.

5. Use the proper fuel transfer hose and nozzle.

Make sure the nozzle and hose are grounded to dissipate static electric charges.

6. When refueling, make sure the nozzle is in contact with the filler neck of the tractor fuel tank before fuel starts to flow and during the entire time fuel is flowing.

7. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when filling the tank.

8. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allow room for expansion.

9. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.

10. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.

11. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with a genuine replacement cap. A non-approved cap may not be safe.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

12. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.

13. Do not drive equipment near open fires.

14. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.

15. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade fuels are not held over and used in the winter.

16. Never operate electrical or electronic equipment (such as cell phones) while around fuel or while refueling.

SAFETY CAB

Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab which must be maintained in a serviceable condition.

Be careful when driving through doorways or working in confined spaces with low headroom.

1. Do not modify, drill, weld or alter the safety cab in any way. Doing so could render you liable to legal prosecution in some countries.

2. Never attempt to straighten or weld any part of the main frame or retaining brackets which have suffered damage. By doing so you may weaken the structure and endanger your safety. Replace all damaged parts.

3. Do not secure any parts on the main frame or attach your safety cab with other than the special high tensile bolts and nuts specified.

4. Never attach chains or ropes to the cab or main frame for pulling purposes.

5. Never take unnecessary risks even though your safety cab affords you the maximum protection possible.

0-9

SAFETY DECALS

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

The following decals were installed on the tractor in the areas indicated. They are intended for your safety and for those working with you. Please take this manual and walk around your tractor to note the content and location of these decals.

Review these decals and the operating instructions detailed in this manual with the machine operators.

Keep the decals legible. If they are not, obtain replacements from your authorized dealer.

0-10

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

86501511

1. Location : Right and left side of radiator support

86501508

2. Location : Inside left engine access door

3. Location : Engine air cleaner support on the right side above the alternator.

0-11

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

4.

Location : Starter motor

5 – Warning: To avoid possible eye damage from microwave signals emitted by this radar sensor Do Not look directly into the sensor face.

5. Location : Radar sensor mount bracket

6.

Location : Front of right side console

7.

Location : Top of right side console

0-12

8. Location : Left-hand “B” pillar in the cab

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

86516374

9. Location : Rear of both rear fenders

WARNING

IF INSTRUMENT PANEL FLASHES “STOP” AND

CONTINUOUS ALARM SOUNDS:

IMMEDIATELY

1.

DEPRESS TOP OF SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE

SWITCH.

2.

DOWNSHIFT TO 7TH GEAR OR LOWER.

3.

PROCEED TO SAFE STOPPING AREA

AND STOP ENGINE.

4.

DETERMINE CAUSE AND TAKE CORRECTIVE

ACTION.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE FURTHER WITH

ALARM SOUNDING.

IMPORTANT

FAILURE TO DEPRESS SWITCH WITHIN 30

SECONDS AFTER ALARM SOUNDS WILL STOP

ENGINE. CAUSING LOSS OF POWER-ASSIST TO

STEERING AND BRAKES.

86002744

11. Location : Lower front corner of right side window

10. Location : Below PTO stub shaft

12 – Slow-moving vehicle sign

Part #5144870

0-13

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

SAFETY CAB/ROPS

Safety Cab/ROPS

A safety cab incorporating a Roll Over Protective

Structure (ROPS) and seat belt were standard equipment for the tractor at time of factory assembly.

The seat belt, when used by the operator, maximizes the protection offered by the ROPS.

WARNING

Always use your seat belt with the cab/ROPS.

Seat belts save lives when they are used.

70-000-389

Information regarding the safety cab/Roll Over

Protective Structure and seat belt are available from your authorized dealer.

ROPS Maintenance and Inspection

After the first 50 hours of operation and every 300 hours of operation (or six months, whichever comes first):

1. Check the torque of the cab/ROPS mounting bolts. Refer to “Operation 41” in the “Lubrication and Maintenance” section.

2. Check the operator’s seat mounting bolts and the seat belt mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 54 N·m

(40 ft lbs). Replace any worn or damaged parts.

Damage to the Cab/ROPS

If the tractor has rolled over or the cab/ROPS has been damaged (such as striking an overhead object during transport), it must be replaced to provide the original protection.

After an accident, check for damage to the (1) cab/ROPS, (2) operator’s seat, (3) seat belt and seat belt mountings. Before you operate the tractor, replace all damaged parts.

IMPORTANT: Do not try to weld or straighten the cab/rops.

WARNING

Never attach chains, ropes or cables to the cab/ROPS for pulling purposes; this will cause the tractor to tip backwards. Always pull from the tractor drawbar. Be careful when driving through door openings or under low overhead objects.

Make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance for the cab/ROPS.

If the cab/ROPS is removed or replaced, make certain that the proper hardware is used and the recommended torque values are applied to the attaching bolts.

0-14

1

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS

As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilized on the instruments, controls, switches, and fusebox. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning.

0-15

EHR Power

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-16

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION TO THIS MANUAL

This manual has been prepared to assist you in the correct procedure for running-in, driving, operating and maintaining your tractor.

The manual is divided into five sections as detailed in the “Contents” page. An index is provided at the back of the manual.

OPERATOR’S MANUAL HOLDER

A manual holder, 1, is attached to the rear of the seat.

Store the operator’s manual and other tractor information in the holder.

Read this manual carefully and keep it in the manual holder for future reference. If at any time you require advice concerning your tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorized dealer. He has factorytrained personnel, genuine replacement parts, and the necessary equipment to carry out your service requirements.

Your tractor has been designed and built to give maximum performance, economy and ease of operation under a wide variety of operating conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer, to ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To maintain this condition and ensure trouble-free operation, it is important that the routine services, as specified in this manual, are carried out at the recommended intervals.

All data given in this book is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are approximate only, and the illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition. For exact information

1 about any particular tractor, please consult your authorized dealer.

The company policy is one of continuous improvement, and the right to change prices, specifications or equipment at any time without notice is reserved.

References to the right and left sides of the tractor are determined by sitting in the operator’s seat facing the direction of forward travel.

Pages 0-5 through 0-12 list the precautions to be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of others. Read the safety precautions carefully and follow the advice offered BEFORE operating the tractor.

1-1

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION DATA

The tractor and major components are identified using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.

The following provides the locations of the identification data.

NOTE: Tractor identification data must be supplied to the dealer when requesting parts or service.

Identification data is needed to aid in identifying the tractor if it is ever stolen.

Record the identification data in the sample ID plates or on the lines provided.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

The vehicle identification plate, 1, is located inside the right front lower side panel of the hood.

Record the information on the sample ID plate.

1

2

1-2

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION

The serial number and identification information is stamped on the top of the front support, 1. Record all the numbers on the following line.

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION

The engine identification information is located on a tag, 1, on the top front of the engine rocker cover.

Record the information on the sample ID plate. The decal will appear similar to the illustration below.

1

3

4

1-3

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FRONT AXLE

IDENTIFICATION

The serial number and axle type are on the plate located on the right rear of the axle housing, 1.

Record the information on the sample ID plate.

1

TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION

The serial number and type are located on the plate on the lower right side of the transmission, 1.

Record the information on the sample ID plate.

MODEL

SPEC

SERIAL

EQUIP

5

6

1-4

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

REAR AXLE IDENTIFICATION

The serial number is also stamped on the left side of the PTO boss on the rear axle housing, 1.

CAB IDENTIFICATION

The serial number is on the certification plate on the rear crossbar, 1.

Record the serial number on the following line.

7

8

1-5

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

PROTECTIVE SHIELDING

INTRODUCTION

Protective shields have been installed on your tractor. The shields are intended for your safety and for those working with you.

SHIELD LOCATIONS

Use the following as a guide and familiarize yourself with the location of the protective shields.

WARNING

Install all protective shields before starting or operating the tractor.

ENGINE HOOD

The hood, 1, covers the engine’s moving parts. The hood must be closed before operating the tractor.

FAN SHIELDS - LEFT SIDE

The shield, 1, covers the left side of the fan.

1

9

10

1-6

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

FAN SHIELDS - RIGHT SIDE

The shield, 1, covers the right side of the fan.

ENGINE ACCESS DOOR - RIGHT SIDE

The door, 1, covers the right rear engine components.

ENGINE ACCESS DOOR - LEFT SIDE

The door, 1, covers the left rear engine components.

11

12

13

1-7

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

STARTER SOLENOID SHIELD

The shield, 1, covers the starter solenoid electrical connections to prevent accidental contact. The shield must be installed whenever the batteries are connected to the electrical system.

BATTERY COVER

The cover, 1, protects the batteries from damage and the electrical connections from accidental contact.

14

15

TRACTOR MASTER PTO SHIELD

The shield, 1, covers the tractor PTO stub shaft. The shield can be pivoted to make installing a PTO shaft easier.

CAUTION

Do not remove or modify the shield.

16

1-8

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

TRACTOR PTO STUB SHAFT COVER

Install the cover, 1, over the tractor’s PTO stub shaft when the shaft is not attached to an implement. Turn the shield counterclockwise to remove, and clockwise to install.

Store the cover when removed.

WARNING

Install all protective shields before starting or operating the tractor.

17

1-9

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS - OVERVIEW OF LOCATION AND FUNCTION

The information on the following pages identifies, locates and briefly describes the function of the controls and instruments located in the cab.

The controls have been divided in to the following four areas:

IMPORTANT: The following information in this section provides a general overview of location and function but does not provide detailed operational information. Thoroughly read Section 2 - “Operation” for details on how to use the controls and read the instruments before operating the tractor.

1. Forward operator controls

2. Foot and floor controls

3. Overhead controls

4. Right side console controls

WARNING

Do not operate the tractor until you are thoroughly accustomed with the location and operation of all controls.

1-10

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

FORWARD OPERATOR CONTROLS

Forward Operator Controls

1. Key-start/stop switch, 4 position

2. Engine shutdown override switch

3. Creeper switch (if equipped)

4. Steering column tilt control lever

5. Steering column telescopic adjustment control knob

6. Cold start aid switch

7. Multi-function switch - horn, turn signal, high/low beam

8. Rotary beacon switch (if equipped)

9. Hazard warning switch

10. Master light switch, 4 position

11. Electronic instrument cluster (EIC)

18

Each numbered item is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the following pages.

1-11

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

FORWARD OPERATOR CONTROLS

1. KEY-START/STOP SWITCH

The key start/stop rotary switch, 1, has four positions.

Position A - Accessories “ON,” Engine “OFF”

Position B - Engine and electrical equipment “OFF”

Position C - Warning lights and instruments “ON.”

Engine RUN position.

Position D - Starter motor operates

2. ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE SWITCH

The two-position rocker switch, 2, allows the operator to over ride the automatic shutdown. See

“Operating the Engine” for details on the automatic shutdown feature. The switch should only be used to move the tractor to a safe area for investigation and repair. Push the top of the switch to override the shutdown system. Push the bottom to return to normal automatic shutdown operation.

3. CREEPER SWITCH (If Equipped)

The switch, 3, controls the engagement of the creeper gears.

Push the top of the switch to select creeper. Push the bottom of the switch to return to normal operation. Do not select creeper unless the tractor has come to a complete stop. See “Transmission Operation” for details.

Tractors without creeper will have a blanking plate in place of the switch.

4. STEERING COLUMN TILT CONTROL LEVER

Pulling on the lever, 4, allows the steering column to be tilted up or down to a comfortable operating position or out of the way for easy exit from the seat.

See “Cab” for details.

5. STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPIC ADJUST-

MENT CONTROL KNOB

Rotating the knob, 5, allows the steering column to be shortened or lengthened to a comfortable operating position. See “Cab” for details.

1-12

19

20

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

6. COLD START AID SWITCH

Depressing the switch, 6, activates an air inlet heater designed to pre-heat engine intake air to improve cold starting. A monitoring device prevents the heater from working when system temperature is above 14° C (57° F). See “Cold Weather Starting” for details.

7. MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH

The stalk-type switch, 7, operates the horn, turn signals, headlight flash and is also used to select HI or LOW beam. See “Lights and Accessory Power” for details.

8. ROTARY BEACON SWITCH (If Equipped)

The switch, 8, controls the operation of the beacon.

Push the top of the switch to operate the rotary beacon. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the beacon off. See “Lights and Accessory Power” for details.

Tractors without rotary beacons have a blanking plate in place of the switch.

9. HAZARD WARNING LIGHT SWITCH

Push the top of the switch, 9, to activate the hazard lights. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the hazard lights off. See “Lights and Accessory Power” for details.

10. MASTER LIGHT SWITCH

The master light switch, 10, has 4 positions.

A= Full counterclockwise is off.

B= Parking lights

C= Headlights and parking lights

D= Work lights, headlights and parking lights. The work lights are selected by using the touch-sensitive switches on the EIC console. See “Lights and

Accessory Power” for details.

21

22

1-13

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

23

11. ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

The central Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 1, has transmission gear information at the top. Engine speed appears in the middle display. The bottom displays hours, ground speed or PTO speed as selected.

The top section, 2, of the EIC consists of 18 indicator lamps.

Bar graphs, 3, indicate coolant temperature and engine load.

The right panel, 4, contains the Tractor Performance

Monitor (TPM)

Eleven touch-sensitive switches, 5, select different

EIC functions and aid in calibration.

Three indicator lamps, 6, are located on the center of the lower panel.

Five touch-sensitive switches, 7, select work lights and dimmer control.

Bar graphs, 8, indicate fuel level and oil pressure.

See “Electronic Instrument Cluster” for details.

1-14

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

FOOT AND FLOOR CONTROLS

1. PARKING BRAKE

The parking brake, 1, uses a conventional lever to operate brake discs located on the differential input shaft. The lever is located to the left of the driver’s seat. See “Brakes” for details.

NOTE: A 2-minute pulsating audible alarm will sound in unison with a flashing parking brake lamp to remind the operator to apply the parking brake if the operator leaves the seat without applying the parking brake.

2. INCHING PEDAL

The inching pedal, 2, is installed in place of the clutch pedal found on tractors with conventional transmissions. The inching pedal operates like a clutch, for safe, accurate positioning of the tractor when attaching implements or operating in confined spaces, etc.

Depressing the pedal interrupts power flow from the engine to the rear axle. Slowly releasing the pedal restores power flow. See “Transmission” for details.

3. LEFT WHEEL FOOT BRAKE PEDAL

The left foot brake, 3, may be operated independently, to aid turning in confined spaces, or together for normal stopping. When operating in the field it is advised that the brake pedals be unlocked. See

“Brakes” for details.

1-15

24

WARNING

Always lock the brakes together when traveling on the highway, or if a hydraulically braked trailer is attached. Never use the brakes to aid turning at high speed.

4. BRAKE LOCKING PLATE

To lock the brake pedals together, position the locking plate, 4, so it engages the slot in the right foot pedal as shown. See “Brakes” for details.

5. RIGHT WHEEL FOOT BRAKE PEDAL

The right foot brake, 5, may be operated independently, to aid turning in confined spaces, or together for normal stopping. When operating in the field it is advised that the brake pedals be unlocked.

See “Brakes” for details.

6. FOOT THROTTLE OR DECELERATOR

The foot throttle, 6, controls engine speed. It may be used independent of the hand throttle to control engine speed and is recommended for use when traveling on the highway. This pedal may also be programmed as a decelerator control. See dealer for programming this feature.

NOTE: When ever the foot throttle is to be used, set the hand throttle to the idle position.

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

OVERHEAD CONTROLS

1. Air conditioner activation switch

2. Temperature control switch

3. Pressurizer fan speed switch

4. Adjustable pressurizer vents (6)

5. Front windshield wiper/washer switch

Overhead Controls

6. Rear window wiper/washer switch (if equipped)

7. Cigar lighter

8. Control console illumination lights (2)

9. Interior lights (2)

10. Interior rearview mirror

Each numbered item is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the following pages.

25

1-16

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

OVERHEAD CONTROLS

1. AIR CONDITIONER ACTIVATION SWITCH

Switch, 1, controls the activation of the air conditioner.

Depress the switch to activate the air conditioner compressor. See “Cab” for details.

2. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

Rotate knob, 2, fully clockwise for maximum heat, and fully counterclockwise for less heat and for maximum cooling when the air conditioning is activated. See “Cab” for details.

3. PRESSURIZER FAN SPEED SWITCH

The pressurizer fan switch, 3, has three positions.

Low speed is full counterclockwise. Rotate the switch clockwise for medium and high speeds. See “Cab” for details.

WARNING

The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air. When using chemicals follow the chemical manufacturer’s recommendations regarding protection from dangerous chemicals.

4. ADJUSTABLE PRESSURIZER VENTS (6)

The vents direct pressurized air inside the cab.

Rotate the six vents, 4, inside their housings to direct air as required. See “Cab” for details.

26

27

1-17

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

5. FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER

SWITCH

The windshield wiper switch, 5, has three positions

- off, slow, and fast. Push in on the knob to operate the washer. See “Cab” for details.

6. REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

(if installed)

The rear window wiper/washer switch, 6, has two positions - off and on. Push in on the knob to activate the washer. See “Cab” for details.

7. CIGAR LIGHTER

Push the lighter, 7, in until it latches. When it pops out, remove from its socket and return after use.

NOTE: A cigar lighter socket power adapter kit (P/N

86033740) may be purchased from your local Buhler

Versatile dealer.

8. CONTROL CONSOLE ILLUMINATION

LIGHTS (TWO)

The lights, 8, are activated when the master light switch is on. The lights illuminate the cab controls.

9. INTERIOR LIGHTS (TWO)

The lights, 9, illuminate the cab interior. Each light switch can be set to one of three positions.

See “Lights and Accessory Power” for details.

10. INTERIOR REARVIEW MIRROR

Adjust the mirror, 10, for best rearward view.

28

29

1-18

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

3

5

4

7

8

7

8

12 13

14

15

16

17

2

1

9

6

21* 22*

11

10

9

20

18

21

19

* Side face of console

22

30

Right Side Console Controls

1. Hand throttle control

2. Powershift transmission control lever with neutral latch

3. Remote valve electro-hydraulic engagement switch

4. Transmission automatic shift switch

5. Transmission up/down shift switch

6. 3-point hitch fast raise/work switch

7. Remote valve electro-hydraulic control switches

(3 or 4)

8. Remote valve electro-hydraulic flow control knobs

9. Remote valve electro-hydraulic manual/programable operation switches

10. Differential lock switch

11. Four wheel drive (FWD) switch (if equipped)

12. PTO status light

13. PTO engagement switch

14. 3-point hitch operation status lamp

15. 3-point hitch rate of drop control knob (if equipped)

16. 3-point hitch height limit control knob (if equipped)

17. 3-point hitch % slip override control knob and system response indicator light (if equipped)

18. 3-point hitch draft/position control knob (if equipped)

19. Right side console position switch

20. 3-point hitch lift control and adjustable stop

21. “CRUISE/OFF” button

22. Cruise setting adjustment switch

Each numbered item is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the following pages.

1-19

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

1. HAND THROTTLE CONTROL LEVER

The lever, 1, controls engine speed.

Push forward to progressively increase engine speed. Pull rearward to reduce engine speed.

2

2. POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROL

LEVER WITH NEUTRAL LOCK

The powershift transmission control lever, 2, is used to select forward or reverse travel and to change transmission speeds. Move the lever forward for forward travel and rearward for reverse travel.

NOTE: A neutral-lock feature is fitted. The control lever may only be moved to the forward or reverse positions if the neutral-lock latch on the control-lever knob is depressed. Neutral may be selected without depressing the neutral-lock latch.

The powershift transmission control lever is also used to make instantaneous upward or downward speed changes. Move and then release the lever to the right for upward changes and to the left for downward changes.

See “Transmission Operation” for details.

1

3. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC

ENGAGEMENT SWITCH

Depressing the center button in switch, 3, and then pulling the knob upward will engage the electro-hydraulic controls for the rear remote valves.

Pushing the knob down will disengage the electro-hydraulic controls and all hydrualic flow to the rear remote valves. See “Remote-Control Valves” for details.

IMPORTANT: The remote valve electro-hydraulic engagement switch is provided as an isolator stop switch. It can be used to immediately stop operation of the rear remote hydraulics by quickly depressing the knob. The stop switch only controls the remote valves and has no effect on the three point hitch link operation, thereby isolating operation of the rear remote hydraulics from the three point hitch link operation.

4. TRANSMISSION AUTO SHIFT SWITCH

Switch, 4, controls automatic speed shifting through gears 10-16. Depress to engage auto shift, depress again to disengage. See “Transmission Operation” for details.

2

1

1-20

3

4

5

6

31

3

4

5

6

32

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

5. TRANSMISSION UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH

Depressing the front of switch, 5, will allow an increase of 1, 2, or 3 gears depending on how the transmission is programmed. Pressing the back of the switch will reduce speeds by 1, 2, or 3 gears. See

“Transmission Operation” for details.

2

6. 3-POINT HITCH FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCH

Depressing the rear of switch, 6, will fast raise the

3-point hitch and implement for quick turns at the end of the field.

Depressing the front of the switch drops the implement to its original position.

Holding the front of the switch overrides the 3-point lift control setting, allowing the hitch to drop below the setting. Releasing the switch returns the hitch to the

3-point lift control set point.

The Fast Raise/Work switch is also required to recapture the hitch after using the external fender switches. See “3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

7. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC

CONTROL SWITCHES

Each control switch, 7, activates a four position remote electro-hydraulic valve. From neutral pull the switch rearward to the stop for raise. Push forward one position at a time for neutral, lower and float.

Each control switch (3 or 4) is color coded for identification with the remote valve it controls. See

“Remote valve electro-hydraulics” for details.

7

1

8. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC

FLOW CONTROL KNOBS

Each remote valve has a flow control knob, 8, to meter oil flow. The knob controls flow from 4 to 102

L/MIN (1 to 27 GPM). Turn the knob so the higher vertical decal stripe is visible to increase the rate of oil flow. Turn the knob so the lower vertical decal stripe is visible to decrease the rate of oil flow.

9. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC

MANUAL/PROGRAMABLE OPERATION

SWITCHES

Each remote valve has a manual/programmable operation switch, 9. When the top of the switch is activated the control switches, 7, operate in the manual mode. When the bottom of the switch is activated the control switches, 7, can be operated with a programmed release to neutral. See “Remote valve electro-hydraulics” for details.

7

8

9

11

3

4

10

5

6

33

34

1-21

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

10. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH

Switch, 10, controls the engagement of the electro-hydraulic, self-holding differential lock. Press the front (orange) part of the switch to lock the rear wheels together.

The differential lock will disengage if the back part of the switch is depressed, if either foot brake is applied or when ground speeds exceed 16 KPH (10 MPH).

If the unit is equipped with Traction Control System

(TCS) the front four wheel drive differential will also disengage and engage in a similar manor along with hard turn angles. See “Differential Lock” for details.

7

11. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) SWITCH

(if equipped)

Four-wheel drive engagement is controlled by a three-position rocker switch, 11. Press the front of the switch to the first position to engage AUTO FWD. In this position the FWD will turn off when one brake is used to assist turning or at speeds above 24 KPH (15

MPH). Press to the full forward position to engage

ON which will keep the FWD engaged below 24 KPH

(15 MPH).

If the unit is equipped with Traction Control System

(TCS) the front four wheel drive will also disengage and engage in a similar manor along with hard turn angles. See “Four Wheel Drive Operation” for details.

12. PTO STATUS LIGHT

The PTO status light, 12, will illuminate when the

PTO is activated. See “PTO Operation” for details.

13. PTO ENGAGEMENT SWITCH

Depressing button, 13, in the center of the switch then pulling upwards on the knob will engage the

PTO. To disengage the PTO, push the knob down.

See “PTO Operation” for details.

14. 3-POINT HITCH STATUS LIGHT

Lamp, 14, will be illuminated whenever the 3-point hitch lift control lever and lift arms are not in phase.

The hitch must be “captured” to regain control.

If the lamp is flashing, there is a malfunction in the electronic 3-point hitch control circuit. See “3-Point

Hitch Controls.”

12

18

13

14

20

7

8

9

11

10

15

16

17a

17

19

35

36

1-22

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

15. 3-POINT HITCH RATE OF DROP CONTROL

(if equipped)

The rate of drop control is provided to limit the rate of drop of the 3-point linkage.

Rotate knob, 15, clockwise for faster drop rate and counterclockwise for slower drop speeds. See

“3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

12

18

14

13

16. 3-POINT HITCH HEIGHT LIMIT CONTROL

(if equipped)

The height limit control limits the maximum height to which the lift arms can be raised to prevent large implements from striking the rear of the cab.

Rotate knob, 16, clockwise to increase hitch height.

See “3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

17. SLIP CONTROL (if equipped)

This control is only available when the tractor is equipped with the optional radar sensor unit.

When used in conjunction with the 3-point hitch, the slip control limits the amount of rear wheel slip.

Rotate knob, 17, to indicate the slip rate above which override should occur. The 3-point hitch will raise until the percent of slip drops below the override setting, then the hitch will return to its original position. See “3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

When used in drawbar applications, the knob may be set to the maximum allowable slip. If the slip limit is exceeded, the light, 17A will illuminate. A slip alarm may also be programmed to occur (See EIC tractor performance monitor (TPM) section).

17a. WHEEL SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT (IF

EQUIPPED)

The wheel slip indicator light, 17a will be illuminated whenever the wheel slip exceeds the preset value.

This light is present when the tractor is equipped with the slip control option.

20

15

16

17a

17

19

37

1-23

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

18. 3-POINT HITCH POSITION/DRAFT CONTROL

(if equipped)

The position/draft sensitivity control knob, 18, selects position control, maximum draft control, or a mixture of the two.

Rotate clockwise for full draft control and counterclockwise for full position control. Varying sensitivity will be achieved in the mid positions. See “3-Point

Hitch Controls” for details.

12

18

13

14

19. RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE POSITION SWITCH

Use switch, 19, to move the console fore and aft to match the operator seat position.

Press the front of the switch to move the console forward. Push the rear of the switch to move the console to the rear. The console can also be moved in conjunction with seat rotation for operator comfort.

See “Cab” for details.

20

20. 3-POINT HITCH LIFT CONTROL (if equipped)

To raise the 3-point hitch, move the lift control lever,

20, to the rear. Moving the lever to the front will lower the 3-point hitch. A digital readout of hitch height position from 0 to 99 will be displayed on the EIC. See

“3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

21. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION

Cruise control automatically keeps the engine speed at a specified RPM. Two switches control cruise mode operation. The “CRUISE/OFF” button, 1, enters and exits cruise mode. The “+/--(SET)” button,

2, adjusts the cruise setting. When cruise mode is activated, the engine returns to the last cruise setting, if possible, based on throttle lever position.

The cruise function can be set to any engine RPM, but the operating cruise RPM cannot exceed the normal RPM for the current throttle position. For example, if the cruise setting is 1800 RPM but the hand throttle if at a normal 1700 RPM position, cruise will not increase the RPM.

Setting - Move the throttle handle higher than the desired cruise setting and press the “CRUISE” button, 1, to enter cruise operation. The engine speed will go the the RPM of the cruise setting. Adjust the cruise setting with the “+/--(SET)” button, 2. Set the cruise mode with the throttle lever at Fulll Throttle

(throttle lever fully forward) whenever possible.

1

15

16

17a

17

19

2

38

39

1-24

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC/ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS DURING CHARGING OR WELDING

PRECAUTIONS

To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical systems, always observe the following:

1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit connections, including the connection at the batteries, when the engine is running.

2. Never short any of the charging components to ground.

3. Do not use a booster battery of higher than 12 volts, nominal voltage.

4. Always observe correct polarity when installing the batteries or using a booster battery to jump start the engine. Follow the instructions in

Section 2 of this manual when jump starting the tractor. Connect positive to positive and negative to negative.

5. Always disconnect the ground cable from the batteries before carrying out arc welding on the tractor or on any implement attached to the tractor.

• Position the welder ground cable clamp as close to the welding area as possible.

• If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to a computer module, then the module should be removed from the tractor.

It is recommended that this procedure be carried out by an authorized dealer.

• Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or across any electrical wiring or electronic component while welding is in progress.

1-25

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid. In case of contact with skin, flush the affected area with water for five minutes.

Seek medical attention immediately.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

wear eye protection when working near batteries.

DISCONNECTING THE NEGATIVE

BATTERY CABLE

IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two ground cable connections at the battery prior to welding on the tractor or attached implement will result in damage to the electronic and electrical systems.

To disconnect the negative battery cable connections:

1. Remove the three battery cover attaching bolts, 1.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector, 2.

3. Remove the battery cover, 3.

4. Disconnect the two negative ground cable connections, 1, from the batteries.

After completing the welding, reinstall the negative cable connections and battery cover.

40

41

1-26

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

TOWING THE TRACTOR

TRACTOR TOWING

IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow it down roadways or as a method of transport.

IMPORTANT: For transport purposes, haul the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed trailer or truck.

Use a strong chain if towing the tractor is necessary.

Tow the tractor from the rear using the drawbar or three-point hitch only. Tow the tractor from the front using both tie down brackets, 1. Have an operator steer and brake the tractor.

To avoid damaging the transmission or other components that turn but are not lubricated during towing, observe the following:

• Only tow a short distance

• Keep speed below 8 KPH (5 MPH)

• If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication, power steering and power brakes.

CAUTION

Do not tow the tractor faster than 8 kph (5 mph).

Steering is much slower and the steering wheel turns harder without the engine running.

WARNING

Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down instead of flying up.

NOTE: If equipped, four wheel drive (FWD) will be engaged if the engine is not running, regardless of the position of the FWD activation switch.

1

42

1-27

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

HAULING THE TRACTOR ON A TRANSPORTER

TRACTOR HAULING

Haul the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed trailer or truck.

Securely chain the tractor to the transporter.

Tie down brackets, 1, are provided on the front of the tractor.

IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle or other components that could be damaged by contacting the chain or by heavy loading.

Use the drawbar or drawbar cage for a rear tie down point.

1

43

PRE-OPERATION CHECKS

Before operating the tractor, be sure you are thoroughly familiar to the location and operation of the controls.

Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance operations in accordance with Section 3.

After completing the daily maintenance operations, perform a walk around visual inspection of the tractor. Pay particular attention to the following items:

• Fan belt for cracks

• Engine area for accumulation of debris

• Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.

• Tires for damage

• Hardware for looseness

• Driveline and hydraulic pump areas for leaks or debris accumulation

Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.

1-28

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BEFORE OPERATING

Read this section thoroughly. It details the location and operation of the various instruments, switches and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly read this section of the manual and be sure that you are familiar with the location and function of all the features of the tractor.

Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate the tractor until you are fully accustomed to all the controls. It is too late to learn after the tractor is moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of the tractor, consult your authorized dealer.

Pay particular attention to the recommendations for breaking-in to ensure that your tractor will give the long and dependable service for which it was designed.

See Section 3 for lubrication and maintenance requirements. Tractor specifications are listed in

Section 5.

2-1

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

The cab has been designed for operator comfort and convenience. Inside, the walls, roof, and floor are insulated to reduce noise to a minimum.

CAB

Standard features include two doors, a fresh air heater/defroster, air-conditioning, tinted glass, interior lights, assist rails, cigar lighter, ashtray, storage box and an air suspension seat.

ENTERING THE CAB

The cab may be entered from the right or left side.

To enter the cab, face a door, 1, then open it. Grasp the “A” post assist rail, 2, and the door assist rail, 3.

Place one foot on the lowest step plate, 4. Use the assist rails to climb the steps. Enter the cab, close the door, sit in the seat, and fasten the seat belt.

To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door, grasp the assist rails, back out of the cab and descend the steps using the assist rails.

DOORS

Each door has an external handle, 1, with a push button, 2. The door may be locked from the outside by using the start/stop switch key. Insert the key in the slot in the push button. Rotate the key to lock or unlock the door.

To open a door from the outside, push in on the button and pull out on the handle.

1

2

2-2

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

To open a door from the inside, pull rearward on the door handle, 1, then push out on the assist rail, 2. The doors are rear-hinged and are retained in the fully open position by gas springs.

NOTE: Do not use door handle, 1, to close the door.

The handle can be bent inwards and it will damage the latch assembly. Close the door by pulling on the assist rail, 2.

70-660-359

OPERATOR’S SEAT

The seat has an electrically controlled pneumatic suspension. The seat is equipped with controls to permit adjustment for personal comfort.

NOTE: Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust the seat, steering wheel and controls to the most comfortable position.

NOTE: A sensor in the seat detects when an operator is seated. If the operator leaves the seat without applying the parking brake, an audible alarm will sound until the operator returns to the seat, the parking brake is applied, or for a maximum of two minutes. The sensor also actuates the audible alarm for 5 seconds if the operator leaves the seat with the

PTO engaged.

3

2-3

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SEAT ADJUSTMENTS

Each numbered control is discussed under the corresponding heading.

NOTE: All adjustments should be made in the following order while sitting in the seat.

Adjust the seat using the following procedures:

1. Height/Weight Adjustment

Raise or lower the seat as follows with the key switch in the on position.

Raise - Depress the top of switch, 1. Release when the desired height is obtained.

Lower - Depress the bottom of switch, 1. Release when the desired height is achieved.

2. Backrest Angle Adjustment

Lift control, 2, and tilt the backrest to the desired position. Release control, 2, to lock the backrest in position.

NOTE: The backrest will tilt backward far enough to contact the rear window.

3. Fore/Aft Position Adjustment

Pull up on the handle, 3, and move the seat fore/aft through the 178 mm (7″) adjustment range to the desired position. Release the handle to lock the seat into position.

4. Fore/Aft Isolator Engagement

After selecting the desired fore/aft position, the seat can be held stationary or allowed to isolate fore/aft within the 51 mm (2″) limit of the isolator’s travel.

Adjust to the desired position as follows:

Isolate - Pull up on handle, 4.

Lock-out - Push down on handle, 4, while slowly moving the seat fore and aft. The handle will lower in place and the seat will not move when the lock-out position is selected.

5. Dampener Adjustment

The firmness of the ride can be adjusted as follows:

Soft - Rotate control, 5, rearward.

Firm - Rotate control, 5, forward.

6. Lumbar Adjustment

Adjust as follows:

Increase support - Turn knob, 6, clockwise

Decrease support - Turn knob, 6, counterclockwise

4

7. Armrest Angle Adjustment

Rotate knurled wheel, 7, on each armrest to adjust to the desired angle.

8. Left Armrest Height Adjustment

The left side armrest, 8, can be positioned even with the seat cushion or in four raised positions.

To adjust the height:

• Raise the armrest to the end of travel (past vertical).

• Lower the armrest until it is even with the seat cushion.

• Raise the armrest to obtain positions 2 through 4.

9. Swivel Adjustment

The seat can be adjusted to:

• Lock in one position to the left of center.

• Lock in one of four positions to the right of center (increments of 7° for a total of 28° rotation).

• Provide a free swing position without locking in any position.

To adjust the swing:

• Move the swivel control handle, 9, partially to the rear.

• Swing the seat to the desired position.

• Release the handle to lock the seat into position.

NOTE: Moving the control handle fully rearward will provide the free swing position.

2-4

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SEAT BELT

WARNING

This tractor is equipped with a retractable seat belt. Always use the seat belt.

The seat belt retracts when not in use. The belt automatically adjusts for the size of the individual in the seat.

To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push the tongue end, 1, into the buckle end, 2, until a “click” indicates it is properly engaged.

To release the belt, push the red release button, 3, on the buckle and remove the tongue from the buckle.

The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these chemicals will weaken the webbing. Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying, damage or general wear.

STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN

The steering column may be tilted and telescoped to provide a comfortable operating position.

Steering Wheel Tilt Control

Pulling the tilt control lever, 1, allows the steering wheel, 2, to be tilted to a comfortable operator position. The steering wheel can be tilted upward to the top stop to allow easy entry and exit of the cab.

5

6

2-5

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Steering Wheel Telescopic Adjustment

Rotating the center locking knob, 1, counterclockwise, will unlock the steering column so the steering wheel, 2, can be moved fore or aft (telescoped) to a comfortable operating position. Tighten in place by rotating the locking knob clockwise.

IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering wheel against either of the steering stops for more than 10 seconds or for more than a total of 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure to observe this precaution may result in damage to the steering system components.

RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

The console can be moved full forward, 1, and full rearward, 2, or stopped anywhere in between to position the controls on the console in a comfortable operator position.

NOTE: When the console is moved aft, the front of the console also moves away from the seat. This provides additional leg room while maintaining the controls in a comfortable position when the seat is swiveled to the right.

Press and hold the front of the console control switch,

3, to move the console forward. Release the switch when the desired position is obtained or when the console reaches the limit of forward travel.

Press and hold the rear of the switch for aft movement. Release the switch at the desired position or at the end of aft travel.

1

2

7

3

8

2-6

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING OPERATION

Depress the air conditioning switch, 1, to activate the air conditioner. Depress the switch a second time to deactivate the air conditioner.

NOTE: The air conditioning system uses R134A refrigerant. DO NOT mix with other refrigerants.

The temperature control switch, 2, is used to maintain a constant temperature. Rotate the temperature control switch counterclockwise towards the blue index to increase cooling. Adjust the pressurized fan speed switch, 3, to increase or decrease air flow.

To aid in defrosting the windshield and side windows the air conditioner and heater may be operated at the same time. The air conditioner will remove moisture from the air while the heater warms the air in the cab.

When the windows are clear, deactivate the air conditioner.

IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off when cooled or dehumidified air is not required. This is especially important during cold weather as damage to the compressor could result. For proper air conditioner operation, the cab air filter must be serviced regularly.

HEATER OPERATION

Make sure the air conditioner is deactivated except during defrosting. The switch, 1, should be in the extended position.

To increase the cab interior temperature for cold weather operation, start the engine and make sure the coolant temperature bar graph indicates two or more bars. Rotate the temperature control switch, 2, clockwise to the red index for more heat. Adjust the pressurized fan speed switch, 3, to increase or decrease air flow.

PRESSURIZER OPERATION

The pressurizer fan has a three-position switch, 3.

Low speed is full counterclockwise. Rotate the switch clockwise to position two for medium speed and to position three for high speed.

NOTE: The pressurizer fan will operate in one of the three speeds when the key switch is in the ON position.

2-7

9

10

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

PRESSURIZER VENTS

The pressurizer has adjustable and fixed vents to direct air flow as required. Two side vents, 1, are used to defrost and clear the doors. Four additional vents,

2, face the operator. To adjust, rotate the vents inside their housings to direct air as required. The slide lever inside the vent can be moved side to side to direct air flow to the left or right.

The windshield vent, 3, is not adjustable. This vent aids in defrosting and defogging the windshield. The cab recirculation vent, 4, is equipped with a serviceable filter. See “Section 3” for service details.

WARNING

The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air but will not exclude chemical vapor.

Follow the chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding protection from dangerous chemicals.

REAR WINDOW

To open the window, rotate the locking handle, 1, clockwise.

Two gas-filled springs, 1, will swing the window out and retain it in the open position.

NOTE: Watch for interference between the 3-point hitch-mounted implement and rear window when the rear window is open.

To close the window, pull on the handle or side rails,

2. Rotate the locking handle counterclockwise to lock the window.

2-8

11

12

13

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

RIGHT SIDE WINDOW

The window can be positioned in the closed/lock position, 1, the partially open position, 2, or the full open position, 3.

To lock the window in the closed position, pull the handle in and forward in an arc until the mechanism locks.

To partially open the window, pull the handle in an arc to the mid-position.

To fully open the window, push the handle out in an arc until the handle locks.

FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER

The windshield wiper is controlled by switch, 1. The switch has three positions.

Rotate the switch fully counterclockwise for the off position. Rotate one notch clockwise for the slow position. Rotate fully clockwise for the fast position.

Push in on the control knob to activate the washer.

REAR WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER

(If Equipped)

An optional rear wiper/washer can be installed.

The wiper is controlled by switch, 2. The switch has two positions.

Rotate the switch fully counterclockwise for the off position. Rotate fully clockwise for the on position.

Push in on the control knob to activate the washer.

14

15

2-9

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

TOOLBOX

Cab Toolbox

A storage area is located under the hinged lid, 1, at the left rear corner of the cab. Lift the lid to access the storage area. The lid is retained in the closed position by a magnetic latch.

Exterior Toolbox (Dealer-Installed Accessory)

An optional toolbox, 1, can be mounted on the front of the tractor or at the L/H side of the tractor.

The toolbox can be locked and is secured to the mounting bracket, 2, by an attaching pin located inside the toolbox. (Front mount toolbox shown)

To detach the toolbox, open the toolbox lid, remove the attaching pin, and lift the toolbox off the mounting bracket.

The tool box is mounted with the hinge forward to clear the hood.

RADIO (Factory option or dealer-installed accessory)

A choice of radios, 1, is available from your authorized dealer. Operating instructions will be supplied with the radio.

WARNING

Be sure the antenna is positioned so it cannot touch overhead power lines.

NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start switch in the On or Accessory position.

1

16

2

17

18

2-10

CLEANING THE CAB INTERIOR

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm water/detergent solution and wring out as much of the water as possible. Wipe the interior material with the damp cloth. Change the water when it becomes dirty.

The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water to flow out through the open doors. Wash the covering carefully and allow it to dry naturally. Avoid getting water under the mat.

2-11

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (EIC)

1. Liquid crystal displays (LCD) (3)

2. Indicator lamps (18)

3. Bar graphs (2)

4. Tractor performance monitor (TPM)

INTRODUCTION

The electronic instrument cluster (EIC) is shown above with a normal operating display.

When the key-start switch is turned on, a self-test of all the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) segments is activated, the audible alarm will sound for approximately one second and all lamps will be illuminated briefly, to confirm that the bulbs are functioning. The LCD background areas are illuminated when the tractor key switch is turned on.

They also have dimmer controlled back lighting.

The EIC is divided into the following areas:

1. The central LCD has transmission gear information at the top. Engine speed appears in the middle display and the bottom displays operating hours, ground speed or PTO speed, as selected.

2. The upper section consists of colored indicator or warning lamps, which provide operating information or give warning of system malfunctions.

19

5. Touch sensitive programming switches (11)

6. Indicator lamps (3)

7. Touch sensitive light control switches (5)

8. Bar graphs (2)

3. Coolant temperature and engine load are displayed in the right bar graphs.

4. The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) is displayed on the right side of the cluster. The

TPM provides information on 3-point hitch and other selected system information. Fault code information is also displayed.

5. Eleven touch-sensitive switches select different

EIC functions for display on the central display and TPM. The switches are also used for calibration purposes.

6. The indicator lamps provide operating information and give warning of system malfunctions.

7. Five touch-sensitive switches are used to control the work lights and instrument cluster back-lighting brightness.

8. Fuel level and engine oil pressure are displayed in the left bar graphs.

2-12

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

The following information details the operation and programming of the electronic instrument cluster

(EIC).

AUDIBLE ALARM

An audible alarm will sound when a warning light illuminates or a bar graph indicates a malfunction.

The alarm will alert the operator that a malfunction has occurred.

Depending on the severity of the malfunction, the alarm will sound as follows:

Non-Critical Alarm - An audible alarm sounds for one second only. The tractor will continue to operate, but the cause of the alarm should be investigated and corrected.

Critical Alarm - A continuous pulsating tone will sound until the malfunction is corrected or the engine is switched off. The alarm will sound and the engine

“STOP” message, 1, will flash in the center display for

30 seconds before automatic engine shutdown occurs. The cause of the malfunction should be located and corrected immediately to prevent damage to the tractor.

The audible alarm has a rotary volume control, 1, located on the left side of the steering column below the front controls. Rotate the alarm cover to adjust the volume.

1

20

21

2-13

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

22

1. Left turn signal

2. Trailer 2 turn signal

3. Trailer 1 turn signal

4. Trailer brake

5. Air filter

6. Cold start

7. Coolant level low

8. Alternator charge indicator

9. Intercooler overheated

10. Transmission lubrication

11. Transmission, rear axle/hydraulic oil temperature

12. Hydraulic/transmission filters

13. PTO engaged

14. Programmable up shift

15. Programmable down shift

16. Auto differential lock

17. FWD Auto

18. Right turn signal

19. Parking brake

20. System status

21. Headlight high beam

INDICATOR, WARNING LAMPS, AND

AUDIBLE ALARM

The twenty-one colored status lamps, shown above, provide operating information or give warning of system malfunction. The malfunction warning lamps are accompanied by an audible alarm.

Each indicator or warning lamp is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the following pages.

2-14

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

The status lamps/audible alarm function as follows:

1. Left Turn Signal

The Turn Signal lamp, 1, will flash in unison with tractor left-hand turn signal. An audible alarm will sound if the turn signals are left on for more than two minutes.

2. Trailer 2 Turn Signal

Not used.

3. Trailer 1 Turn Signal

Not used.

4. Trailer Brake

Not used.

5. Air Filter Restriction

The Air Filter lamp, 5, will illuminate accompanied by the non-critical alarm if the fault has existed for 10 seconds. Stop the tractor and service the air filter to prevent engine damage.

6. Cold Start

The Cold Start lamp, 6, will flash when the temperature conditions will allow use of the cold start

(when set in manual mode). The lamp illuminates steadily when the cold start system is operating. See

“Cold Weather Starting” for details.

7. Coolant Level Low

The Coolant Level lamp, 7, will illuminate when coolant drops below the sender level. A non-critical alarm will sound. Check for leaks and refill cooling system.

23

24

2-15

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

8. Alternator Charge Indicator

The Alternator lamp, 8, will illuminate steady if alternator is not charging the battery. The lamp will flash and the non-critical alarm will sound if an overcharge condition occurs.

9. Intercooler Overheated

The Intercooler lamp, 9, will illuminate and the non-critical alarm will sound when an overheat condition occurs. The cause of the alarm should be determined and corrected before further operation or engine damage may occur.

10. Transmission Pressure

The Transmission Pressure lamp, 10, illuminated accompanied by the critical alarm, indicates that the transmission lubrication circuit oil pressure is low.

The engine “STOP” message will flash for 30 seconds before automatic shutdown occurs if the feature 11 is enabled.

Stop the engine and investigate the cause.

11. Transmission, Rear Axle/Hydraulic Oil Temperature

The Transmission Temperature lamp, 11, will illuminate accompanied by the critical alarm indicates high oil temperature. The engine “STOP” message will flash for 30 seconds before automatic engine shutdown occurs. Stop the engine and investigate the cause.

25

2-16

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

12. Hydraulic/Transmission Filters

The Filter lamp, 12, continually illuminated indicates that the HYDRAULIC filter is blocked or partially blocked.

A flashing lamp indicates that the TRANSMISSION filter is blocked or partially blocked. Both are non-critical alarms and the filters should be serviced as soon as practical and certainly within 1 hour of operation.

13. PTO Engaged

The PTO On lamp, 13, will illuminate whenever the engine is running and PTO is engaged. The lamp will flash and a five second alarm will sound if the operator leaves the seat while the PTO is engaged.

14. Programmable Up Shift

The Up Shift lamp, 14, will illuminate when programmable up shift is selected.

15. Programmable Down Shift

The Down Shift lamp, 15, will illuminate when programmable down shift is selected.

26

2-17

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

16. Differential Lock -- Auto/Traction Control

System (TCS)

The Differential Lock lamp, 16, and switch will illuminate when Auto differential lock or TCS is engaged.

Auto differential lock will disengage and reengage when one brake is applied then released, or when the

3-point hitch FAST RAISE/WORK switch is activated then deactivated. If equipped with TCS the front and rear differential locks will also disengage and reengage with hard turning angles.

The indicator light on the instrument panel will go out when differential lock has disengaged.

To turn off auto differential lock or TCS, depress the rear part of the switch.

NOTE: TCS will disengage at speeds up to 10 kph (6

MPH) at turn angles of 20° or higher and reengage

at angles less than 20°. TCS will disengage at speeds between 10-15 kph (6-9 MPH) at turn angles

of 10° or higher and reengage at angles less than

10°.

NOTE: Auto differential lock and TCS will automatically disengage completely if the unit is operated above 16 kph (10 MPH).

17. Four Wheel Drive (FWD) -- Auto/Traction

Control System (TCS)

The FWD lamp, 17, illuminates when switched to automatic FWD mode or TCS mode.

NOTE: Lamp, 17, will turn off when one brake is applied and come on when the brake is released.

TCS will also disengage at speeds of 10 kph (6 MPH)

or below at turn angles of 30° and higher or between

10-20 kph (6-13 MPH) at turn angles of 25° or higher

and reengage at angles less than 30° or 25° respectively. As well as competely disengage at any angle above 24 kph (15 MPH) and reengage under

24 kph (15 MPH).

18. Right Turn Signal

The Turn Signal lamp, 18, will flash in unison with tractor right-hand turn signal. An audible alarm will sound if the turn signals are left on for more than two minutes.

2-18

27

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

19. Parking Brake

With the KEY-START switch on, a continually illuminated parking brake lamp, 19, indicates that the parking brake is applied. If the gearshift lever is moved from neutral to a gear position with the parking brake applied, the alarm will sound, the transmission will be disabled and a “P” operator prompt will flash in the gear display. To drive the tractor, move the shift lever to neutral, apply the foot brake, release the parking brake and select a transmission gear.

If the KEY-START switch is turned off, and the parking brake is not applied, a pulsating alarm will sound continuously in unison with the flashing parking brake lamp, 19, for approximately two minutes or until the parking brake is applied, whichever occurs first.

If the operator leaves the seat with the engine running and gear shift in neutral, the parking brake pulsating audible alarm will signal in unison with the flashing parking brake lamp for 2 minutes or until the brake is applied.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury, always apply the parking brake before leaving the tractor seat.

20. System Status

The System Status lamp, 20, is illuminated when all systems are normal. It flashes when a malfunction is detected in a system monitored by the warning lamps or bar graphs.

21. Headlight High Beam

The High Beam lamp, 21, will illuminate when the tractor lights are switched to high beam.

28

2-19

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BAR GRAPH DISPLAYS (LCD)

The four bar graphs each consist of twenty LCD segments.

All bar graph sensors are continuously tested for faults. If a fault occurs, the bar graph will flash and a fault code will be stored.

Fuel Level

The outside left bar graph, 1, shows fuel level. Each segment of the bar graph display represents one-twentieth (approximately 5 percent) of the total fuel content of the tank.

When the fuel level falls so that only two segments of the bar graph are displayed, the bar graph will flash continually and the non-critical alarm will sound for one second.

Engine Oil Pressure

The inside left bar graph, 2, indicates engine oil pressure. With normal engine oil pressure, up to sixteen segments of the bar graph will be displayed.

This is represented by the green area of the adjacent range display.

Should engine oil pressure fall below a designated level, the bar graph will flash. The critical alarm will sound, the word “STOP” will flash in the central display for 30 seconds and the engine will automatically shut down.

Stop the engine immediately and investigate the cause.

NOTE: The bar graph indicates engine oil pressure only. It is not an indication of oil level. The engine oil level must be checked daily by means of the dipstick.

29

2-20

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Engine Coolant Temperature

The right inside bar graph, 1, registers coolant temperature. One segment of the bar graph will be displayed if the engine is cold. The number of segments displayed will increase as the engine warms up. With the engine at normal operating temperature, up to fifteen segments will be displayed. The normal working range is indicated by the green area of the adjacent range display.

Should the coolant temperature exceed a predetermined level, the coolant temperature bar graph will flash. The critical alarm will sound, the word “STOP” will flash in the central display for 30 seconds, and the engine will automatically shut down.

Stop the engine immediately and investigate the cause.

COOLANT TEMP ENGINE LOAD

NOTE: The bar graph indicates engine coolant temperature only. It is not an indication of coolant level. The engine coolant must be checked daily.

Engine Load

The right outside bar graph, 2, relates to engine load.

The number of segments displayed will increase as the engine load increases.

30

2-21

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN

An automatic engine shutdown feature is standard equipment. This feature will automatically shut down the engine within 30 seconds if engine oil pressure falls below or engine coolant temperature rises above predetermined levels. The engine will also shut down after 30 seconds if the transmission low pressure lamp or the transmission high temperature lamp illuminates. See oil temperature software described later in this section. This feature protects the engine and drivetrain of an unattended tractor carrying out stationary PTO work.

WARNING

The engine shutdown feature is fully automatic.

It can be overridden by the operator to drive the tractor to a safe location. The override switch is to the right of the steering column and should only be used to move the tractor far enough to avoid a dangerous situation, such as traffic.

A lamp is illuminated in the switch when override is enabled. See “Shut Down Override Switch Operation” in the “Engine Operation” section later in this section.

CENTRAL DISPLAY

Three liquid crystal displays (LCD) are located in the center of the instrument cluster.

At the top of the display is the digital transmission gear shift position display, 1.

In the center is the digital engine speed display, 2.

The bottom LCD, 3, will display:

• Engine hours accumulated (actual time)

• Tractor ground speed (MPH or km/h)

• PTO speed (rev/min)

• Service alert indicator

31

2-22

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

TRANSMISSION GEAR SHIFT POSITION

DISPLAY

The upper LCD, 1, provides a display of the gear selected.

The left position, 2, displays a letter as follows:

F - Forward gear selected*

N - Neutral selected

R - Reverse gear selected*

C - Creeper gear speeds selected (if equipped)

A - Automatic shift selected

P - Parking brake applied*

U - Upshift selected* d - Down shift selected*

The right digit(s), 3, display gear 1-16.

*If the letter is flashing, the display is indicating an

“Operator Prompt” where the park brake is inappropriately on or off or out of sequence with the transmission control lever. To return to normal operation, release or apply the park brake as appropriate. Return the transmission control lever to neutral, release the park brake, then shift to either forward or reverse as desired.

The right position, 3, represents the gear selected.

ENGINE SPEED - DIGITAL DISPLAY

With the engine running, the digital value, 1, of the engine RPM will be displayed, together with the RPM legend, 2, in the center LCD.

The engine LCD will register in increments of 10

RPM.

If a critical engine or driveline fault should occur, the word “STOP” will flash for 30 seconds in the display area and the engine will shut down automatically.

32

33

2-23

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SELECTABLE DISPLAYS

Using the key pad, the lower display will allow the operator to select one of three displays as follows:

Engine Hour Meter

When the KEY-START switch is turned on, the LCD will display the hours the engine has operated, 1, and the hour meter symbol, 2.

The operator may manually select ground speed or

PTO speed. Driving the tractor will cause the display to change automatically to ground speed. The hour meter display may be recalled at any time by touching switch, 3, Figure 35.

With the engine running, the hour meter will accumulate hours in increments of 0.1 hours until

1999.9 hours are reached. After that time, the hour meter will accumulate complete hours only, e.g.

2000, 2001 hours, etc.

NOTE: Accumulated hours are stored in the computer permanent memory which is not affected by disconnecting the tractor batteries.

The hour meter may be programmed to remind the operator when the next scheduled service is due.

When a Service Alert is reached, the word

“SERVICE”, 3, will flash along with the selected display. See “Programming the Service Alert

Indicators” later in this section.

34

2-24

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Ground Speed Display (Speedometer)

NOTE: The electronic instrument panel is set at the factory to display either English (MPH & FT.) or

Metric (km/h & METERS.) If required, the display may be reprogrammed to show the desired values by holding the E/M switch, 4, for three seconds. The display will change and convert the digits to the new values.

Touch switch, 1, to show the ground speed in the main display. The MPH or km/h legend, 5, Figure 34, as appropriate, will also be displayed.

NOTE: The speedometer senses rotation of the rear axle and may be subject to errors caused by the effects of wheel slip, tire pressures/condition, etc. If the optional radar sensor is installed, the tractor senses true ground speed for greater measurement accuracy.

NOTE: The lower central display will automatically show ground speed if the tractor is traveling at more than 20 km/h (12.4 MPH ). If required to display any other function, the appropriate selector switch must be continuously depressed.

Power Take-Off Display

540/1000 RPM PTO-Equipped Units

(Model 2145)

Touch switch, 2, and the PTO 540 legend, 4, Figure

34, will display, together with the PTO speed in the

LCD. If the 1000 rev/min PTO shaft is in use, touch the selector switch again and the PTO 1000 legend will display together with a digital display of PTO speed.

The PTO has a non-critical overspeed alert. If 540

PTO speed is greater than 630 RPM or 1000 PTO speed is greater than 1152 RPM, the “PTO ON” status lamp will flash and a second audible alarm will occur. The green system status lamp will also flash when the PTO status “overspeed” alert occurs.

1000 RPM PTO Equipped Units

(Models 2160, 2180, 2210)

Touch switch, 2, and the PTO 1000 legend will display, together with the PTO speed.

2-25

35

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

EIC TRACTOR PERFORMANCE MONITOR (TPM)

INTRODUCTION

The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM), 1, is located in the lower right-hand panel and includes:

Automatic Display Information

• Hitch enabled (with 3-point only)

• Hitch position digital value (with 3-point only)

• Hitch disabled (with 3-point only)

• Fault code indicator

Selectable Display Information

• Area per hour forecaster (acres or hectares)

• Area accumulated (acres or hectares)

• Wheel slip percentage with adjustable alarm point (optional feature)

• Battery voltage

• 540 PTO speed in RPM’s (if equipped)

• 1000 PTO speed in RPM’s scale

• Distance measurement in feet or meters

36

2-26

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

AUTOMATIC DISPLAY INFORMATION

The following information is automatically displayed:

Hitch Disabled Symbol (with 3-point Hitch only)

The hitch disabled symbol, 1, is displayed when the

3-point linkage is out of phase with the 3-point hitch control lever. See “3-Point Hitch Control” later in this section.

NOTE: If the Hitch Disabled Symbol is flashing, a fault has occurred. The 3-point hitch warning light will also be flashing on the right-hand console which requires attention before proper operation of the tractor hitch can occur. See “Fault Code Indicator” later on this page.

Hitch Position Display (with 3-point Hitch only)

This display, 2, advises the operator of the relative position of the lower links (and implement) by means of numbers ranging from “0” (fully lowered position) to “99” (maximum height position.) See “3-point Hitch

Control” later in this section.

Hitch Enabled Symbol (with 3-point Hitch only)

The hitch enabled symbol, 3, is displayed to advise the operator when the 3-point linkage is in phase with the 3-point hitch control lever. See “3-Point Hitch

Control” later in this section.

Fault Code Indicator

In the event that a fault occurs within the tractor’s electrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol

“READ YOUR MANUAL,” 4, will flash on and off.

Fault codes can be reviewed using the procedure detailed in the “EIC-Programming” section later in this section.

If the fault code indicator or fault codes are displayed, refer to the “EIC Programming” section for information on retrieving and clearing the display.

37

2-27

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SELECTABLE DISPLAY INFORMATION

The following information may be selected for display:

Area Per Hour Forecaster

Touch the AREA/HR switch, 4. The “AREA/HOUR” legend, 1, will display, together with a forecast of the area that will be worked in one hour, 2, if the current rate of work is continued.

This forecast is based on the last 5 seconds running average. The forecast may be in acres (FT), 3, or hectares (METERS).

The unit of measure, FT/METER, can be changed by holding the E/M English/metric switch for 3 seconds.

“0” will be displayed whenever the tractor is stopped.

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per hour calculations are based on axle speed and are subject to inaccuracies caused by the wheel slip that may be present.

Area Accumulator

Accumulated area (total area worked), 1, can be displayed by depressing the AREA switch, 2. Area is displayed in acres or hectares. “AREA” and “ON”, 6, will be displayed. Touch the START/STOP switch, 3, and the word “OFF”, 5, will display indicating the area counter is shut off. If the 3-point hitch is raised, the word “OFF” should appear to stop area accumulation. Lower the 3-point hitch to again display “ON” and begin accumulating area.

NOTE: A remote implement status switch can also be added to the tractor by use of the purple wire

(CM40) located behind the operator’s seat, under the floormat. By adding a contact switch to a trailing implement, the area counter can be turned on and off by lowering and raising the implement.

IMPORTANT: 3 Point Hitch area counter point must be set to 99 for the remote implement status switch system to operate. See Three Point Hitch Position --

Area Counter found later in this section.

English display (acres), designated by “FT” legend,

4, starts to accumulate in increments of 0.1 acres.

When 1000 acres are reached, area accumulation continues in whole acres. When 9999 acres are reached, the display will reset to zero.

Metric display (hectares), designated by METERS legend starts to accumulate in increments of.01

hectares. When 100.0 hectares are reached, area accumulation continues in increments of 0.1

hectares until 1000 is reached. The display will then accumulate whole hectares. When 9999 hectares are reached, the display will reset to zero.

2-28

38

39

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

With AREA selected, area accumulation can be reset to zero by holding down the START/STOP switch, 3, for three seconds until a “beep” is heard from the audible alarm.

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area calculations are based on axle speed and are subject to inaccuracies caused by wheel slip that may be present.

Wheel Slip (with Radar Option)

Touch the %SLIP selector switch, 4. The “%SLIP” legend, 1, will display together with a two-digit slip value, 2, in the main TPM display. The slip value is detected by the comparison of theoretical ground speed (axle rotation sensor) with true ground speed

(radar sensor).

Slip zero calibration occurs automatically. However, when widely differing soil conditions are encountered, it may be necessary to manually zero the wheel slip ratio, as follows:

Drive the tractor in the soil conditions to be worked, with implement raised, at a constant speed of less than 16 km/h (10 MPH). This will determine the minimum wheel slip under light operating conditions to be used as a 0% reference point. With % SLIP function selected, hold down the START/STOP switch, 5, for at least three seconds.

A “beep” from the alarm and “0” in the display indicates that the module has been calibrated to a minimum slip condition.

WARNING

The radar ground speed sensor emits a low intensity microwave signal which will not cause any ill effects in normal use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look directly into the face of the sensor while in operation so as to avoid eye damage.

IMPORTANT: Before carrying out arc welding on the tractor or on any equipment attached to the tractor, disconnect all power and ground leads from the batteries in order to avoid possible damage to electronic components.

Slip Alarm (with Radar Option)

A slip alarm point may be entered - see “EIC

Programming.” When wheel slip exceeds the value entered, the alarm will sound for one second. If wheel slip is selected, the “% SLIP”, 1, legend will be displayed. In addition, the “ALARM”, 3, legend will flash and continue to flash until wheel slip is reduced below the present level.

2-29

40

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Battery Voltage

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 3. The “VOLTS” legend, 1, will display, together with a digital display of battery voltage, 2, to the nearest tenth volt.

PTO Speed 540 RPM Scale (If Equipped)

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, again and the

“540 PTO” legend, 1, will be displayed, together with a digital display of PTO speed, 2. This feature allows the operator to view both PTO speed and ground speed while operating.

PTO Speed 1000 RPM Scale

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, again and the

“1000 PTO” legend, 3, will be displayed, together with a digital display of PTO speed, 2. This feature allows the operator to view both PTO speed and ground speed while operating.

Distance Measurement

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 6 again and the

“DIST FT”, 1, or “DIST METERS” legend will be displayed. The tractor will now measure distance in feet or meters. Operate the tractor normally and press the START/STOP switch, 5, at the point where distance measuring is to begin. The “ON” legend, 2, will be displayed along with a digital display of distance traveled, 3. At the end of the distance, again press the START/STOP switch, 5. A digital display of distance traveled in feet or meters will be displayed with the “OFF” legend, 4. If the START/STOP switch is again pressed, additional feet or meters will be added to the existing measurement. Pressing the

START/STOP switch, 5, for more than three seconds will zero the display.

2-30

41

42

43

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

EIC PROGRAMMING

OPERATOR CALIBRATION

In order that the modules may correctly calculate and display work done (area per hour, area accumulated, etc.) various factors must be entered into the modules. To enter the set up mode, turn the key-start switch on and hold down the SET UP/SELECT switch, 2, for three seconds until a “beep” is heard.

The TPM display will indicate __ __ __ 1, which means the EIC is in the first of 12 programming and diagnostic modes. Touching the DIGIT SET switch,

4, Figure 44, will cycle through modes 1 - 12. Mode,

1, is for operator calibrations. Modes 2 - 12, are discussed in the Service Manual.

To enter Mode 1, hold the SET UP/SELECT switch,

1, for three seconds. The TPM display will show IMP.

WIDTH CAL and a flashing left-hand digit.

When in the set up mode, repeatedly touching the

SET UP/SELECT switch, 1, will cause the modules to run through the various set up functions in the following order:

1. Implement width

2. Slip alarm point (option)

3. Service Alert Indicator I

4. Service Alert Indicator II

5. Ground speed calibration

6. Area Preset

7. Fault code display - ON/OFF

8. Three Point Hitch position -- Area Counter

2-31

44

45

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Setting Implement Width

In order that the modules may calculate the work done, the working width of the implement in use must be entered into the memory.

Implement width is a four-digit display and will appear as “000.0” feet, 2, or “00.00” meters with the left-hand digit, 1, flashing. “IMP WIDTH CAL,” 7, and either “FT,” 6, or “METERS” will also be displayed.

Touch the digit select switch, 4, to move the flashing digit to the right. Touch the digit set switch, 5, to increase the numerical value of the flashing digit.

For example: To set an implement working width of

12.5 feet, a display of “012.5” is required. Touch the

DIGIT SELECT switch, 4, to cause the second digit from the left to flash. Touch the DIGIT SET switch, 5, to change the flashing digit from “O” to “1.”

Use the DIGIT SELECT, 4, and DIGIT SET, 5, switches to change the remaining digits until “012.5” is displayed.

NOTE: The area measured will only be accurate if there is no implement overlap when the tractor turns around at the end of a run to make another pass.

Alternatively, the implement width entered into memory may be reduced by the estimated amount of overlap.

With the required implement width displayed, touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 3, to enter the implement width into memory and change the display to the % SLIP alarm point.

Setting The Slip Alarm Point (Option)

NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the slip alarm function will be omitted from the sequence.

The slip alarm point will appear as a two-digit display,

1, with the left-hand digit flashing. “% SLIP,” 2, and

“ALARM,” 3, will also be displayed with the word

CAL, 4.

Use the DIGIT SET, 7, and DIGIT SELECT, 6, switches to change the value to the required setting.

If the slip alarm is not required, set the display, 1, to

“00.”

With the required slip alarm point displayed, touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 5, to change the lower display to show the first Service Alert Indicator “I.”

NOTE: Slip limit control will not operate below 0.8

km/h (0.5 MPH). Slip limit control will disengage when the 3-point linkage is raised and re-engage when the implement is lowered into the ground.

2-32

46

47

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Programming the “Service Alert Indicators”

During normal tractor operation, the hour meter will reach preprogrammed service intervals.

This causes the word “SERVICE,” 1, to flash whenever the key is on if service is due. The symbol will flash for the next 10 hours of operation, or until the specific service is completed and the display is reset.

The operator can program 1, 2 or no Service Alert

Indicators into the lower selectable LCD.

Example: The operator wants the hour meter to signal for minor service every 50 hours and major service to be performed every 300 hours.

The letter “I,” 1, and the 3-digit number, 2, in the display corresponds to the “next service due” interval previously entered into the memory. If “I_ 025” is displayed, the hour meter will signal the operator every 25 hours that service is due. A “I_000” programmed into the display will disable the “Service

Alert Indicator.”

The left-hand digit of the display will be flashing. If the digit is already reading “0,” there is no need to change it. Touch the DIGIT SELECT switch, 3, to select the next digit to the right, which will flash.

Each touch of the DIGIT SET switch, 6, will increase the value of the flashing digit, 1, by one. When the digit reaches “5”, touch the DIGIT SELECT switch, 5, which will cause the next digit, 2, in the display to flash. Change the value of this digit, if necessary, using the DIGIT SET switch, 6, as previously described until it reaches “0.”

With “1-050” displayed, touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4. The Service Alert Indicator II can now be programmed for the 300- hour service interval.

Every 50 hours of tractor operation the word

“SERVICE” will flash when the key is on. The display will continue to flash until the START/STOP, RESET switch, 3, is used to cancel the flashing display after reentering the Service Alert programming mode.

2-33

48

49

50

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

To program the Service Alert Indicator II, the process is the same as for Service Alert I, but when the SET

UP/SELECT switch, 3, is touched, the left digits, 1, will be “II.” The next digit, 2, will be flashing indicating that the operator can now program the 300-hour

Service Alert Interval II.

CANCEL FLASHING SERVICE INDICATOR

To identify which service is due and to cancel the alert after the service has been completed, reenter the service alert programming menu. If the word

“SERVICE,” 1, is flashing and a single I is displayed, complete the 50-hour service as described in the

“Lubrication and Maintenance” section and cancel the alert by holding the START/STOP, RESET switch, 3, for three seconds.

The left digit will begin flashing indicating that the service hour interval can now be changed. If no change is desired, touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, to select the service alert II indicator. If the word “SERVICE”, 1, is flashing and II, 5, is displayed, the 300-hour service, 2, is required. To cancel the alert after the service has been completed, hold the

START/STOP, RESET switch, 3, for three seconds.

NOTE: If the START/STOP, RESET switch, 3, is held for an additional three seconds, the previously stored service alert interval will be reset to 0. To reprogram a new interval, review the previous programming steps.

After the service intervals have been entered, touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, to view and change the Ground Speed Calibration constant.

51

52

2-34

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Ground Speed Calibration (Non-Radar Tractors

Only)

The ground speed in the display is calibrated in the factory to suit the static radius of the rear tires.

However, should tires of a different size be installed, weights or equipment permanently installed on the tractor that would alter the static radius of the tires by more than 6 mm (0.25″), the EIC should be recalibrated to display a more accurate ground speed using the following method:

Ensure that the tire pressures are correct for the load being carried. See “Tire Load/Inflation Tables” in

Section 5.

Park the tractor on a firm level surface and carefully measure the distance from the center of the rear hub to the ground, Figure 54. This is the static loaded radius.

While in the programming mode, ensure that the word “CAL,” 4, the “FT, 3, or METERS” legend and the previously entered calibration number, 2, is displayed with the left-hand digit, 1, flashing.

If required, change the value of the flashing digit using the DIGIT SET switch, 7, as described previously in “Programming the Service Alert

Indicator.”

Enter the actual static loaded radius of the tire in inches to the closest 0.1″ or to the closest mm if using metric units.

NOTE: The minimum allowable number is 641 mm

(26″).

To select the next digit to the right, use the DIGIT

SELECT switch, 6, and when that digit is flashing use the DIGIT SET switch, 7, to change the value. Repeat for the remaining digits.

When the required calibration number is displayed, enter it into the memory by holding the SET

UP/SELECT switch, 5, for three seconds. Touch the switch again to cycle to the next calibration step which is “Area Preset.”

Ground Speed Calibration (Radar-Equipped

Tractors)

Tractors fitted with the optional radar gun automatically recalculate and change the loaded radius. The steps described in the previous paragraphs are not necessary. This automatic recalculation occurs over a 15-minute time period when tractor speed is above

16 Kph (10 mph).

The operator can manually reset the loaded radius by zeroing the wheel slip as described earlier in this section.

NOTE: The loaded radius numbers are only displayed in the EIC. The values are stored in the

(CCM) Chassis Control Module.

2-35

53

54

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Area Preset

Normally, area would be reset to zero by holding the

START/STOP switch, 3, down until a “beep” is heard from the alarm (approximately three seconds) when in the AREA PRESET calibration mode. However, it is possible to enter a value other than zero and measure additional area worked. Area measured during a previous operation can be entered.

The area preset will appear as a four-digit display, 1, with the left-hand digit flashing. “AREA,” 8, will also be displayed in the LCD along with the CAL legend,

2, and FT, 7, or METERS. Use the DIGIT SET, 6, and

DIGIT SELECT, 5, switches, as previously described, to change the value to the desired setting or to zero.

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, and the display will cycle to fault codes, ON/OFF.

FAULT CODES ON/OFF

Fault codes can be displayed during tractor operation or not displayed to allow full operation of the TPM.

In the event that a fault occurs within the tractor electrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol

“READ YOUR MANUAL,” 1, will flash on and off and the code will be stored.

The tractor is factory set to display normal TPM functions and to store fault codes. The “OFF” legend,

3, will be displayed.

To view fault codes as they occur, press the

START/STOP switch, 4. The display will show the

“READ YOUR MANUAL” symbol, 1, and the “ON” legend, 2. Press the START/STOP switch again and the “READ YOUR MANUAL” legend, 1, and the

“OFF” legend, 3, will be displayed.

When “ON” is displayed, fault codes will appear as they occur and also be stored in memory. When

“OFF” is displayed, the fault code will be stored in memory and the “READ YOUR MANUAL” symbol, 1, will be displayed.

55

56

2-36

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Fault codes, 1, will be flashing three-digit numbers preceded by the letter “F.”

The fault code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g., short circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. If these codes should occur, contact your authorized dealer and quote the fault code number.

The modules and fault code ranges are as follows:

FAULT

CODE

NUMBER SYSTEM MODULE

F000-F099 Electronic Draft Control

F100-F199 Right-hand Controls

F200-F299 Electronic Instrument Cluster

F300-F399 Electronic Transmission Control

F400-F499 Engine

A complete detailed list of fault codes may be seen at your Buhler Versatile dealer.

CLEARING FAULT CODES

During normal operation, when fault code “ON” is selected, all fault codes will be displayed as they occur and continue flashing until the fault is corrected.

The code(s) can be temporarily cleared to return to normal operation by holding the START/STOP switch, 2, for three seconds. When the key switch is turned to off and the tractor is restarted, the fault code(s) will be redisplayed. Use the START/STOP switch to again cancel the display of the fault codes.

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 3, and the display will cycle back to the first programming step for review or further programming.

THREE POINT HITCH POSITION -- AREA

COUNTER

Used for setting the position of the 3-Point Hitch at which the area counter stops accumulating. This feature is used with a Three Point Hitch implement where you wish to stop accumulating area with the implement raised above a certain level. If used, set the value of the flashing digit using the DIGIT SET switch as described previously in this section. The value may be set to any value from 00 (Three Point

Hitch at lowest point) to 99 (Three Point Hitch at highest position). The setting must be 99 for the remote implement status switch system to operate.

See area accumulator section found earlier in this section.

2-37

57

58

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

EIC LIGHTING DISPLAY

EXITING THE SET UP MODE

To exit the operator calibration mode, touch the E/M switch, 2. The display, 1, will show “ _ _ _1.” Touching the switch again will return the display to normal operation. Alternatively, to exit the set up mode, turn the key-start switch off.

The EIC and Tractor Performance Monitor are now programmed for use.

LIGHTING DISPLAY

The lighting display, 1, is used to activate and monitor the dash and work light circuits.

The operation of the lighting display is covered under the “Lighting and Accessory Power” heading.

59

60

2-38

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

LIGHTS AND ACCESSORY POWER POINTS

MASTER LIGHT SWITCH

Lights are controlled by the four position MASTER

LIGHT switch, 1, as follows:

A Full counterclockwise is off

*B Parking lights on

*C Headlights and parking lights on

*D Work lights, headlights and parking lights on.

The work lights are selected by using the touch-sensitive switches, 2, on the electronic instrument cluster (EIC).

* Monitor lamp, 7, will be on in these positions.

The MASTER LIGHT switch will turn all work lights off. When the master switch is again turned to the work lights position, the same work lights will be illuminated.

If the light switch is in any position other than off when the key is turned off, a five second audible alert will be activated. Turn the light switch off to cancel the alert.

PANEL DIM CONTROL

61

Dimmer control, 4, can be activated with the master lights on or off. Touch the DIMMER switch, 4, and the instrument console back lights will go from bright to dim. Hold the switch and the lights will dim to whatever level the operator requires.

Touch the switch again to select bright.

WORK LIGHTS

Reference the work light selector switches, 2, and monitor, 3:

To operate the lower front and side work lights, 2,

Figure 64, touch selector switch, 1. The indicator lights will illuminate at lower position 1 on the monitor to indicate the lights are activated.

To operate the lower rear work lights, 3, Figure 65, touch selector switch, 2. The indicator light will illuminate at position 2 on the monitor to indicate the lights are activated.

ROTARY BEACON

Available from Buhler Versatile Parts

Push the top of the switch, 5, to actuate the rotary beacon. The top of the switch is illuminated when on.

Push the bottom of the switch to turn the beacon off.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

The switch, 6, is internally illuminated and, when actuated by pushing the top of the switch, will flash in unison with all the tractor and trailer turn signals and the green indicator lamps in the EIC.

NOTE: A remote work lamp can also be activated with switch, 2, using the seven pin auxiliary trailer connector pin 7, Figure 67.

To operate the upper rear work lights, 4, Figure 65, touch selector switch, 3. The indicator light will illuminate at position 3 on the monitor to indicate the lights are activated.

NOTE: If the hazard lights are on, the rear work lights will automatically be turned off.

To operate the optional upper front work lights, 4,

Figure 64, touch selector switch, 4. The indicator light will illuminate at position 4 on the monitor to indicate the lights are activated.

Touch any switch a second time to turn the respective lights off.

Push the bottom of the switch to turn off the hazard lights.

NOTE: When a turn signal is activated, the activated lights will flash, indicating a turn, while the lights on the other side of the tractor will be lighted continuously. For your protection, use the hazard warning lights when traveling on public roads unless prohibited by law.

2-39

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Two lights, 1, are provided to illuminate the cab interior. Each light switch can be set to one of three positions:

A On

B Off

C On when a door is opened

MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH

The stalk-type multi-function switch operates the horn, turn signals, headlight flash and is used to select HI or LOW beam.

TURN SIGNALS

Move the stalk to position 1 to indicate a right-hand turn. Move the stalk to position 4 to indicate a left-hand turn.

The turn signal warning light (and trailer lights, if connected) will also flash when the signals are operated.

HEADLIGHTS HIGH/LOW BEAMS

With the headlights switched on, pull the stalk to position 3, to change from one beam to the other beam.

HEADLIGHT FLASH

With low beam headlights on, pull the stalk to position

2, to flash the high beams. Release the stalk to return to low beams.

When the headlights are not on, pull the stalk to position 2 to flash the high beam headlights, and then release to turn off the high beams.

HORN

Press in the end of the stalk, 5, to actuate the horn.

2-40

62

63

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FRONT LIGHTS

The headlights, 1, are illuminated when the MASTER

LIGHT switch is in the headlight or work light position.

All four lights are illuminated when high beam is selected. The outer headlights are illuminated when low beam is selected.

The side and lower work lights, 2, are illuminated by touching the work light selector switch, 1, with the master switch in the work light position.

The directional signals/hazard lights, 3, are selected with the hazard warning light switch or the multi-function switch.

The optional upper front work lights, 4, are illuminated by touching the work light selector switch,

4, with the master switch in the work light position.

REAR LIGHTS

The parking lights, 1, are illuminated with the light switch in the park, headlight, or work light positions.

The brake lights, 1, are illuminated when both brake pedals are depressed.

The rear directional/hazard lamps, 2, flash in unison with the front directional/hazard lights.

The lower rear work lights, 3, are illuminated when the master switch is in the work light position and work light selector switch, 2, is selected. The center work light may be turned off while leaving the outer lamps illuminated. Use the toggle switch located on the rear of the center lamp’s housing to turn off the light.

The upper rear work lights, 4, are illuminated when the master switch is in the work light position and selector switch, 3, is selected.

SEVEN PIN AUXILIARY CONNECTOR

A standard SAE seven pin connector, 1, is provided to operate the electrical system on implements and trailers. Pin information is as follows:

1

PIN

NUMBER

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

CIRCUIT

Ground

WIRE

NUMBER

RM4

TAPE

COLOR

MAX

AMPS

White N/A

Work Lamp

Flasher L/H

RM141 Black 10A

RM287Y Yellow 10A

RM55 Red 10A Stop Lamp

Flasher R/H RM287Z Green 10A

Tail Lamps RM162 Brown 10A

Aux Power RM131 Blue 20A

The mating SAE seven pin connector P/N 59624 may be purchased from your Buhler Versatile dealer.

2-41

64

65

66

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SINGLE PIN AUXILIARY CONNECTOR

A 12-volt single pin power connector, 1, is located at the right rear of the cab. The connector has an 8-amp rating to power electrical monitoring equipment. The connector is activated by the KEY-START switch.

The mating single pin connector P/N 86508819 may be purchased from your Buhler Versatile dealer.

THREE PIN AUXILIARY MATING

CONNECTOR

A 12-volt, three pin connector, 2, is installed to allow the attachment and operation of electronic control boxes.

Terminal, 3, is controlled by the key switch. This terminal has a 30-amp rating.

Terminal, 4, is powered continually. This terminal has an 8-amp rating.

Terminal, 5, is ground.

The mating male three pin connector P/N 86032122 may be obtained from your Buhler Versatile Dealer.

MONITOR MOUNT -- AUXILIARY POWER

BAR KIT (P/N 86030509)

This kit provides additional power sources for cab mounted monitors.

Terminal, 3, is controlled by the key switch. This terminal has a 15-amp rating.

Terminal, 4, is powered continually. This terminal has an 15-amp rating.

Terminal, 5, is ground.

67

68

2-42

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

AUXILIARY CONTROL MOUNTING

LOCATIONS

Two 10 mm cap screws, 2, are located in the right rear panel for attaching an equipment monitor or control box.

An alternate mounting position is provided on the inner face of the right front “A” post, 1.

NOTE: When installing two-way communication radios:

1. Install the radio on the left side of the cab.

2. Route the co-axial cable out the left side of the cab.

3. Mount the antenna on a ground plane on the roof.

4. Make sure the antenna is grounded.

AUXILIARY CONTROL CABLE ROUTING

Two locations are provided for routing the operating cables from the control box to the attachment.

1

Rear Window Grommet

A rubber grommet, 1, is provided to allow equipment control cables, 2, to pass through the rear window frame, 3.

Pull the grommet plug, 1, up to remove. Slit the grommet plug from the bottom into the hollow center,

4. Route implement controls through the grommet plug, then reinstall the grommet plug.

Removable Panel

A removable panel, 1, is located below the rear window. Remove the panel to access the opening in the rear cab wall. Route the controls through the opening. Store the panel and attaching hardware for future use.

4

1

1

2

3

2

69

70

71

2-43

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BRAKES

FOOT BRAKES

All tractors are equipped with hydraulic assisted self-adjusting power brakes. The hydraulic assist only functions with the engine running. With the engine off, the brakes will still function but with higher pedal effort. Use both parking brake and foot brakes to stop with the engine not running.

CAUTION

Use caution when towing loads at transport speeds. Reduce speed if towed load weighs more than the tractor and is not equipped with brakes. Avoid hard braking applications. (Consult the implement operator’s manual for recommended transport speeds.)

The foot brakes may be operated independently to aid turning or together for normal stopping. When operating in the field it is advised that the brake pedals be unlocked.

WARNING

Always lock the brakes together when traveling on the highway. Never use the brakes to aid turning at high speed.

To lock the brake pedals together, swing the lock plate, 1, into the slot on the right foot brake pedal, 2.

To unlock the brake, position the plate, 1, into the slot on the left pedal, 3.

The rear fender brake lights will be illuminated when both brakes are applied.

Periodically test brake pedals with the engine stopped to make sure manual brake system is functioning.

Never ride the brakes by resting a foot on the pedals.

This causes unnecessary wear on the brakes.

Tractors equipped with FWD will automatically engage the four wheel drive for improved braking when both pedals are depressed.

2-44

72

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

EMERGENCY STOPPING AND PARKING

BRAKE

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever, 1, up. To release, raise the lever up slightly, then depress button, 2, and lower the lever.

CAUTION

The parking brake must be engaged before the operator leaves the seat.

NOTE: A two-minute pulsating audible alarm will sound with a flashing parking brake lamp to remind the operator to apply the parking brake if the tractor engine is stopped without the parking brake applied.

The parking brake indicator lamp will illuminate when the parking brake is applied.

IMPORTANT: To prevent the tractor from being driven with the parking brake applied or partially applied, the transmission gear shift lever can be moved but the transmission will not engage if the parking brake is applied. Flashing “P” will be displayed in the transmission LCD of the EIC and the parking brake warning lamp will flash along with a one-second audible alarm.

To operate the transmission, return the shift control lever to neutral. Apply the foot brakes, then release the parking brake and reselect a forward or reverse gear.

73

2-45

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

TRANSMISSION

POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION

Thoroughly read the following information before operating the transmission.

2

The Powershift transmission is operated by a single control lever, 1. Because the transmission has only one control lever, it is extremely easy to use.

NOTE: The control lever is equipped with a neutral lock button, 2. The control lever may only be moved to the forward or reverse positions if the neutral lock button on the control lever knob is depressed.

Neutral may be selected without depressing the neutral lock button.

In place of the usual clutch pedal is an inching pedal.

The powershift transmission control lever is used to select forward or reverse travel and to change transmission speeds. Move the lever forward for forward travel and rearward for reverse travel.

The powershift transmission control lever is also used to make instantaneous upward or downward gear changes. Move and then release the lever to the right for upward changes and to the left for downward changes.

Consecutive gear changes may be made, either by moving and releasing the lever several times or by holding the lever to the left or right and allowing the transmission to shift through the gears automatically.

WARNING

Always engage the hand brake before leaving the tractor. The transmission will not prevent the tractor from rolling when the engine is running or shut off.

IMPORTANT: The Powershift transmission should not be towed other than to remove it from the field or onto a transporter. Do not attempt to tow-start the tractor. See “Starting The Tractor With Jumper

Leads” in this section of the manual.

1

74

2-46

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DIGITAL DISPLAY

The function of the LCD display, 1, indicates which gear is selected and whether the transmission is in forward (F), neutral (N), or reverse (R).

NOTE: Transmission directional clutches require calibration after the first 50 hours of use and every

300 hours thereafter. If harsh 9/10 shifts are noticed, the transmission may require recalibration. See your dealer or refer to Section 3.

75

2-47

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

INCHING PEDAL

The inching pedal, 1, is installed in place of the clutch pedal found on tractors with a conventional transmission. The inching pedal operates like a clutch, for safe, accurate positioning of the tractor when hitching up implements or operating in confined spaces.

Optimum inching control, particularly with heavy loads, is achieved in the lowest gears (F1 and R3).

The degree of inching control gradually diminishes as higher gears are selected up to 10th speed. At gears higher than 10th, the electronic management system takes over to protect the system from abuse.

IMPORTANT: To ensure maximum transmission life, avoid using the inching pedal as a footrest or “riding” the pedal. Use of the inching pedal is only necessary if the low gears are not slow enough at moderate/low engine speeds to give precise control for operations such as implement attachment, etc.

When using the inching pedal, particularly at high engine speeds, avoid stalling the engine. Lubrication of the transmission ceases under stall conditions and is detrimental to the transmission.

The inching pedal may also be used to automatically select a gear to match load, engine speed and road conditions. See “Speed Matching” later in this section.

To stop the tractor in an emergency, depress the inching pedal and apply both foot brakes together.

The inching pedal is not required for normal gear changes.

76

77

2-48

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

STARTING THE ENGINE AND MOVING

FORWARD

There are two methods:

1. Preselect A Forward Gear Before Moving

Start the engine with the speed control lever in neutral (the digital display will show “N5”).

Move and release or hold the control lever to the right and allow the transmission to select any gear between 5th and 10th as shown in the display. (10th gear is the highest available gear for moving from a standstill).

To start in a gear below 5th, move and release or hold the control lever to the left and allow the display to change sequentially from 5th down to 1st.

After the desired gear is selected, increase engine speed, as required, by means of the throttle. Depress the neutral lock button and move the control lever forward. To increase tractor speed, open the throttle further and/or continue to move and release or hold the control lever to the right to select a higher gear.

To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or move the control lever to the left to select a lower gear.

78

79

2-49

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

2. Powershift Forward Gear While Moving

With the engine running, depress the neutral lock button and move the control lever forward (the digital display will show “F5” and the tractor will start to move forward).

Increase engine speed and/or move the control lever to the right and allow the transmission to run through the gears until the desired operating speed is achieved.

To further increase tractor speed, open the throttle more and/or continue to hold the control lever to the right to select a higher gear. To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or hold the control lever to the left to select a lower gear.

WARNING

Never move the control lever to neutral when traveling at high speeds. This could allow the transmission to speed match and it may not be possible to reselect the original gear, particularly if traveling down a steep grade. In any event, actions such as coasting should never be practiced for safety reasons.

80

2-50

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

STARTING THE ENGINE AND MOVING IN

REVERSE

As with forward travel, there are two methods:

1. Preselect a Reverse Gear Before Moving

Start the engine with the control lever in neutral (the digital display will show “N5”).

Move and release or hold the control lever to the right and allow the transmission to select any gear between 5th and 10th as shown in the display. Move and release the lever to the left to select 4th, and 3rd.

NOTE: There are nine reverse gears, the lowest shown as R2 in the digital display, the highest shown as R10. They are numbered R2 to R10 since the ground speeds correspond to the forward speeds F2 to F10.

After the desired gear is selected, depress the neutral lock button and move the control lever rearward. To increase speed, open the throttle further and/or hold the control lever to the right to select a higher gear. To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or hold the control lever to the left to select a lower gear.

NOTE: If the transmission has been preprogrammed to select a different reverse from forward gear, the neutral gear selected may change when reverse gear is selected - see “Programming Reverse Gear” later in this section.

2. Powershift Reverse Gear While Moving

With the engine running, depress the neutral lock button and move the control lever rearward. The digital display will show “R5”, provided the transmission has not been preprogrammed (see

“Programming Reverse Gear” later in this section).

Move and release or hold the lever to the right and allow the transmission to run through the gears until the desired operating speed is achieved.

To further increase tractor speed, open the throttle more and/or hold the control lever to the right to select a higher gear. To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or move the control lever to the left to select a lower gear.

2-51

81

82

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SHUTTLE OPERATIONS

To change from forward to reverse travel, simply depress the neutral lock button and move the control lever fully rearward. This may be done at any engine speed and with any gear selected.

WARNING

Gears 1 and 11--18 inclusive are not available in reverse. If traveling forward in, for example, 1st gear, the lowest reverse gear (2nd) will be automatically selected when the control lever is moved to the reverse position. The operator should be aware of this feature as there will be a corresponding increase in tractor speed.

Conversely, if traveling forward in, for example,

18th gear, the highest reverse gear (10th) will be automatically selected when the control lever is moved to the reverse position with a corresponding reduction in tractor speed.

SPEED MATCHING

When traveling on the road in 10th gear or higher, the transmission will automatically select a gear to match the engine speed to the road speed if the following is performed:

Up Shift

Momentarily depress the inching pedal, then decrease engine speed with the foot throttle. Release the inching pedal, then increase engine speed. The transmission will automatically select a higher gear

(provided 18th speed is not already selected) to match the lower engine speed and so maintain approximately the same road speed.

NOTE: It is recommended that the hand throttle is set to maintain a minimum engine speed of 1000 rev/min and the foot throttle is used when higher engine speeds are required.

83

2-52

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Down Shift

Decrease engine speed, then depress the inching pedal, simultaneously increasing engine speed by pressing the foot throttle further down, then release the inching pedal. The transmission will automatically select a lower gear (provided 10th gear is not already selected) to match the higher engine speed.

NOTE: Speed matching only operates after 10th gear or higher has first been manualy selected. Up shifting or down shifting will not occur when operating in gears 1-9. Speed matching will not select a gear

below 10th gear.

AUTO SHIFT

Auto shift controls automatic speed shifting through forward gears 10 - 18.

Auto shift can be engaged by depressing, then releasing, the AUTO switch, 1, on the right-hand console while traveling in forward gear ratios of 10th and above at engine speeds of 1450 RPM or more.

When AUTO shift is engaged, the LCD digital display will display an “A”, for AUTO, 2, and show the gear selected, 3.

2

1

3

84

85

2-53

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

When in AUTO shift, the tractor will automatically select higher gears whenever the engine speed exceeds a predetermined speed. It will select lower gears when the engine speed drops below a predetermined speed as shown in Section 5

“Specifications.”

To disengage AUTO shift and return to normal shifting, depress the AUTO switch, upshift, or downshift with the shift control lever.

Depressing the inching pedal or selecting neutral in any gear other than 10th will also disengage AUTO shift.

When in AUTO shift, the tractor will automatically select higher gears whenever the engine speed exceeds a predetermined speed. It will select lower gears when the engine speed drops below a predetermined speed as shown.

The chart at the right illustrates typical auto shift characteristics.

2-54

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

CREEPER GEARS (Optional)

Tractors can be equipped with a 10.1:1 creeper gear for extra low ground speeds. Creeper gear provides an additional 18 forward and 9 reverse gears.

When in creeper gear, the transmission display will show “C” for creep, 1, and the gear selected, 2.

To engage creeper gears, place the transmission in neutral, stop the tractor and depress the inching pedal. Depress the top of the creeper switch, 3, engage a gear and release the inching pedal and operate normally.

To disengage the creeper gear, stop the tractor, depress the inching pedal, return the shift lever to neutral, and depress the bottom of the creeper switch.

IMPORTANT: The creeper gear offers very low ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing to apply excessive draft loads to the tractor.

NOTE: To determine creeper ground speeds multiply the ground speed for each gear listed in the ground speed chart, located in Section 5, by 0.10.

Example 0.10 x 1.23 MPH = 0.123 MPH

86

2-55

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

PROGRAMMABLE UP SHIFT - DOWN

SHIFT

For field use, the transmission can be programmed to up shift 1, 2, or 3 gears or down shift 1, 2, or 3 gears when switch, 1, is activated. This feature allows the operator to up shift or down shift a predetermined number of gears on row ends then return to the original gear when returning to work.

The programmable down shift should be used to reduce speeds in the field for crossing rough terrain or climbing steep inclines.

The UP SHIFT, DOWN SHIFT rocker switch, 1, is located beside the 3-point hitch FAST RAISE/WORK switch, 2. See “3-Point Hitch Hydraulic Controls”.

The use of these features together allows quick turn around at the end of the field.

Up Shift

Up shift is activated by depressing then releasing the front of the switch, 1, Figure 86. The transmission will automatically up shift the preprogrammed number of gears. The EIC dash Up Shift lamp, 1, will illuminate and the new gear will be displayed as shifts are completed.

To return to the original gear, depress then release the rear of the switch. The Up Shift lamp will go out and the tractor will down shift to the original gear.

2

1

Down Shift

Down shift is activated by depressing then releasing the rear of the switch, 1, Figure 86. The transmission will automatically down shift the predetermined number of gears and the EIC Down Shift lamp, 2, will illuminate and the new gear ratio will be displayed as shifts are completed.

To return to the original gear, depress then release the front of the switch. The Down Shift lamp will go out and the transmission will up shift to the original gear.

NOTE: The programmable up shift, down shift feature only functions in forward gears.

The programmed change in gears will occur whenever the front or the rear of the rocker switch is depressed.

2-56

87

88

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

TRANSMISSION PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING THE PROGRAMMABLE

UP SHIFT, DOWN SHIFT

To change the number of gears increased or decreased when selecting the programmable up shift or down shift, proceed as follows:

• Turn the KEY-START switch off.

• Move the control lever to the reverse speed position, then hold the lever to the left.

• While holding the lever to the left, turn on the

KEY-START switch (but do not start the engine.)

After three seconds, the digital display should show “U-d” indicating the up/down shift programming mode is engaged.

• Return the control lever to the reverse position.

To program the up shift:

• With the shift lever still in reverse, move the lever to the right and hold for three seconds. The digital display will show an up arrow and the up shift number currently stored in memory.

• Move and release the lever to the right one, two or three times, as required. The display will show

“1”, “2” or “3.” This indicates that when the UP

SHIFT switch is depressed, the transmission will up shift one, two or three gears higher than the gear currently being used. To cancel the Up Shift program, move and release the lever to the left until “0” appears.

• Return the lever to neutral after selecting the desired up shift to store the program.

To program the down shift:

• To change the number of gears that will be down shifted when Down Shift is selected, position the shift lever in neutral. The display should show

“U-d.” Move the shift lever to reverse position then to the left and hold for three seconds. The display will show a down arrow and the down shift number currently stored in memory.

• Move and release the lever to the right one, two or three times and the display will show “1”, “2” or

“3”. This indicates the number of gears that will be down shifted from the current gear when the

DOWN SHIFT switch is activated. To cancel the down shift program, move and release the lever to the left until “0” appears.

• Return the lever to neutral after selecting the desired down shift to store the program.

To exit the program:

• Turn the key-switch to the off position to exit the up shift and down shift program mode.

2-57

89

90

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

PROGRAMMING REVERSE GEARS

When changing from forward to reverse, the transmission will normally select the same gear in reverse as was selected for forward travel (when operating in gears between 2nd and 10th). For special shuttle shift applications, the Powershift offers the advantage of automatically changing the reverse gear up to three gears higher or lower than the engaged forward gear. The transmission may also be programmed to always select the lowest reverse gear R2.

To program an alternative reverse gear, proceed as follows:

• Turn the KEY-START switch off.

• Move the control lever to the reverse position, then hold the lever to the right.

• While holding the lever to the right, turn on the

KEY-START switch (but do not start the engine).

Release the control lever after 5 seconds. The digital display should show “0” (unless the transmission has previously been programmed to select a higher or lower reverse gear.)

To program a higher gear:

• From the reverse position, move and release the lever to the right one, two or three times, as required. The display will show “1”, “2” or “3”. This indicates that when reverse is selected the gear will be one, two or three gears higher than the forward gear.

To program a lower gear:

• From the reverse position, move and release the lever to the left one, two or three times, the display will show “-1”, “-2” or “-3”. This indicates that when reverse is selected the gear will be one, two or three gears lower than the forward gear.

To program the lowest gear:

• Move and release the lever to the left a fourth time, an “L” will be displayed. This means that whichever forward gear is engaged, when the lever is moved rearward the lowest reverse gear

(2nd) will always be selected regardless of forward gear.

To cancel the program:

• From the reverse position, move and release the lever to the right until “0” is displayed.

NOTE: Remember that only reverse gears between

3rd and 11th are available.

To exit the program:

• Turn the KEY-START switch off. The transmission is now programmed.

2-58

91

92

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)

INTRODUCTION

The four wheel drive (FWD) axle comes in either limited slip differential with Automatic Traction

Management or fully locking differential with Traction

Control System (TCS) Traction Management. Use

FWD Automatic or TCS when operating to obtain maximum efficiency and traction under any field conditions.

ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING FOUR

WHEEL DRIVE

Four wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged in all gears (forward and reverse) during operation and under full load.

Switch, 1, has three operating positions: Off,

Automatic or TCS and Full-time On.

Fully depress the rear of switch, 1, to disengage

FWD, 2.

Depress the front of the switch one notch to the

Automatic or TCS position, 3. The AUTO FWD indicator lamp on the instrument console will illuminate to indicate engagement of either Automatic or TCS.

When the tractor is in Automatic or TCS mode, FWD will automatically disengage when either brake pedal is used to assist in turning or at transport speeds above 24.2 km/h (15 MPH) which reduces tire wear.

The FWD will automatically reengage when transport speed drops below 24.2 KPH (15 MPH) and when the applied foot brake is released.

If the tractor is equipped with TCS, the FWD will also disengage and reengage under the following conditions:

At speeds of 0-10 kph ( 0-6 MPH) disengage at turn angles of 30 degrees or higher and reengage at angles less than 30 degrees.

Or between 10–20 kph ( 6–13 MPH) disengage at turn angles of 25 degrees or higher and reengage at angles less than 25 degrees.

Fully depress the front of the switch to the ON position, 4, to engage full-time FWD. The indicator lamp in the switch will illuminate to indicate that the

FWD is engaged.

In this mode FWD automatically disengages when transport speed is above 24.2 KPH (15 MPH) which will reduce tire wear. FWD will automatically reengage when speeds drop below 24.2 KPH (15

MPH).

NOTE: FWD will automatically engage to improve braking any time that both brake pedals are depressed.

1

3

2

4

FWD OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

93

CAUTION

Four wheel drive greatly increases traction. Extra caution is needed on slopes. Compared to two-wheel drive, a fwd tractor maintains traction on steeper slopes, increasing the possibility of overturning.

When driving on icy, wet, or graveled surfaces, reduce speed and make sure the tractor is correctly ballasted to avoid skidding and loss of steering control. For best control, engage four wheel drive by using full-time on mode, rather than auto mode for four wheel braking.

IMPORTANT: To increase front tire life, disengage four wheel drive when transporting the tractor.

Disengagement is automatic at transport speeds above 24.2 KPH (15 MPH). Always use front/rear tire combinations specified to ensure acceptable tire wear.

IMPORTANT: Disengage FWD when making extremely tight turns. This action will increase front tire life, decrease stress on the FWD axle and allow tractor to achieve minimum turn diameters.

2-59

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

INTRODUCTION

A self-holding differential lock is installed in the rear axle to lock the rear wheels together in conditions where wheel slip is encountered.

Units equipped with Traction Control System (TCS) traction management four wheel drive, also come with a fully locking electro-hydraulicly engaged front axle differential lock.

ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

To engage the differential lock depress and release the front part of the switch,1. The switch will return to the center position, but the differential lock will be activated.

NOTE: The FAST RAISE/WORK switch must be in the “WORK” position.

The switch indicator light will illuminate to indicate the differential lock is engaged.

NOTE: Diff-lock will disengage if one brake is applied or when the 3-point hitch FAST RAISE/WORK switch is in the fast raise position or if the unit is operated above 16 kph (10 MPH ). TCS will disengage at 10 kph (6 MPH) or below at turn angles of 20 degrees or higher or between 10-15 kph (6-9 MPH) at turn angles of 10 degrees or higher. In manual operation mode as described above, the differential lock or

TCS will not reengage automatically and must be reengaged manually.

To turn off the differential lock, depress then release the rear part of the switch or apply either of the foot brakes.

ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING THE

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK IN EITHER THE

AUTOMATIC MODE OR TRACTION

CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) MODE

To engage the differential lock in either the Automatic mode or TCS mode press and release the front of the lock switch twice within one second.

The green differential lock lamp in the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate the differential lock is on in either Automatic mode or TCS mode.

Auto differential lock will disengage when one brake is applied or when the 3-point hitch FAST

RAISE/WORK switch is in the fast raise position.

1

94

Auto differential lock will reengage when the brake is released or when the FAST RAISE/WORK switch is returned to the work position.

If equipped with TCS, the front and rear differential locks will disengage and reengage the same as in

AUTO mode as well as with turn angles. TCS will disengage at 10 kph (6 MPH) or below at turn angles of 20 degrees or higher and reengage at angles less than 20 degrees, or between 10-15 kph (6-9 MPH) at turn angles of 10 degrees or higher and reengage at angles less than 10 degrees.

The indicator light on the instrument panel will go out when auto differential lock or TCS has disengaged.

To turn off auto differential lock or TCS, depress the rear part of the switch.

NOTE: Auto differential lock or TCS will automatically disengage if the unit is operated above 16 kph (10

MPH ).

WARNING

Never use the differential lock at speeds above 8 kph (5 mph) or when turning the tractor. When engaged, the differential lock will prevent the tractor from turning.

IMPORTANT: If a rear wheel spins at high speed, reduce engine speed before engaging the differential lock to avoid shock loads to the driveline.

2-60

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

OPERATING THE ENGINE

PREPARING TO START THE TRACTOR

Prior to starting the engine, carry out the following procedure:

WARNING

Never idle the engine in a closed area. Exhaust gases, particularly carbon monoxide, may build up. These gases are harmful and potentially lethal.

IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start the engine. Doing so may damage the drive train.

NOTE: A safety device prevents the starting motor from operating unless the powershift transmission control lever is in neutral. The LCD will flash “F” or “R” if the transmission is not in neutral.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Make sure the powershift control lever is in the

“NEUTRAL” position.

WARNING

Check the area beneath the equipment to make sure that no injury or damage will be caused when equipment is lowered.

CAUTION

Be sure everyone is clear of the tractor before starting the engine.

IMPORTANT: Turbocharged engines - The high operating speed of the turbocharger makes it essential that adequate lubrication is available when the engine is started. Therefore, idle the engine at

1000 rev/min for approximately one minute before driving the tractor.

2-61

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

STARTING THE ENGINE IN WARM

WEATHER OR WHEN ENGINE IS HOT

1. Open the throttle halfway.

2. Depress the inching pedal.

3. Turn the key-start fully clockwise to position 4 and operate the starting motor for a maximum of

30 seconds or until the engine starts, whichever occurs first. Then allow the key to return to position 3.

4. When the engine starts, release the key and return the throttle to the idle position. Check that all warning lights extinguish and gauge readings are normal.

IMPORTANT: After operating the starter for 30 seconds, allow the starter to cool for two minutes.

STARTING THE ENGINE IN COLD

WEATHER

IMPORTANT: The tractor is equipped with an air inlet heater designed to pre-heat engine intake air to improve cold starting. Read the detailed information on the use of the cold starting system before attempting to start the engine.

NOTE: The cold start system does not eliminate the need for standard cold starting aid recommendations. Block heaters, transmission heaters, #1 diesel fuel, and 10W-30 oil should still be used in accordance with documented service recommendations.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Make sure the powershift control lever is in the

“NEUTRAL” position.

3. Depress the inching pedal.

4. Turn the key switch to the “RUN” position.

5. MANUAL MODE (Factory Default Setting)

If temperature is low enough for using the cold start, the cold start light, 2, will flash. Press the cold start aid button, 1, to activate the air inlet heater. The heater will preheat for 25 seconds.

The cold start light, 2, will stop flashing and remain on as long as the heater is active.

AUTOMATIC MODE

The cold start aid button, 1, will have no effect.

The cold start light, 2, will remain on as long as the heater is active and if conditions warrant. The

25 second preheat cycle will begin shortly after step 4, as long as both the coolant and intercooler temperature are below 15° C (59° F).

NOTE: The cold start system is set to manual or automatic mode by the Buhler Versatile Dealer.

Contact your BVI Dealer to change this setting.

1

2-62

95

96

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

NOTE: The cold start button, 1, does not need to be held in during operation.

NOTE: A monitoring device prevents the heater from working unless both the engine coolant and the

intercooler temperature are below 15° C (59° F).

NOTE: The preheat cycle will be deactivated if the battery voltage drops below 9 Volts.

6. When the cold start light, 2, turns off, turn the key switch to the “START” position.

7. If the engine does not start after 20 seconds of cranking, turn the key switch to the ”OFF” position, allow the starter to cool for two minutes, then repeat the procedure starting at step 4.

8. When the engine starts (approximately 800

RPM) release the key switch. Check that all warning lights extinguish and gauge readings are normal.

NOTE: During cranking, the air inlet heater is off until the engine achieves 400 RPM. At 400 RPM, the air inlet heater will heat again in automatic or manual mode, and remain on until the coolant and the

intercooler temperature are above 15° C (59° F). The heater may automatically turn on and off for up to 20 minutes after the engine has started.

NOTE: During the post heat cycle, the heater will be deactivated if the battery voltage drops below 10.5

Volts.

2

97

2-63

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

The engine block heater, 1, warms the engine coolant to aid starting by reducing engine drag.

When used with the cold start system, the heater is an effective starting aid in temperatures down to -29°

C (-20° F).

To operate the heater, plug the heater cord, 2, into a suitable 115-volt circuit for at least four hours before starting the tractor.

You can leave the heater in operation for periods longer than four hours without damage, but maximum starting ability is usually attained after the coolant has been heated for four hours.

WARNING

To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an ungrounded or inadequate extension cord.

Always use a grounded 3-wire extension cord with a 3-wire plug which is rated for at least a

15-ampere load, and protected by a suitable fuse or circuit breaker.

OPTIONAL HYDRAULIC OIL SUMP

HEATER

The sump heater will help to keep the hydraulic oil at a warm temperature which aids cold weather starting. The heater is installed in the left side of the rear axle assembly. To operate the heater, plug the heater cord, 1, into a suitable 115-volt circuit.

WARNING

To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an ungrounded or inadequate extension cord.

Always use a grounded 3-wire extension cord with a 3-wire plug which is rated for at least a

15-ampere load, and protected by a suitable fuse or circuit breaker.

98

99

2-64

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

STARTING THE TRACTOR WITH JUMPER

CABLES

If it is necessary to use jumper cables to start the tractor, proceed as follows:

WARNING

Operate the starting motor only from the operator’s seat.

Wear eye protection when charging the battery or starting the tractor engine with an auxiliary battery.

1. Connect one end of one jumper cable (red) to the tractor starter positive (+) post, 1, and the other end (red) to the auxiliary battery positive (+) terminal, 2.

2. Connect one end of the other jumper cable

(black) to the auxiliary battery negative (-) terminal, 3, and the other end (black) to the tractor frame ground post, 4. Follow the starting procedure previously described.

3. When the engine starts, allow it to run at idle speed, turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) This will help protect the alternator from damage due to extreme load changes.

4. Disconnect the jumper leads in reverse order to the connecting procedure.

NOTE: When using an auxiliary battery to start the engine, make sure the polarity is correct. Reversed battery polarity may damage the electrical system.

100

2-65

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

STOPPING THE ENGINE

NOTE: Before stopping, idle the engine at 1000 rpm for approximately one minute. This will allow the turbocharger and manifold to cool and prevent possible distortion of components.

WARNING

Check the area beneath the equipment to make sure that no injury or damage will be caused when equipment is lowered. Do not exit the tractor until pto driven equipment has stopped.

To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:

1. Sit in the driver’s seat.

2. Move the powershift control lever to “NEUTRAL.”

3. Disengage the PTO, if engaged.

4. Lower all hydraulic equipment to the ground.

5. Position all remote control valve levers in the neutral position.

6. Return the throttle to idle speed.

7. Apply the parking brake.

8. Turn the KEY-START switch to “OFF,” (position 1).

101

2-66

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE

An automatic engine shutdown feature will shut down the engine within 30 seconds if engine oil pressure falls below or engine coolant temperature rises above predetermined levels. The engine will also shut down after 30 seconds if the transmission low pressure lamp or the transmission high temperature lamp illuminates, as shown on page

2-16.

Before shutdown occurs, the word “STOP” will flash in the instrument control center display and a pulsating tone will sound.

The override switch, 1, is provided to allow the operator to override the automatic shutdown.

The switch should only be used to move the tractor to a safe area for investigation and repair.

Push the top of the switch to override the shutdown system. The top of the switch will illuminate when the switch is activated.

Push the bottom to return to normal automatic shutdown operation.

IMPORTANT: Determine and correct the cause of the shutdown before resuming operation.

WARNING

The engine shutdown feature is fully automatic.

It can be overridden by the operator to drive the tractor to a safe location. The override switch should only be used to move the tractor far enough to avoid a dangerous situation, such as traffic.

102

2-67

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BREAKING-IN PROCEDURE

Your new tractor will provide long and dependable service if given proper care during the 50-hour breaking-in period and serviced at the recommended intervals.

Avoid prolonged operation at either high or low engine speeds without a load on the engine.

Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high a gear under heavy load may cause excessive overloading. Overloading occurs when the engine will not respond to a throttle increase.

Use the lower gears when pulling heavy loads, and avoid continuous operation at constant engine speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You will save fuel and minimize engine wear by selecting the correct gear for each particular operation.

Check the instruments frequently and keep the radiator and oil reservoirs filled to the recommended levels.

2-68

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

WARNING

Observe the following precautions when driving the tractor:

• Watch where you are going - especially at row ends, on roads, and around trees.

• Use caution when operating on slopes.

• Keep the tractor in gear when going downhill.

Use a low gear to maintain control with minimum braking.

• If the tractor is stuck, back the tractor out to prevent overturning.

• Always use the drawbar for pull-type work.

Do not pull from any other part of the tractor since it may tip backward.

• Dim the tractor headlights when meeting a vehicle on the highway at night. Keep the lights adjusted so they do not blind the operator of an oncoming vehicle.

• Engage the inching pedal slowly when driving out of a ditch, gully, or up a steep hillside. Disengage the inching pedal promptly should the front wheels rise off the ground.

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

• Reduce speed before turning or applying brakes. lock the brake pedals together when traveling at high speeds or on the highway.

Brake with both wheels simultaneously when making an emergency stop.

• Never apply the differential lock when turning.

• Use extreme caution and avoid hard applications of the tractor brakes when pulling heavy towed loads at road speeds.

• Towed loads that weigh more than the weight of the tractor should have brakes for safe operation. Ensure compliance with local regulations.

• Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or driving the tractor.

• Always use a slow-moving vehicle (SMV) emblem when traveling on public roads.

2-69

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) - INDEPENDENT

INTRODUCTION

The independent power take-off (PTO) transfers engine power directly to mounted or trailed equipment. “Independent” means that the PTO may be engaged, operated and disengaged with the tractor stopped or while moving.

The PTO is electrically activated and has automatic

PTO clutch feathering for smooth engagement and braking.

NOTE: The PTO will automatically disengage when the engine is stopped.

Model 2145 tractors have two speed PTO capability.

For 540 RPM operation, a 6-spline 34.9 mm (1.375″) shaft is supplied. A 21-spline 34.9 mm (1.375″) shaft is supplied for 1000 RPM operation.

The 6-spline shaft is used to operate equipment having a power requirement up to 65 HP. Equipment having a higher power requirement should be coupled to the 21-spline shaft.

Model 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors have a 1000

RPM PTO. A 21-spline shaft is supplied with the model 2160 tractor and a 20-spline shaft is supplied with the 2180 and 2210 tractors. The 21-spline shaft has a diameter of 34.9 mm (1.375″) while the

20-spline shaft is 44.5 mm (1.75″) in diameter.

Alternative 20 or 21-spline shafts may be purchased from your dealer. See Option Equipment Section found at the rear of this manual.

PTO MASTER SHIELD

The PTO master shield, 1, is adjustable to three positions by placing the prop rod, 2, in positions A, B or C.

Position A - Shield is level. Use this position during normal PTO operation.

Position B - Shield is tilted upward. Only use this position while attaching implement PTO shaft to the tractor. Lower the shield to position A after the shaft is attached.

Position C - Shield is tilted downward. Use this position to provide clearance for the top link when non-PTO implements are attached.

WARNING

Never stand on the PTO master shield during

PTO operation or anytime. A PTO shaft cover, 3, is provided and should be installed whenever the tractor PTO is not is use. The PTO shaft cover is screw on, screw off.

2-70

103

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

CHANGING THE MODEL 2145 PTO

OUTPUT SHAFT

Change the PTO shaft as required for use with 540 or 1000 PTO RPM implements.

WARNING

Before changing the PTO shaft:

• Park the tractor so the rear end is

approximately 10 cm (4″) higher than the front end. This will reduce oil loss when removing the shaft.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Move the gearshift lever to “NEUTRAL.”

• Disengage the PTO by pushing the PTO selector knob down.

• Stop the engine.

• Make sure the PTO shaft has stopped turning.

To change the PTO shaft, remove the “C” clip, 1, from the outer sleeve, 2, and pull the shaft, 3, from the housing. Protect the removed shaft from damage by wrapping it in a cloth.

Clean the replacement shaft. Be sure that the lubrication hole in the side of the shaft is not blocked.

Install the replacement shaft and reinstall the “C” clip.

Rotate the shaft while it is being inserted to align the drive splines which will ease installation.

NOTE: When installing the PTO shaft for 540 operation the shaft will usually slide into the inner spline easily until the outer sleeve spine is reached.

To install the shaft the remaining distance, rotate the shaft while holding the sleeve, 2, with the pin, 4, which will align the splines and allow the shaft to go in the remaining distance.

IMPORTANT: Never operate the tractor with the PTO shaft removed. The shaft acts as a support for internal gearing. Operation with the shaft removed may result in severe damage.

4

104

2-71

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

CHANGING THE MODEL 2160 TO 2210

OUTPUT SHAFT

WARNING

Before changing the PTO shaft:

• Park the tractor so the rear end is

approximately 10 cm (4″) higher than the front end. This will reduce oil loss when removing the shaft.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Move the gearshift lever to “NEUTRAL.”

• Disengage the PTO by pushing the PTO selector knob down.

• Stop the engine.

• Make sure the PTO shaft has stopped turning.

Change the 34.9 mm (1.375″) or 44.5 mm (1.75″)

1000 RPM PTO shaft as required to attach to the implement to be used.

1. Remove the PTO master shield.

2. Remove the original M20 X 60 bolts, 1.

3. Install longer M20 X 120 bolts at 1. Bolts can be made with a locally-purchased threaded metric rod.

NOTE: These bolts will contact the PTO driven gear to prevent the gear from falling into the center housing when the PTO shaft and retainer are removed.

Turn the bolts in by hand until they just contact the gear. Do not tighten bolts because they’ll tilt the gear and make removal of the shaft difficult.

CAUTION

Make sure the rear axle oil level is at or below the full mark. Any oil above the full mark will be lost when the retainer is removed.

4. Remove the four retaining bolts, 2.

105

2-72

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

5. Remove the retainer and seal, 1, using a slide puller, 3, with a fabricated end, 2. Install a bolt through the PTO cover and fabricated puller.

NOTE: The fabricated end, 2, consists of a nut that fits the puller, 3, with a second nut welded to the first nut.

6. Pull the shaft and bearing assembly.

7. Remove the snap ring, 1, and bearing, 2, from the shaft, 3.

8. Switch the shaft and reassemble in the reverse order.

9. Apply a bead of gasket eliminator to the shaft retainer and reinstall it. Torque the four retaining bolts to 108 N·m (80 ft.-lbs.).

10. Remove the two long M20 x 120 bolts. Add thread sealer to the original M20 x 60 bolts and torque them to 641 N·m (475 ft.-lbs.).

106

107

2-73

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ATTACHING EQUIPMENT TO THE PTO

SHAFT

Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as outlined in either “3-Point Hitch Linkage” or “Drawbar

- Towing Attachments” sections.

1. With the engine stopped, all equipment lowered, and the PTO stopped, unscrew the PTO shaft cover, 3, Figure 102.

2. Attach the equipment drive shaft to the tractor

PTO shaft. Be certain that the equipment drive shaft coupler lock pin, 1, engages the PTO shaft lock groove. If the coupler does not have a lock, pin the coupler to the shaft.

3. MOUNTED EQUIPMENT ONLY: Raise and lower the linkage and check for interference.

Make sure the PTO shaft is not binding in the fully raised position. If necessary, set the height limit control knob on the right-hand console to limit raising height. Also study the instructions in

“3-Point Hitch Controls.”

4. TRAILING EQUIPMENT ONLY: Be certain that the drawbar is fixed in the center position and that the drawbar is set at the correct length for the

PTO speed selected. See “Drawbar - Towing

Attachments.”

5. Position the PTO master shield, 1, Figure 102, in the proper position before operating the PTO.

6. Check that the PTO driveline is not overextended, bottomed out, or at an excessive angle and the driveline shield does not contact the PTO guard or drawbar.

IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven equipment, check to make sure the driveline will not bottom out or become disengaged. Use the following to determine PTO shaft engagement.

108

Pull drive halves until fully extended, just before they come completely apart. This is dimension A.

From dimension A, subtract

150 mm (6”) establishing dimension B.

IMPORTANT: Never operate equipment with driveline extended past dimension B.

(6”)

150 mm

DIM “D” EQUALS

DIM “C” + 25 mm (1”)

Push drive halves together as far as possible. This is dimension C. Add 25 mm (1”) to dimension C to establish dimension D.

IMPORTANT: Never operate equipment with driveline collapsed past dimension D.

109

2-74

PTO OPERATION

• instructions.

WARNING following safety precautions:

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Whenever operating PTO equipment observe the

Follow the equipment operator’s manual

• Do not wear loose clothing when operating

PTO equipment.

• When operating PTO driven equipment, stop the engine and wait until the PTO shaft and equipment stops before getting off the tractor and working on the equipment.

• Do not clean or adjust PTO driven equipment while the tractor engine is running.

• Be sure that the PTO master shield is installed.

• Always apply the tractor parking brake and block the rear wheels front and back when operating stationary PTO equipment.

• Do not work under any equipment which is supported only by the hydraulic lift or remote cylinder. Always use suitable blocking or supports.

• Always replace the PTO shaft cover when the

PTO is not being used.

NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat while the PTO is operating, the PTO warning alarm will sound for five seconds and the PTO lamp will flash.

The PTO brake will remain applied as long as the engine is running and the PTO is off. When the engine is shut off, the brake will release so the PTO shaft can be turned by hand when attaching equipment.

Adjusting PTO Speed

Operate equipment at the correct PTO speed. PTO speed is directly related to engine speed. Adjust engine speed as follows:

PTO RPM

540

1000

Engine RPM

1880

1900

IMPORTANT: Do not operate equipment above the recommended PTO speed.

NOTE: The PTO has a non-critical overspeed alert.

If 540 PTO speed is greater than 630 RPM or 1000

PTO speed is greater than 1152 RPM, the “PTO ON” status lamp will flash and a 1-second audible alarm will occur. The green system status lamp will also flash when the PTO status “overspeed” alert occurs.

2-75

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Engaging the PTO

1. Attach the equipment as outlined in “Attaching

Equipment to the PTO Shaft.”

2. With the PTO disengaged, start the engine.

3. With the engine speed at idle, engage the PTO by depressing the center button, 1, on the PTO knob, 2. Pull the knob upwards to the stop, then release the knob.

The PTO status lamp, 3, will be illuminated along with the PTO indicator lamp in the instrument cluster when the PTO is activated.

WARNING

Do not approach or work on the PTO shaft or equipment with the PTO in motion. Shut off the tractor engine and the PTO before working on the pto or equipment. If the operator leaves the seat while the PTO is engaged, the PTO lamp in the

EIC will flash and the audible alarm will sound for

5 seconds.

3

4. Operate the PTO at lower RPM to make sure the equipment is free of obstructions.

5. Gradually bring the engine up to operating speed. Operate the engine at 1900 RPM for 1000

RPM PTO equipment and 1880 RPM for 540

RPM PTO equipment. Make sure the equipment is operating properly.

6. Select the appropriate gear and enter the work area.

Disengaging the PTO

To disengage the PTO, reduce engine speed to 1000

RPM then depress the PTO knob, 1.

NOTE: The independent PTO is controlled only by the PTO control knob. The operation of the clutch pedal does not affect the PTO operation.

IMPORTANT: Always disengage the PTO before making sharp turns and before raising mounted equipment to its fully raised position.

IMPORTANT: If PTO equipment becomes plugged, stop the tractor and wait for the equipment to clear itself. If the equipment does not clear itself or if the

PTO clutch slips, immediately disengage the PTO by depressing the PTO knob, 1, then stop the engine.

Wait until the PTO stops before exiting the tractor or working on the equipment.

WARNING

To avoid inadvertent movement of PTO implement, always disengage the PTO after use.

1

1

2

2-76

110

111

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS INTRODUCTION

Two different types of hydraulic remote control valve systems are used.

Standard Flow System

The standard flow system consists of a single axial piston pump, 1, which supplies fluid to a hydraulic steering flow divider and remote control valve assembly. The pump is rated at 117 L/min (31 GPM).

HydraFlow Plus System

The HydraFlow Plus system consists of two axial piston pumps which supply fluid to the high pressure hydraulic system. The system has a total flow rating of 208 L/min (55 GPM). The remote control valve assembly is divided internally into two separate systems.

The upper pump, 1, is the same pump used on the standard hydraulic system. It is rated at 117 L/min (31

GPM) and supplies fluid to the hydraulic steering flow divider and to remote valve sections I and II.

The lower axial piston pump, 2, is rated at 91 L/min

(24 GPM) and supplies fluid to the three-point hitch valve and remote valve sections III and IV.

The HydraFlow Plus system offers increased flow and dual system capability which will allow for more efficient operation of large individual hydraulic loads such as dual orbit motors and remote cylinders.

One side of the system can be used for the operation of a high flow/low pressure requirement, and the other side of the system can be used for a low flow/high pressure requirement such as found on certain hydraulic driven air seeders.

WARNING

Hydraulic oil escaping under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

• Use a piece of cardboard or paper, instead of your hand, to search for leaks.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before connecting or disconnecting lines.

• Tighten all connections before starting the engine or pressurizing lines.

If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention immediately or gangrene may result.

2-77

112

113

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

Remote control valves are available to operate external hydraulic cylinders, motors, etc. Up to four remote control valves may be installed. The valves are located at the rear of the tractor.

Tractors with a standard hydraulic system can be equipped with three or four remote valves.

HydraFlow Plus tractors will be equipped with four remote valves.

The bottom control valve, 1, has absolute flow priority over the remaining valves, 2, 3 and 4.

4

3

2

1

STANDARD FLOW TRACTORS

After the number I valve has been satisfied, priority goes to the valve with the lowest resistance.

1. Remote valve I (green) with load check

2. Remote valve II (blue) with load check

3. Remote valve III (brown) (if equipped)

4. Remote valve IV (gray) (if equipped)

HYDRAFLOW PLUS TRACTOR

After the number I valve has been satisfied, priority goes to valve II. The HydraFlow Plus pump supplies oil to the 3-point hitch valve, valve IV and III, with the valve having the lowest resistance having priority.

Priority is greatly effected by the setting of the flow control valves. Make sure the flow controls are properly adjusted. See “Flow Control Adjustment” later in this section for more information.

Load checks are installed in the “extend” port of the lower two control valves I and II.

NOTE: The total system flow is not available to operate any one single hydraulic circuit. The maximum available flow from any one remote valve

is 102 ± 8 L/min (27 GPM ± 2 GPM)

CONTROL SWITCHES

The electro-hydraulic remote valves are operated by finger controlled switches in the right-hand console.

Each control switch is colored to correspond to the color on the remote valve. The numbers in Figure

(113) and (114) match up the control switches, remote valves and color coding.

1. Control switch I

2. Control switch II

Green

Blue

3. Control switch III Brown

4. Control switch IV Gray

1 2

3

4

114

115

2-78

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

The remote valve control switches have four positions: neutral, extend, retract, and float.

Pull the switch back from the neutral position, 1, to the “extend” (raise) position, 2. From neutral, push forward to the “retract” (lower) position, 3. Push the switch fully forward to the float position, 4. Float will permit the cylinder to extend or retract allowing equipment such as scraper blades to “float” or follow the ground contour.

The “float” position is also used for retracting a single-acting cylinder and for the OFF position for hydraulic motors.

4

3

1

2

The extend, 1, neutral, 2, retract, 3, and float, 4, positions are identified by symbols on the decal behind each control switch.

NOTE: Do not hold or fasten the switch in the extend or retract position after a remote cylinder has reached the end of its stroke. This will overheat the oil and may lead to failure of hydraulic and driveline components.

ENGAGEMENT SWITCH

The control switches and remote valves will not operate until the system is activated by the electro-hydraulic engagement switch. To activate the remote hydraulic system, depress the center button,

1, in the engagement knob, 2. Pull the knob up until it stops, then release the center button and let go of the knob. The electro-hydraulic system is now operational when ever the engine running.

1

2

116

117

118

2-79

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

To turn off the remote electro-hydraulics, depress the engagement switch knob as shown.

IMPORTANT: The remote valve electro-hydraulic engagement switch is provided as an isolator stop switch. It can be used to immediately stop operation of the rear remote hydraulics by quickly depressing the knob. The stop switch only controls the remote valves and has no effect on the three point hitch link operation, thereby isolating operation of the rear remote hydraulics from the three point hitch link operation.

MANUAL-PROGRAMABLE OPERATION

SWITCHES

Rocker switch, 1, is used to select either the manual or programmed operation for each of the remote control switches.

Manual Operation

Manual operation is provided primarily for the operation of continuous flow applications, such as hydraulic motors. To operate the remote electro-hydualic valves in manual mode, depress the top of rocker switch, 1, as shown. In the manual mode, the control switch, 2, can be operated in the four positions, neutral, extend, retract and float. When the control switch is left in either the extend, retract or float positions the control switch WILL NOT automatically return to the neutral position and shut the flow of oil off to the rear remotes regardless if the system reaches maximum pressure. The control switch must MANUALLY be returned to neutral.

There is no automatic return to neutral. This allows for efficient operation of motors without nuisance shut downs when the remote valve in advertantly returns to neutral. When operating hydraulic motors it is important to always use the RETRACT position to activate the motor and the FLOAT position to stop the motor. Using the float position to stop the motor allows the motor to come to a gradual stop preventing any damage to the motor itself.

IMPORTANT: Never use the neutral position from the extend or retract position to stop a hydraulic motor. Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system can cause extensive damage to the motor.

IMPORTANT: Do not operate the control switches in the manual mode when operating remote cylinders.

When the cylinder has reached the end of its stroke the control switch will not return to neutral and the hydraulic system relief valve will be activated. This will overheat the oil and may lead to failure of the hydraulic and driveline components.

2-80

2

1

1

2

119

120

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Programmable Operation

Programmable operation is provided primarily for operation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature allows the operator to program a time delay between when the control switches are activated and when they will automatically return to neutral. To operate the remote electro-hydualic valves in programmed mode, depress the bottom of rocker switch, 1, as shown.

When the bottom of the switch is depressed, light, 2, in the switch will begin to flash. This is an indication to the operator that a timed sequence must be programmed into the electro-hydraulic controler. The light will continue to flash for ten second to allow the operator time to begin the programming sequence.

If a program is not started within this ten second period, the controller will not accept any sequence and the remote control switch, 3, will not remain latched in either the extend or retract positions.

To program the electro-hydraulic’s, first insure that the cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor engine and insure the electro-hydraulic engagement switch is up/on. Set the tractor engine RPM’s at the normal operating speed in which the cylinder is to be operated. This is important as the programming of the control switches is based on a time interval to correspond to the time it takes the cylinder ram to extend as well as retract. Any change in engine rpm will have and effect on hydraulic flow (GPM) and therefore the time it takes the cylinder to extend and retract. The control switch timed program always remains the same regardless of oil flow (GPM) until reprogrammed. Therefore consistent operation is required for the system to operate correctly. Using the corresponding color coded programming switch,

1, depress the bottom of the switch so light, 2, begins to flash. While the light is flashing use control switch,

3, to extend the cylinder. As soon as the control switch is activated the programming light will go on solid. Hold the switch until the cylinder is extended to the desired position and then return the switch to the neutral position. When the switch is returned to the neutral position the programming light will once again begin to flash indicating that the retract phase of the cycle needs to be programmed. Next use control switch, 3, to retract the cylinder. As soon as the control switch is activated the programming light will go on solid. Hold the switch until the cylinder is retracted to the desired position and then return the switch to the neutral position. After the second phase has been completed the programming light will go out indicating that the programming has been memorized. The control switch timed operation is now programmed for the extend and retract operation of the cylinder.

3

1

2

121

Repeat the above sequence to program the remaining control switches.

Programming of the control switch can be preformed in either sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend or one sequence only, extend or retract. The program for the individual control switch, 3, will remain the same even when the engine is stopped and the ignition switch is in the off position, as long as the programming switch, 1, remains in the program position as shown. The maximum allowable time limit for any programmed timed operation is two minutes.

Programming the control switches with the engine and hydraulic flow off is possible however accuracy of actual operation will be marginal. Whenever a hydraulic application is changed, the control switches should be reprogrammed to suit the new operation.

When operating in the timed programmed mode, feathering of the hydraulic flow is possible by moving the control switch variably any where between the neutral position and the fully opened position. The timed operation sequence only beings once the control switch has been locked in the fully opened position.

Should the control switch be moved to the float position no timed program is possible and the control switch must be returned back to neutral manually.

2-81

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FLOW CONTROL ADJUSTMENT

Each remote valve has a flow control knob, 1, to meter oil flow. The knob controls flow from 4 to 102

L/MIN (1 to 27 GPM). Turn the knob so the higher vertical decal stripe, 2, is visible to increase the rate of oil flow. Turn the knob so the lower vertical decal stripe, 3, is visible to decrease the rate of oil flow.

1

2 3

1

122

WARNING

Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses at the remote cylinders, relieve the pressure in the circuit by first starting the engine and then move the control switches fully forward to the “float” position. Then stop the engine.

Make sure no one will be injured by moving equipment when relieving pressure in the system. Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment, make sure the equipment or implement is supported securely.

Never work under equipment supported by a hydraulic device because it may drop if the control is actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the event of hose failure, etc.

always use a secure support for equipment which must be serviced while in the raised position. Make sure that oil contained within the remote cylinders is clean and is of the correct grade.

2-82

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

LOW PRESSURE RETURN CIRCUIT

A low pressure return circuit is available by removing the (1-1/16) - 12 ORB threaded plug, 1, and installing a low pressure return kit, 2, P/N 86031849. The low pressure return circuit will reduce back pressure in the remote hydraulic return line which will result in more efficient hydraulic motor operation. The return circuit can also be used in applications where low return oil pressure is desired to improve implement operation such as orbit motor case drain lines.

Connect the return line from the hydraulic motor or implement to the coupler.

1

NOTE: Connectors and couplers are available from your authorized dealer.

QUICK COUPLERS

Each control valve has a pair of self-sealing, leverless quick couplers to facilitate remote cylinder connection. These couplers also permit remote cylinder hoses to be pulled from the coupler if an implement should become disconnected from the tractor. The left couplers, 1, are identified by an extended cylinder symbol containing an arrow pointing in the direction of cylinder travel molded on the cover. The right couplers, 2, are identified by a retracted cylinder symbol containing an arrow pointing in the direction of cylinder travel molded on the cover. The covers pivot open by pressing on tab

3, to expose the quick coupler.

The covers are color coded (top) gray, brown, blue, green (bottom) to correspond to the control switches in the cab console.

The couplers will accept standard (1/2″ )SAE or ISO tips. The couplers can be connected or disconnected under pressure. Disconnect pressure is proportional to system pressure. Increased system pressure will require increased force to disconnect the couplers.

To connect a remote cylinder hose, open the coupler dust cover. Clean, then insert the male coupler making sure the coupler is correctly seated.

Actuate the remote valve to supply hydraulic pressure which will complete the hydraulic coupling of the tractor and implement.

To ease removal and installation of the couplers, relieve the pressure in the system. Securely support the implement. Make sure no one will be injured by moving equipment when relieving pressure in the system. Move the control switch to the float position with the engine running. This will relieve the pressure. Turn the engine off with the control switch still in float. After the engine is shut down return the control switch to the neutral position. The couplers can now be connected or disconnected with minimal pressure and effort.

3

1

2-83

2

2

123

124

CONNECTING SINGLE-ACTING

CYLINDERS

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

The first valve has priority over the remaining valves.

This will ensure a constant flow of oil to the motors.

Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to the left extend/raise coupler on the remote control valve, as previously described.

To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control switch back to the “extend” position.

Manually return the switch to the neutral position to stop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allow the valve to return to neutral automatically when the cylinder reaches the end of its stroke and timed operation.

To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the switch fully forward to the “float” position.

IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to lower a single-acting cylinder. The “retract” position is for double-acting cylinders only.

Use the flow control to regulate the motor speed.

The #1 flow control should be adjusted to regulate the orbit motor speed. If the flow control is open too far, the 3-point hitch and other remote valves will slow down or stop. This will ensure that the hydraulic system will only supply the oil required by the motor. Extra pump capacity will not be used except when other remote valve sections are operated.

With the remote control valve switch fully forward in the “float” position, the motor will be stationary. The hydraulic motor will operate if the switch is pulled back to the “retract” position. To stop the motor, move the switch from the retract position to the float position. In the float position the motor will be able to stop slowly, which will not damage the motor.

IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow equipment, the remote control valve switch must not be moved rearward to the neutral or raise positions as damage to the equipment may result.

Observe the following to further protect the tractor and equipment.

CONNECTING DOUBLE-ACTING

CYLINDERS

Connect the feed hose from a double-acting cylinder to the left extend/raise coupler on the remote control valve and the return hose to the right retract/lower coupler, as previously described. To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control switch back to the “extend” position.

To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control switch forward past neutral to the “retract” position.

Further forward movement of the switch will select

“float” which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract freely. This feature is very helpful when carrying out work with equipment such as scraper blades and loaders.

OPERATING CONTINUOUS FLOW

HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g., hydraulic motors) should be connected to the 1st (lowest) remote control valve couplers with the pressure hose connected to the right retract coupler and the return hose connected to the low pressure return circuit as described previously in this section.

NOTE: For very low flow hydraulic motors, it may be necessary to use the non-load check couplers (3rd or

4th couplers up.)

• Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment or motor. Use the flow control to regulate the rate of flow or speed of the motor.

• Do not hold the remote control valve switch to operate the equipment.

• To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate continuous flow equipment at the highest flow setting (by use of the flow control) and lowest engine speed that will give the required machine performance and speed.

• Do not use the #1 valve circuit to operate continuous flow equipment that requires more than 137.90 bar (2,000 PSI). The #1 flow control may shut the rest of the system down if the continuous pressure is too high. Connect these loads to any other valve section.

2-84

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

HYDRAULIC MOTOR APPLICATION

1. Use hydraulic motors designed for Open Center or Pressure/Flow Load Compensating hydraulic systems only. Do Not use a hydraulic motor designed for closed center hydraulic systems unless it is adapted for use by removing the inlet restrictor.

2. Rating: Hydraulic motors up to 1.26 L/SEC (20.0

GPM US) @ 15.50 MPa (2250 PSI) can be used.

3. Be sure the hydraulic motor does not have restrictors in the ports or fittings.

4. Hydraulic motors less than 0.63 L/SEC (10 GPM

US) may be equipped with 12.7 mm (1/2″) ID hoses and standard (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers.

5. Hydraulic motors greater than 0.63 L/SEC (10

GPM US) should be connected with (3/4″ ) hoses and (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers to prevent excessive restriction and heat generation.

6. It is recommended that the low pressure return line kit (described earlier in this section) be installed. The use of the low-pressure return circuit will reduce back pressure in the remote hydraulic return line which will result in more efficient hydraulic motor operation. The lowpressure return circuit can also be used in applications where low return oil pressure is desired to improve implement operation such as with orbit motor case drain lines, or implement mounted hydraulic control valves.

OPERATING REMOTE EQUIPMENT

SIMULTANEOUSLY OR REMOTE

EQUIPMENT AND HYDRAULIC LIFT

SIMULTANEOUSLY

NOTE: Hydraulic pump output varies with engine speed. Oil flow will be relatively constant in the remote control valve circuits if the flow control is used to provide reduced oil flow, thus providing constant operating speed for hydraulic motors, etc. even if engine speed varies. Maintain the engine speed above the minimum required for simultaneous operation of all required circuits and vary ground speed by selection of the appropriate gear.

If operating two or more remote control valves simultaneously or remote valves and hydraulic lift, all the flow control knobs should be adjusted to provide a partial flow. Otherwise, all the available flow may be directed to the full flow circuit when the pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other circuits in use.

BLEEDING REMOTE CYLINDERS

When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.

With the hoses connected to the remote control valve couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the remote control switch. Check the rear axle oil level before and after operating the remote cylinder.

POWER BEYOND APPLICATIONS

All BVI Genesis tractors are “Power Beyond” ready in that another closed center load sensing valve may be incorporated with the Genesis closed center load sensing hydraulic system.

The pressure for the Power Beyond is obtained from the (1”) ORB port, 1, (1 5/16--12 thread) on the top cover of the valve. If the tractor is equipped with

HydraFlow Plus, replace the elbow fitting located at port 1 with a tee fitting to access the supply pressure.

The sense line is attached to the (1/4”) ORB port, 2,

(7/16 -- 20 thread) located on the rear face of the valve end cover.

The return line from the external valve would go to the low pressure return port on the HPL cover. This is explained earlier in this section.

2-85

125

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

THREE-POINT HITCH CONTROLS

The electro-hydraulic three-point hitch control system employs electronic switches and a microcomputer to control the hydraulic system, which raises and lowers the 3-point linkage.

the lower links to the rear axle housing. These pins send and electronic signal to the computer which, in turn, signals the hydraulic system to respond by raising or lowering the implement to maintain the requested draft load.

MODES OF OPERATION

The electro-hydraulic three-point hitch system offers three modes of operation, position, draft, and float.

Position Control provides accurate and sensitive control of implements that operate at a fixed position.

Once set, position control will maintain the selected implement height. When operating in position control the tractor and implement become, in effect, a rigid unit. Irregularities in the soil surface will cause the implement to rise and fall according to movement of the tractor.

Draft Control provides for a uniform load to be maintained on the tractor by automatically adjusting the working height/depth of soil engaging implements.

Float Control provides a means of operating implements that operate with the contour of the soil surface, including implements that operate with gauge wheels or other devices that limit operating depth. Float control also allows for lateral movement of the implement on uneven surfaces.

The set-up and operation of each mode of operation is described later in this section.

NOTE: The electro-hydraulic three point hitch is a separate system from the electro-hydraulic remote valves. The engagement switch for the electrohydraulic remote valves that can be used as a isolator switch has no operational control over the electro-hydraulic three point hitch. Depressing the engagement switch will have no effect on stopping the three point hitch in an emergency situation.

The changes in draft loading are sensed electronically through special load sensing pins used to connect

2-86

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

CONTROLS

The electro-hydraulic three-point hitch control system is operated from a console to the right of the operator’s seat. The console houses:

1. Lift control lever

2. Position/draft sensitivity control knob (if equipped)

3. Drop rate control knob

4. Height limit control knob

5. Slip limit control knob (if equipped)

2

3

1

4

5

126

LIFT CONTROL LEVER

The lift control lever, 1, controls implement height or working depth in position control and draft loading in draft control. Pull the lever rearward to raise the

3-point lift, and push forward to lower in position control. In draft control moving the lever forward increases the load demanded from the hitch and moving the lever rearward decreases the load demanded.

An adjustable lift control lever stop, 2, is located to the right of the lift lever. The stop sets the lower or upper travel of the lift lever. To adjust, loosen the stop knob and slide the stop forward or rearwards to contact the lift lever in the desired position. Tighten the stop knob.

The stop should be placed in front of the lever when transporting implements.

127

2-87

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

POSITION/DRAFT SENSITIVITY

CONTROL KNOB

(ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL ONLY)

The position/draft sensitivity knob, 1, (if equipped), is used to select position control or draft control. A decal encircling the knob has six numbered positions, to indicate the degree of response selected. Turn the position/draft sensitivity knob towards the full position control setting (position 1) to decrease the system’s response to a change in draft loading. The knob is detented at the position control setting (position 1 – knob fully counterclockwise).

IMPORTANT: Always set the position/draft sensitivity knob to the full position control setting (position 1) at any time when not actually operating in draft control, such as when attaching equipment, transporting equipment or when no equipment is attached.

If precise depth control is required, the position/draft sensitivity knob must be in the full position control setting.

Whenever the draft control feature is selected, the implement operating depth will automatically vary as required to maintain a fixed load, as determined by the lift control lever, on the tractor engine.

IMPORTANT: Draft control will work with a variety of draft implements, however, hitch response to low draft/shallow implements will be difficult to obtain if sufficient draft load is not detected on the load sense pins. Using draft control with implements that do not create a sufficient draft load will result in the implement going to a lower position seeking more draft. See

DETERMINING 3-POINT HITCH MODE OF OPERA-

TION in this section to verify if draft control operation is suited for your implement.

1

2

DROP RATE CONTROL KNOB

The drop rate control knob, 2, controls the speed at which the lower links and implement drop during a lowering cycle. This knob has a decal encircling it with six numbered positions. Position 1 is the slowest rate and is denoted by a “tortoise” symbol. Position

6 is the fastest setting, denoted by a “hare” symbol.

HEIGHT LIMIT CONTROL KNOB

The height limit control knob, 3, limits the height that the linkage may be raised. Adjust this knob to avoid the possibility of a large implement damaging the tractor cab when fully raised.

Turning the knob fully counterclockwise prevents the

3-point hitch from raising above mid height. Turning the knob fully clockwise will allow the 3-point hitch to raise to full height.

2-88

3

128

3-POINT HITCH STATUS LIGHT

The status light, 1, serves two purposes:

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

-- Steady light signifies “hitch disabled”. The “hitch disabled” warning is also duplicated on the instrument panel as an LCD symbol, 1, Figure

128.

-- Flashing light means that there is a malfunction in the 3-point hitch system circuits. Should a malfunction occur, consult your authorized dealer.

1

The “hitch disabled” LCD symbol, 1, and warning light signifies that the lift control lever position does not correspond to the position of the lower links. The lower link cannot move until the hitch is “captured”.

The “hitch Disabled” warning will display if:

-- The lift control lever was inadvertently moved with the engine stopped.

-- The external fender switches have been used to raise or lower the hitch.

-- The 3-point hitch arm position changed with the engine stopped.

NOTE: To “capture the hitch” and put the lift control lever back in phase with the lower links:

1. Cycle the fast raise/work switch, Figure 129, to the raise then lower position.

2. Slowly move the position control lever fully rearward then forward until the status light goes out, and the hitch enable symbol, 3, appears.

The hitch enabled symbol, 3, is displayed to advise the operator when the three-point linkage is in phase with the lift control lever. When the three-point linkage and lift control lever become out of phase with one another, this display will disappear and the hitch disabled symbol, 1, will display.

The digital hitch position display, 2, on the instrument panel indicates the position of the lower links over a scale of “0” to “99”. A display of “0” indicates that the links are fully lowered, and a display of “99” indicates they are fully raised.

2-89

129

130

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCH

The FAST RAISE/WORK switch, 1, allows the operator to rapidly raise the implement to the position set by the height limit control and to lower the implement back down to the position set by the lift control lever, without disturbing these settings.

This feature allows the operator to raise the implement at the headland and return the implement to the same operating conditions.

To raise the implement, press the rear of the switch,

2. Press the front of the switch, 3, to lower the implement to the work position.

To lower the hitch below the position set by the lift control lever, without disturbing the settings, press and hold the front of the switch, 4. When the switch is released the hitch will return to the position set by the lift control lever.

NOTE: The FAST RAISE/WORK switch should be switched to the raise position when transporting equipment.

The FAST RAISE/WORK switch is also used to recapture the hitch after using the external fender switches.

SLIP LIMIT CONTROL KNOB (If Equipped)

The slip limit control knob, 1, (if equipped) is in addition to the optional radar sensor unit. It allows the operator to select a wheel slip limit that when exceeded overrides the electronic draft control system. When the selected percent slip threshold has been exceeded the hitch will raise until the wheel slip is below the preset level. When the percent slip is reduced below the threshold the hitch will return to the preset operation. The slip override lamp, 2, is illuminated whenever the slip exceeds the preset threshold and remains on until the slip is reduced.

The knob is detented at the “Off” position (knob fully clockwise). A digital display of wheel slip, and a slip alarm may be programmed into the electronic instrument cluster. See “Electronic Instrument

Cluster Programming”.

Slip limit control will also work in position control if the tractor is equipped with load sensing pins.

NOTE: Slip limit control will not operate below 0.8 km

(0.5 mph) ground speed.

NOTE: Slip limit control will disengage when the

3-point hitch is raised with the fast raise switch or the position control lever. The Slip limit control will reengage after the 3-point hitch is lowered. The implement must enter the ground and provide a significant draft load to reengage the slip limit control option.

2-90

2

2

3

4

131

1

132

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FIELD OPERATION

After attaching an implement to the three-point hitch, adjust the height limit control knob, 2, to prevent large implements from damaging the tractor cab, and adjust the drop rate control knob, 3, to set the desired rate at which the implement will drop when the hitch is lowered.

To set the height limit control, proceed as follows:

• Turn the height limit control knob, 2, fully counterclockwise which will allow the hitch to raise to one-half its full height.

• Pull the lift lever, 1, fully to the rear.

• Slowly turn the height limit control knob, 2, clockwise to raise the implement until no less than 100 mm (4″) clearance is remaining between the tractor and implement or maximum hitch is reached.

Adjust the rate or implement drop by rotating the drop rate knob, 3. Turn the knob clockwise to speed up the drop rate or counterclockwise to slow down the drop rate.

IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow drop position (“tortoise” symbol).

NOTE: The drop rate control only affects the lower link/implement drop rate when the implement is not engaging the ground.

POSITION CONTROL OPERATION

NOTE: See DETERMINING 3-POINT HITCH MODE

OF OPERATION in this section for procedures to verify if position control operation is needed for the implement being used.

To operate in position control:

1. Turn the position/draft sensitivity control knob, 4, fully counterclockwise (position 1) into the detented position.

NOTE: Failure to turn the position/draft sensitivity knob into the detented position will cause the hitch to make automatic hitch corrections as it searches for a draft load.

2. Use the 3-point hitch lift control lever, 1, to control movement of the hitch. Pull the lever rearward to raise the 3-point hitch and push the lever forward to lower the hitch. The EIC hitch position display,

2, Figure 128, will show the current hitch position.

5

4

2-91

1

3

2

133

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

3. Once the required implement working height has been established, adjust the lift control lever stop, 5, to set the implement height. To adjust, loosen the knob on the stop and move it so that it is against the front edge of the lift control lever. Retighten the knob. Whenever the lift control lever is pulled rearwards to raise the implement, the implement will always return to the same working height when the lever is pushed forward to contact the stop.

NOTE: If required, the lift control lever may be eased sideways (to the left) to bypass the adjustable stop.

4. Upon reaching the headland, use the raise/work switch to raise and lower the implement.

IMPORTANT: Once the correct working depth is established, the stop set, and the height limit is set, it is recommended that the FAST RAISE/WORK switch be used. Repeated movements of the control lever against the stop will eventually move the stop and change the depth setting.

Position 6 on the position/draft sensitivity knob (fully clockwise, decal indicating plow engaged with soil) is the most reactive draft setting and variations in soil density will cause the hydraulic system to respond with large movements of the linkage and attached implement.

Turning the position/draft sensitivity knob counterclockwise (towards position 1) will progressively decrease the amount and rate of linkage movement relative to variations in soil density.

Moving the lever forward increases the load demanded from the hitch and moving the lever rearward decreases the load demanded.

To set the draft control system perform the following procedures:

WARNING

When transporting equipment on the three-point linkage, select position control, raise the implement and set the adjustable stop, 5, against the front edge of the lift control lever to prevent accidental forward movement of the lever which could result in attached equipment lowering and becoming damaged, damaging the road surface or causing personal injury. Set the raise/work switch to the raise position as an additional transport lock.

DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION

(If Equipped)

NOTE: See DETERMINING 3-POINT HITCH MODE

OF OPERATION in this section for procedures to verify if draft control operation is needed for the implement being used.

To operate in draft control, adjustment of the draft/position sensitivity knob, 4, is required. The following table may be used as a guide to adjust the settings to suit the implement and field conditions:

Implement

Fully mounted

Semi-mounted

Soil

- clay soil

- sandy soil

- clay soil

- sandy soil

Position/

Draft Knob

3-4

2-3

5-6

4-5

1. Adjust the position/draft sensitivity knob to the desired setting, using the table listed as a guide.

2. Drive the tractor into the field and lower the implement by pushing the lift control lever, 1, forward until the implement load causes the tractor wheel slip to increase.

3. Pull back on the lift control lever until the implement starts to run more shallow and the wheel slip is acceptable.

4. Make slight adjustments to both the lift control lever and the position/draft sensitivity knob to achieve the desired performance.

NOTE: Changing the position/draft sensitivity knob setting may require slight changes in the lift control lever position to maintain the desired implement working depth.

NOTE: For optimum draft control performance both the lift control lever and the position/draft sensitivity knob need to be set properly.

5. Once the required implement draft operation has been established, adjust the lift control lever stop, 5. To adjust, loosen the knob on the stop and move it so that it is against the front edge of the lift control lever. Retighten the knob.

Whenever the lift control lever is pulled rearwards to raise the implement, the implement will always return to the same draft operation when the lever is pushed forward to contact the stop.

NOTE: If required, the lift control lever may be eased sideways (to the left) to bypass the adjustable stop.

2-92

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

6. Observe the implement as it pulls through the ground. If the hydraulic system reaction is too great, reduce system reaction by turning the draft/sensitivity knob, 4, counterclockwise by a few degrees. If implement movement is still too great, progressively rotate the knob counterclockwise (toward the position control setting) to further reduce the hitch reaction to a level suited to the soil conditions. When the draft control is adjusted properly the digital hitch position display will increase and decrease in value at a uniform rate.

7. Once set, the tractor hydraulic system will automatically adjust implement depth to maintain an even pull (draft load) on the tractor to reduce wheel slip to a minimum.

8. Upon reaching the headland, use the raise/work switch to raise and lower the implement.

IMPORTANT: Once the correct working depth is established, the stop set, and the height limit is set, it is recommended that the FAST RAISE/WORK switch be used. Repeated movements of the control lever against the stop will eventually move the stop and change the depth setting.

Depending on the position of the lift control lever relative to the lower links, the speed of lift will automatically adjust. This means that if a large movement of the lift control lever is made then the lower links will respond rapidly. As the links approach the position set by the lift control lever, movement will slow.

NOTE: The drop rate control only affects the lower link/implement drop rate when the implement is not engaging the ground.

IMPORTANT: As tractor and implement use increases performance will vary. Badly worn or improperly adjusted implements will cause poor electronic draft control response.

2-93

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

3-POINT HITCH FLOAT

When To Use Float

Float should be used when the attachments depth position is controlled by gauge wheels or some other device that controls implement depth while following ground contour. Your GENESIS tractor has 3-point hitch float capability. Float is obtained by manually positioning the 3-point arm attaching pins in the float position, 3. (Lockplate vertical)

1. Clevis

2. Lock pin

3. Lock plate

4. Lower links

Setting the 3-Point Hitch For The Float Position

To conserve engine power, reduce hydraulic load, minimize heat in the hydraulic system and get maximum implement performance, follow these simple steps when using 3-point float.

4

1. Manually position the 3-point arm pins in the float position, 3.

2. Rotate the position/draft control knob, 3, if equipped, to full position control by rotating the knob fully counter-clockwise into the detent position.

NOTE: Only use full position control when operating in float position.

3. Place the 3-point control lever, 1, fully forward and operate the implement in the field until the gauge wheels control the implement’s depth, then stop the tractor.

4. Slowly move the 3-point lift control lever rearward until the 3-point arms are in the middle of the float slot.

5. With the arms set in the middle of the float slot, adjust the 3-point lever stop, 2, against the lever,

1. Always position the lever against the stop when operating with the implement in the ground.

6. After setting the 3-point control lever position and stop, use the 3-point fast raise/lower rocker switch, 1, to raise and lower the hitch at the end of the field or for transport.

2

1

3

3

2

1

134

135

136

2-94

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DETERMINING 3-POINT HITCH MODE OF

OPERATION

Position/Float Control Test

If the implement is equipped with gauge wheels or some other depth control device, the use of float position is needed. To determine if position or float control is needed for an application without gauge wheels or other depth control device, perform the following test.

1. Attach and adjust the implement as described in the implement operator’s manual.

2. Turn the position/draft sensitivity control knob, 1, to position control (counterclockwise).

1

3. Set the lower link lock plate into the float position,

3, (vertical).

4. During normal field operation, lower the 3-point hitch to the full down position engaging the implement fully into the ground. Pull the implement until it reaches its operating depth, stopping the tractor with the implement still in the ground.

5. Check the position of the lower link lock plate and pin.

-- If the lower link lock plate and pin are at the top of the float slot, float position is needed.

-- If the lower link lock plate and pin are at the bottom of the float slot or the implement drops to a depth causing the tractor to loose traction, position or draft control is needed.

(See Position/Draft Control Test)

4

2-95

3

1

137

2

138

139

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Position/Draft Control Test

To determine if position control or draft control is needed for an application, perform the following test.

1. Attach and adjust the implement as described in the implement operator’s manual.

2. Turn the position/draft sensitivity control knob, 1, to position. Control (counterclockwise).

1

3. Set the lower link lock plate in the position configuration, 2, (horizontal).

4. During normal field operation, use the lift control lever to engage the implement into the ground until, the desired depth is obtained, the tractor stalls, or looses traction and spins out.

If the desired depth is obtained and maintained without the tractor stalling or loosing traction then position control should be used.

If the tractor stalls or spins out while trying to obtain the desired operating depth then draft control should be used.

NOTE: The use of this test is only a guide for determining if position or draft control on ground engaging implements should be used.

4

3

1

140

2

141

2-96

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

EXTERNAL 3-POINT HITCH CONTROLS

WARNING

Do not stand on or near the implement or between the implement and tractor when operating the external 3-point hitch lift controls.

2

An external, push button switch, 1, is provided on each rear fender. The switches are spring-loaded to return to the off position.

CAUTION

Operator must stand in one of the hatched areas,

2, when activating an external switch.

Before leaving the tractor to operate the external switches:

1. Apply the parking brake.

NOTE: The external switches only function with the parking brake applied.

2. Move the powershift control lever to neutral.

3. Disengage the PTO.

4. Move the hand throttle lever to the low idle position (fully rearwards).

5. Exit the cab and push the raise end, 1, or lower end, 2, of the external switch. This will transfer control of the hydraulic power lift to the rear fenders switches. The lift disabled symbol will be displayed and the hitch status light will be illuminated continually.

Only activate the external switches while standing to the side of the tractor as shown at 2,

Figure 140.

Pressing the upper part of the switch, 1, causes the lift linkage to raise. Pressing the lower part,

2, causes the linkage to lower. When the lower links align with the implement, release the switch and attach the implement to the three-point linkage in the normal manner.

NOTE: Operation of the fender switches causes the hitch to move at a slower controlled rate.

70-540-87

2-97

2

142

143

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

WARNING

Before using the external 3-point hitch control switches, ensure that no person or object is in the area of the implement or three-point linkage.

Never operate the external switches while standing:

• Directly behind the tractor

• Between the lower links

• On or near the implement.

Only operate switches while standing in the hatched areas, 2, as shown in Figure 140.

Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any object into the area near the three-point linkage or implement while operating the external switch.

Never have an assistant working the opposite set of controls. When moving to the opposite set of controls, move around the tractor or implement.

Do not cross between the implement and tractor.

To transfer control of the 3-point hitch back to the lift control lever:

1. Cycle the FAST RAISE/WORK switch, 1, to the fast raise position (rear), then to the work position

(forward).

2. Push the lift control lever fully forward then pull the lever slowly rearwards to capture the hitch.

3. The hitch enabled symbol, 3, Figure 127, will display, indicating that the three-point linkage is in phase with the lift control lever.

144

2-98

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

3-POINT HITCH LINKAGE

INTRODUCTION

The tractor will accept category II, III, and III N implements that conform to SAE-ASAE standard dimensions.

1

The 3-point hitch linkage consists of the following components:

9

1. Left lift rod

2. Top link

3. Top link transport hanger

4. Right lift rod

5. Right lift rod adjusting block

6. Right lower link

7. Sway blocks

8. Left lower link

9. Left lift rod adjusting block

NOTE: Before attaching equipment read this section carefully.

When attaching mounted equipment to the threepoint linkage, the following adjustments may be made to ensure satisfactory operation:

LIFT RODS

WARNING

Before disconnecting a lift rod from the lower link, lower attached equipment to the ground and make sure the hydraulic control lever is fully down. Stop the engine. Make sure attached equipment is correctly supported before removing the lift rod securing pin.

8

To adjust either lift rod, 1, raise the adjusting block,

2, and rotate it to lengthen or shorten the lift rod assembly. To prevent rotation of the adjusting block, slip it down to engage on the locking boss, 3, on the lift rod end. For most implements adjust both lift rods so the centers of the lower link balls are 254 mm (10″) above the ground when the hitch is fully lowered.

Adjust the lift rods to level the equipment in the operating position.

2

7

3

4

5

6

145

146

2-99

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

LOWER LINK FLOAT

Rigid Position

Both lift rods have a lock plate, 3, installed in the clevis, 1. If the lock plate is installed horizontally, the

3-point hitch will not have vertical float.

4

Float Position

If the lock plates are rotated to the vertical position,

3, the lower links, 4, will be allowed to float up and down by 40 mm (1-1/2″). This will allow an implement vertical movement independent of the tractor.

3

4

3

TOP LINK

The top link, 1, is adjusted by turning the sleeve, 2, after raising the handle/locking latch, 3. To prevent further rotation of the sleeve, push the handle/latch down to engage in either of the two slots in the end of the top link assembly.

Most equipment will operate at the proper height when the link is adjusted to 724 mm (28.5″) measured between the center of the attaching points. Readjust to level the equipment as required.

When not in use, the top link can be removed and stored, or left in a vertical position and retained by the transport hanger, 3, Figure 143.

1

2

1

147

2

148

149

2-100

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS

Attaching Position

Pull the lock pin, 1, to release the link end, 2, from the lower link, 3. Extend the link ends to make connecting to the implement easier.

NOTE: Illustrations show two renditions of the lower link assembly.

2

1

150

Operating Position

Secure the link ends to the equipment, then carefully inch the tractor rearwards until the flex link ends, 1, lock in the closed position and the lock pins, 2, lock in place.

Attach the top link after flex ends are locked in the lower links.

NOTE: Illustrations show two renditions of the lower link assembly.

IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are locked in the operating position. Remove the drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted equipment.

2

3

151

152

1

153

2-101

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SWAY BLOCKS

The sway blocks, 1, control lower link side movement in both the transport and operating position to prevent the equipment swaying from side to side.

This is especially important when operating on slopes near fences, walls or ditches.

The sway blocks can be mounted in a rigid or sway position.

Rigid Position

To prevent side movement of the equipment in both the operating and transport positions, rotate the sway blocks, 1, to the forward position and secure in the forward (rigid position) hole. Install the pins, 2, and the clips, 3.

NOTE: The pin must be installed so the clip is on the inside of the drawbar support.

Swing Position

When it is desirable to have side movement of the equipment in the operating position, but remain rigid in the transport position, rotate the sway blocks, 1, rearward and secure them. Install pins, 2, and clips,

3, in the rear (swing position) hole.

NOTE: The pin must be installed so the clip is on the inside of the drawbar support.

IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to provide side-to-side movement, be sure that there is no possibility of the rear tires contacting the sway blocks, lower links, or implement.

GUIDE BLOCKS, SPACERS AND SHIMS

The guide blocks and spacers can be positioned so the 3-point hitch will accept category II, category III

N or category III implements.

Category II or Category III N Position

Install the guide blocks, 1, on the inside of the lower links. Add shims, 2, if required.

154

155

156

2-102

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Category III Position

Position the guide blocks, 1, and spacer, 2, on the inside of the lower links. Add shims, 3, if required.

Shim Position

Shims are available to adjust the amount of lateral movement between the sway blocks and the lower links when the hitch is in the raised (transport) position or when the sway blocks are in the rigid position. See Figure 152 and Figure 153 for shim locations.

The adjustment must be made with the sway blocks in the rigid position. Adjust by placing an equal amount of shims on each lower link. Shim so the linkage can be fully raised and lowered without binding when an implement is attached.

157

2-103

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

LINKAGE CATEGORY CONVERSION

Tractors are equipped with Category III linkage.

To convert from Category III to Category II, bushings may be inserted into the top link and lower link implement connections. The guide blocks and spacers must be repositioned, as previously described.

QUICK HITCH

The quick hitch allows fast, easy hitching and unhitching of implements. The hitch fits implements with ASAE category III hitches. Do not use the hitch with implements which have offset cross-shafts such as may be found on mounted moldboard plows with in-furrow hitches.

Installation and Removal

1. Place the quick hitch, 1, at rear of the tractor and install on the lower links using the lower link pins,

2, and retaining bolts.

Torque the retaining bolts to 115 N·m (85 ft.-lbs.).

2. Tilt the hitch upright and secure the upper link with the top link pin, 3, and retaining bolt.

Torque the bolt to 115 N·m (85 ft.-lbs.).

3. Reverse the procedure to remove the quick hitch.

Hitching

1. Position the latch handles, 4, down as shown.

The latch handles must be down for the hitch to latch.

2. Back the tractor to the implement making sure that the lower hooks are below the implement pins.

3. Raise the quick hitch until the pins engage the hooks.

WARNING

Be certain that both latches fully engage the implement hitch pins before transporting or operating the implement.

4. Perform all checks listed under the “Attaching

3-Point Equipment” heading.

5. To unhitch equipment, position the equipment so that it will not fall when unhitched and pull the latch handles, 4, up to open the lift pin latches.

Lower the quick hitch until it disengages from the implement. Remove any control connections and slowly drive the tractor away.

1

2

2-104

4

3

2

158

ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Before attaching equipment to your tractor:

• Be sure the guide blocks are positioned to “fit” the equipment as outlined under the “Sway Blocks” and “Guide Blocks, Spacers and Shims” headings.

• Remove the swinging drawbar, if close-mounted equipment is being attached.

IMPORTANT: Always set the position/draft sensitivity control knob in position control when attaching equipment, transporting equipment, when no equipment is attached or at any time when not operating in draft control.

NOTE: See also “External 3-Point Hitch Controls” for more details.

Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as follows:

1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch points are level with and slightly ahead of the implement hitch pins.

2. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake.

3. Release the flexible link ends, and slip the ends on the implement hitch pins. Secure with the linch pins. Start the engine and slowly back the tractor up until the flexible link ends lock in the operating position. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake.

IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating equipment, be sure that the link ends are locked in the operating position.

4. Lengthen or shorten the top link, until the implement mast pin can be inserted through the mast and top link. Adjust the top link to the initial

724 mm (28.5″) setting.

5. Attach any remote equipment.

6. After attaching implement and before actual operation check that:

• No interference occurs with tractor components.

• Top link does not contact the PTO guard with implement at its lowest position.

• PTO driveline (if equipped) is not overextended, bottomed out or at an excessive angle and driveline shield does not contact

PTO guard or drawbar.

IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven equipment, check to make sure the driveline will not bottom out or become disengaged. See “Attaching Equipment to the PTO Shaft” heading in the “Independent

PTO” section for details.

IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or semimounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or hitch, be sure that there is adequate clearance between the implement and the tractor.

Check the clearances in the raised position by raising the implement carefully using the lift control lever,

Figure 125, in position control. Check the swing clearance by performing a series of left- and right-hand turns with the tractor and implement combination.

IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE

CAUTION

Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may interfere with and damage the cab.

WARNING

You may be injured by broken glass or the cab

ROPS may be damaged if equipment interferes with the cab.

To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:

1. Attach the equipment as outlined previously.

2. Check for adequate clearance by slowly raising the equipment with the lift control lever in

POSITION CONTROL. If the equipment clears the cab by 100 mm (4″) or more when fully raised, proceed to operate the equipment. If any part of the equipment comes closer than 100 mm (4″) to the cab, do the following:

Adjust the 3-point hitch height limit control knob,

Figure 126, to limit upward movement so there is a minimum of 100 mm (4″) clearance between the cab and the implement.

IMPORTANT: The height limit must be adjusted to limit hitch height when the RAISE/WORK switch is activated.

REMOVING EQUIPMENT

When removing equipment, the procedure is the reverse of attaching. The information listed below will make disconnecting easier and safer.

•

•

•

Always park the equipment on a level, firm surface.

Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall when detached from the tractor.

Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote cylinders by selecting the float position before disconnecting.

2-105

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DRAWBAR - TOWING ATTACHMENTS

SWINGING DRAWBAR

The swinging drawbar may be fixed in any one of five positions or allowed to swing the full width of the hanger.

Fasten the drawbar, 1, in position using the swing limiter pins, 2, when pulling equipment which requires accurate positioning and when transporting equipment.

Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground engaging equipment which does not require accurate positioning. This will make steering and turning easier.

AUTOMATIC HITCH PIN

The drawbar is equipped with a hitch pin that will automaticly drop in place when hitching up to implements.

To operate, place the hitch pin, 1, in the raised position. Retaining ring, 2, fits in the upper notch, 3, of the clevis to hold the hitch pin in the raise position.

Release strap, 4, must be positioned in front of the retaining ring as shown. The drawbar is now prepared to hitch to the implement.

When backing the tractor to attach the implement, the implement hitch will contact the release strap, 4, when aligning the drawbar. As the release strap is pushed forward it dislodges the retaining ring, 2.

Hitch pin, 1 will drop as the retaining ring, 2, slides down the incline, 5, on the front of the clevis. The implement is now attached to the tractor without requiring the operator to leave the cab of the tractor or a second operator.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to stand between the tractor and implement while backing the tractor to the implement. Always bring the tractor to a complete stop and engage the parking brake before allowing anyone behind the tractor to hitch the implement.

1

4

3

2

5

159

160

2-106

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

After hitch pin, 1, drops into place, retaining ring, 2, locks into the lower notch, 3, of the clevis. Notch, 3, holds the retaining ring in the lower position preventing the hitch pin from inadvertently unhitching.

IMPORTANT! Always install a safety retaining pin in the hitch pin at, 4, to secure the hitch pin and prevent any accidental unhitching of the implement.

To manually unhitch the implement, first pivot the retaining ring, 2, up away from notch, 3, then pull the hitch pin from the clevis.

1

WARNING

Always secure the drawbar to prevent swinging when transporting equipment or when operating any equipment except ground engaging equipment.

2

4

3

161

2-107

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DRAWBAR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT -

MODEL 2145

This model has a straight drawbar, 1. The drawbar is not height adjustable but has three length adjustments.

Hole

1

2

3

Distance from

Hitch Point to

PTO Shaft

355 mm (14″)

406 mm (16″)

508 mm (20″)

Maximum Static

Downward Load kg lbs

2449

2086

1587

5400

4600

3500

1. Model 2145 straight drawbar

1

DRAWBAR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT -

MODELS 2160, 2180, 2210

These models have a drawbar adjustable for both height and length. Invert the drawbar to vary the height of the hitch point above the ground.

IMPORTANT: The clevis and hitch pin retainer must be moved to the top when the drawbar is inverted.

Hole

1

2

3

Distance from

Hitch Point to

PTO Shaft

406 mm (16″)

508 mm (20″)

609 mm (24″)

Maximum Static

Downward Load kg

2750 lbs

6000

2131

1770

4700

3900

DRAWBAR LENGTH

Three holes, 1, 2, and 3, are provided at the front of the drawbar for adjusting length. The front locating pin may be inserted in any of the three holes to vary the PTO shaft to hitch point distance.

Always use the close-coupled position, 1, for equipment exerting high downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc. The maximum static downward loads for these models are shown in the following table. Use the 355 mm (14″) position for

540 PTO equipment, the 406 mm (16″) position for

1000 PTO operation with the 21-spline 35 mm

(1-3/8″) shaft, and the 508 mm (20″) position for 1000 operation with the 20-spline 45 mm (1-3/4″) shaft.

1. Drawbar, low position

2. Drawbar, high position

3

2

1

1

2

162

163

164

2-108

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ADJUSTING DRAWBAR LENGTH

NOTE: The drawbar is shipped in the shortest position. Reposition as required by the attachment.

To change the drawbar length, remove the two bolts,

1, that retain the front pin, 2. Adjust the drawbar length as required and reinstall pin and bolts. Torque bolts to 60 N·m (45 ft.-lbs.).

WIDE SWINGING ROLLER DRAWBAR

(TRACTORS WITHOUT 3-POINT HITCH)

When using ground engaging equipment, the wide swinging roller drawbar offers additional turning ease as compared to the swinging drawbar.

Secure the drawbar, 1, with the swing limiter pins, 2, when using equipment which requires accurate positioning and when transporting equipment.

Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground engaging equipment that does not require accurate positioning. This will make steering and turning easier.

Wide Swinging

Roller Drawbar

Maximum Static

Downward Load kg

1837 lbs

4050

NOTE: When the tractor is equipped with the wide swinging drawbar, the hydraulic 3-point lift linkage cannot be installed.

WARNING

Always secure the drawbar to prevent swinging when transporting equipment or when operating any equipment except ground engaging equipment.

NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar, make sure that the total weight on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum rear axle loading or the rear tire load capacity, whichever is the lower. See

“Ballasting Limitations” in this section of the manual and “Rear Tire Pressures and Permissable Loads” in the Specifications section.

WARNING

Always use the drawbar or lower links in the lowered position for pull-type work.

2-109

2

1

2

165

166

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Safety Chain

When towing implements, 1, on the highway, use a safety chain, 2, with tensile strength equal to or greater than the gross weight of the implement to be towed by the tractor. This will control the implement in the event the drawbar, 3, and implement disconnect.

A chain guide, 4, is provided to support the chain.

After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If necessary, readjust to eliminate a tight or loose chain.

Check the implement operator’s manual for implement weight and attaching hardware specifications.

Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide are available from your authorized dealer.

4

3

2

1

167

2-110

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ATTACHING AND DETACHING TRAILED

EQUIPMENT

IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require brakes on towed equipment when operating on the public highway. Before traveling on public highways, make sure you comply with legal requirements.

To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and implements:

1. Be sure implement is at the draw bar height.

2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and implement hitch to intersect (steering sharply left and right will aid in hitch alignment).

3. Set parking brake and stop engine.

4. Insert hitch pin and be sure the retainer is in the latched position.

NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store the clevis and hitch pin.

Always use a safety chain installed between the tractor and implement hitch when transporting equipment on the highway.

North American standards recommend that you observe the following precautions for towing equipment not equipped with brakes:

DO NOT TOW equipment weighing more than twice the tractor weight.

DO NOT exceed 16 km/h (10 MPH) if towed equipment weighs more than the tractor.

DO NOT exceed 32 km/h (20 MPH) while towing equipment that weighs less than the tractor.

2-111

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FRONT WHEEL TRACK SPACING

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: Read this section completely before adjusting track width.

NOTE: The track width dimensions (width from center to center) shown may vary from your actual measurements depending on specific wheel and tire combination and tire manufacturer.

WARNING

Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or disc. Always tighten hardware to the specified torque and at the recommended intervals.

Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot fall and cause injury.

Spacing dimensions indicate the distance between the center point of the tire tread.

168

Tractors can be equipped with two wheel drive (2

WD) or four wheel drive (FWD). (Note: 2WD not available on the model 2210 tractor) Refer to the appropriate heading for adjustment information.

WARNING

Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting regulations when operating or traveling on the public highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory position, then you may be required to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before traveling on the highway, ensure that the overall tractor width does not exceed the maximum permitted in your locality.

2-112

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

2WD FRONT AXLE TRACK SPACING

2WD FRONT WHEEL TRACK SPACING

The front axle consists of a hollow center beam with a telescopic section on each end.

The track spacing is adjustable in 102 mm (4″) increments to six positions. See Figure 163.

NOTE: Both telescopic sections of the axle must be extended so the same number of adjustment holes are showing.

Track adjustment can also be adjusted by installing the front wheels with the offset disc facing in, 1, or out, 2.

NOTE: 16.5L - 16.1 tires and wheels must be installed with the offset facing out.

169

POSSIBLE TRACK ADJUSTMENTS

AXLE

POSITION

RIM DISC

POSITION

1

In mm

(in)

Out

Tire Size

11.00 - 16.0

1550

(61″)

1753

(69″)

16.5L - 16.1

N/A 1727

(68″)

14L - 16.1

1575

(62″)

1702

(67″)

N/A = Not available

2

In mm

(in)

Out

1651

(65″)

1854

(73″)

N/A 1829

(72″)

1676

(66″)

1803

(71″)

3

In mm

(in)

Out

1753

(69″

1956

(77″)

N/A 1930

(76″)

1778

(70″)

1905

(75″)

4

In mm

(in)

Out

5

In mm

(in)

Out

6

In mm

(in)

Out

1854

(73″)

2057

(81″)

N/A 2032

(80″)

1880

(74″)

2007

(79″)

1956

(77″)

2159

(85″)

N/A 2134

(84″)

1981

(78″)

2108

(83″)

2057

(81″)

2261

(89″)

N/A 2235

(88″)

2083

(82″)

2210

(87″)

2-113

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

2WD AXLE ADJUSTMENT

Use the following procedure to adjust the front axle:

1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.

2. Apply the park brake and place blocks at the front and rear of the rear wheels.

3. Jack up the front axle and place jack stands under the center section of the axle.

4. Remove the axle extension bolts, 1, from both axle extensions.

5. Remove the tie rod clamp bolts, 2, and clamps,

3, from both of the tie rods.

6. Slide the axle extensions to the desired position.

NOTE: Both axle extensions must be extended so the same number of holes are exposed on each extension.

7. Install the axle extension bolts, 1, and torque to

576 N·m (425 ft.-lbs.).

8. Position each tie rod end, 4, so the same number of holes are exposed as are exposed in the axle extension.

9. Install the tie rod clamps, bolts and nuts. Torque the nuts to 68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.).

10. Check and, if required, adjust toe-in.

FRONT WHEEL POSITION (2WD)

Use the following procedure to change track adjustment by reversing the front wheel offset, 1.

1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.

2. Apply the park brake and block both the front and rear of the rear wheels.

3. Jack up the front axle and place on jack stands.

4. Remove the wheels.

5. Reverse the wheel offset and reinstall.

6. Torque the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern to a torque of 204 N·m (150 ft.-lbs.).

NOTE: Torque wheel bolts as specified. Operate for

200 m (200 yards) and retorque. Repeat torque check after one hour, then at 10 hours or daily intervals until bolt torque remains constant. Check torque at 50-hour intervals thereafter.

2-114

170

171

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

2WD FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN

The correct toe-in is 6 - 13 mm (1/4″ - 1/2″).

Use the following procedure to check toe-in:

1. Raise the front axle so that both wheels are off the ground and the steering is free to turn through a full right and left turn. Support the axle with jack stands and block both the front and back of the rear wheels.

2. Place a mark on the inside front of the front rims where the tire and rim meet. Place the marks at hub height.

3. Measure the distance, 1, between the marks.

4. Rotate both front tires 180 degrees so the marks are at the rear.

5. Measure the distance, 2, between the marks.

6. Subtract the front measurement, 1, from the rear measurement, 2.

7. If the toe-in is 6 mm - 13 mm (1/4″ - 1/2″) and the right tire does not contact the end of the cylinder rod in a full right-hand turn, the toe-in is correct and no adjustment is needed.

NOTE: If toe-in is not as specified, proceed to step 8.

Use the following procedure to adjust toe-in:

NOTE: Before adjusting the toe-in, measure the distance, 1, between the inner, 2, and outer, 4, tie rod ends on both tie rods. Adjust the tie rods to achieve equal measurements before proceeding. This will ensure that both tires track evenly.

8. Loosen jam nut, 3, on each tie rod.

9. Remove the outer tie rod ends, 4, from each spindle, 5.

10. Adjust each tie rod equally to achieve 6 mm - 13 mm (1/4″ - 1/2″) total toe-in.

11. Install each outer tie rod end, 4, and torque the retaining nut, 6, to 136 N·m (100 ft.-lbs.). Install a new cotter pin on each tie rod end.

12. Tighten the jam nut, 3, on each tie rod.

13. Check toe-in measurement.

14. Perform a full right-hand turn and check that the tire does not contact the steering cylinder rod.

WARNING

Owners should ensure that all steering components are maintained in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe operation and comply with legal requirements.

2-115

172

173

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FRONT AXLE TRACK SPACING

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TRACK

ADJUSTMENT

Four wheel drive (FWD) tractors have fixed axle assemblies. However, the track width is adjustable to eight different settings by changing the wheel rim relative to the center disc, the rim and/or disc relative to the axle hub or by interchanging both front wheels.

Track Setting

1525 mm

(60″)

Disc/Rim Position

Figure 170 shows the track spacings available by changing the wheel rim and disc positions relative to the hub.

1625 mm

(64″)

Each drawing represents either a left-hand wheel viewed from the rear or a right-hand wheel viewed from the front.

IMPORTANT: When the track adjustment is changed, the steering stops must be adjusted to maintain turning diameter and to provide clearance between the tractor and the tires and, when installed, fenders.

1727 mm

(68″)

1829 mm

(72″)

1930 mm

(76″)

2032 mm

(80″)

2134 mm

(84″)

2235 mm

(88″)

174

2-116

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FRONT WHEEL POSITIONS

Use the following procedure to position the front wheels to obtain the desired track adjustment:

1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.

2. Apply the park brake and place blocks at the front and rear of the rear wheels.

3. Jack up the front axle and place on jack stands.

WARNING

With a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractor supported on a stand, never attempt to rotate the wheel or start the engine. This may cause the rear wheels to move, resulting in the tractor falling from the stand. Wheels should always be supported such that the tires are only just clear of the ground.

4. Remove the front wheel.

5. Position the wheel disc and rim as required to achieve the desired track adjustment.

6. Reinstall the wheel and torque the hardware in a diagonal pattern to the following:

Disc to hub, 1. -- 700 N·m (515 ft.-lbs.)

Disc to rim, 2. -- 345 N·m (255 ft.-lbs.)

NOTE: Torque all rim, disk and wheel bolts as specified. Operate for 200 m (200 yards) and retorque. Repeat torque check after one hour, then at 10 hours or daily intervals until bolt torque remains constant. Check torque at 50-hour intervals thereafter.

NOTE: When interchanging left- and right-hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tire tread remains pointing in the direction of forward travel.

7. Check the front wheel toe-in and steering stops for correct adjustment.

NOTE: During a full turn, check for possible interference between the UltraSteer front tires and the tie-down brackets shown on page 1-28.

2-117

175

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

WHEEL TOE-IN (FWD)

Checking Toe-in On Standard and

UltraSteer Axles

Use the following procedure to check and adjust toe-in:

The correct toe-in is 0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.

2. Mark the inside front of each rim at hub height.

Mark the rim where the tire and rim meet.

3. Measure the distance, 1, between the two marks.

4. Drive the tractor forward until the tires rotate 180 degrees and the marks are at hub height at the rear of the wheels.

5. Measure the distance, 2, between the two marks.

6. Subtract the front measurement from the rear measurement to get the toe-in.

7. The toe-in should be 0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

If adjustment is required, proceed to the procedure for the style FWD axle installed.

Adjusting Toe-in - Standard steer FWD

To adjust the toe-in:

1. Loosen the jam nuts, 1, on each side of the tie rod.

2. Turn the tie rod tube, 2, to adjust the toe-in to

0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

3. Tighten the jam nuts, 1, on each side of the tie rod.

4. Check the adjustment of the steering stops.

1

2 1

176

177

2-118

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Adjusting Toe-in - UltraSteer FWD Axle

To adjust the toe-in:

1. Park the tractor on level ground with front axle steering straight ahead.

NOTE: Check that the center of the axle is aligned with the center of the tractor before adjusting toe-in.

Turn angle will be affected if the axle is not centered.

NOTE: Before adjusting toe-in, measure the distance, 1, between the outer, 2, and inner, 5, tie rod ends on both tie rods. Adjust the tie rods to achieve equal measurements before proceeding.

2. Loosen the two jam nuts, 3, on each tie rod.

3. Turn each tie rod tube, 4, evenly to adjust the toe-in to 0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

4. Tighten the two jam nuts, 3, on each tie rod.

5. Check the adjustment of the steering stops.

NOTE: Inspect the inner, 5, and outer, 2, tie rod ends to make sure they are tight. If the tie rods appear loose, contact your authorized dealer for assistance.

5

3

1

4

3

2

178

2-119

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FWD STEERING STOPS

A steering stop is incorporated at each end of the axle. The stops are adjustable and must be set to provide a minimum clearance of 38 mm (1-1/2″) between the tires or, if installed, fenders, and any part of the tractor with the wheels turned full left and right with the axle fully oscillated.

NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with optional front fenders, ensure there is adequate clearance under all operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops, as necessary. Fenders will have to be removed for

1524 mm (60″ ) track spacing.

Adjust the steering stops at both ends of the axle to the same turn angle.

To adjust the steering stop loosen jam nut, 1. Use a wrench on the end of the threaded stop at, 2, and thread the stop in or out so it will contact the fixed axle stop, 3, when there is at least 38 mm (1-1/2”) clearence between the tire and tractor as previously described. Lock the jam nut, 1, to maintain the adjustment.

Adjust the steering stop on the opposite side to the same turn angle. Check that both stops are adjusted to provide the specified clearence.

WARNING

Maintain all steering components in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe operation and comply with legal requirements.

3

2

1

179

2-120

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

REAR WHEEL TRACK SPACING

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: Read this section completely before adjusting track width.

NOTE: The track width dimensions (width from tire center to center) shown may vary from your actual measurements depending on specific wheel and tire combination and tire manufacturer.

WARNING

Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim, disc, or hub. Always tighten hardware to the specified torque and at the recommended intervals.

Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and make sure, when stored, that they cannot fall and cause injury.

Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting regulations when operating or traveling on the public highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory position, you may be required to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting.

To comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before traveling on the highway, make sure that the overall tractor width does not exceed the maximum permitted in your locality.

Tractors are factory equipped with either 2438 mm

(96″) or optional 2844 mm (112″) rear axles. 3048 mm (120″) axles are available on the 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors.

Two different diameter axle shaft and wheel styles are used as indicated in the following table:

Model

2145

2160/2180/

2210

Axle Diameter Style Wheel

92 mm

(3-5/8″)

105 mm

(4-1/8″)

Pressed steel

(one piece)

Cast center

(two piece)

Model 2145 tractors are equipped with one piece pressed steel wheels, 1. All other models equipped with 710/70 tires use pressed steel wheels.

2-121

180

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Models 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors are equipped with steel disc wheels, 2, with a cast center, 1.

Refer to the track spacing chart that corresponds to your model and tire size.

REAR WHEEL TRACK SPACING

Figure 178 and Figure 179

The rear wheel track spacings are shown in the following charts. Each drawing represents either a left-hand wheel viewed from the rear or a right-hand wheel viewed from the front.

At each disc to rim position, a range of track settings are available by moving the wheel assembly in or out on the axle shaft.

Spacing dimensions indicate the distance between the center points of the tire tread.

181

2-122

Track Setting

Hub and Wheel Placement

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

MODEL 2145 TRACTORS

Tire

Size

Minimum

Track

Setting

All

18.4

20.8

1524 mm

(60″)

1601 mm

(63″)

420/80 1524 mm

(60″)

14.9

1524 mm

(60″)

710/70 1727 mm

(68″)

30.5

1829 mm

(72″)

Maximum

Track

Setting

96″ Axle

(2438 mm)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

Maximum

Track

Setting

112″ Axle

(2844 mm)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

All tires 1880 mm

(74″)

2134 mm

(84″)

2540 mm

(100″)

All tires 2133 mm

(84″)

2463 mm

(97″)

2870 mm

(113″)

All tires 2490 mm

(98″)

2718 mm

(108″)

3150 mm

(124″)

182

2-123

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Track Setting

Hub and Wheel Placement

MODELS 2160, 2180, 2210 TRACTORS

Tire

Size

Minimum

Track

Setting

All

18.4

20.8

420/80 1524 mm

(60″)

14.9

1524 mm

(60″)

*710/70

1524 mm

(60″)

1601 mm

(63″)

Maximum

Track

Setting

96″ Axle

(2438 mm)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

1854 mm

(73″)

Maximum

Track

Setting

112″ Axle

(2844 mm)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

2260 mm

(89″)

Maximum

Track

Setting

120″ Axle

(3048 mm)

2464 mm

(97″)

2464 mm

(97″)

2464 mm

(97″)

2464 mm

(97″)

All tires 1829 mm

(72″)

2134 mm

(84″)

2540 mm

(100″)

2743 mm

(108″)

All tires 2083 mm

(82″)

2337 mm

(92″)

2743 mm

(108″)

2946 mm

(116″)

All tires 2387 mm

(94″)

2642 mm

(104″)

3048 mm

(120″)

3251 mm

(128″)

183

* Refer to Figure 178 for spacing. This tire is mounted on a pressed steel wheel.

2-124

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment of track spacing is achieved by sliding the complete wheel assembly on the axle shaft and/or by changing the rim and disc position.

To reposition the wheel on the axle shaft or to completely remove the wheel, block the front wheels, front and rear, jack up the rear of the tractor until both rear wheels are off the ground. Support the rear of the tractor with blocking or stands. Position wheels with hole in the rim at the top.

Loosen the two center wedge bolts, 1, about 12 mm

(1/2″). Remove the four outer wedge bolts, 2.

Clean the bolts and threaded holes in the wedges before lubricating and installing the outer wedge bolts at 1, for pushing the wedges. Tighten the outer wedge bolts evenly until the wedges loosen on the axle shaft. The wheel assembly will now be free to slide in or out on the axle shaft.

IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407

N·m (300 ft.-lbs.) on the pusher bolts. The use of penetrating oil between the wedge and axle shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft and strike with a hammer to “shock” the wedge free.

WARNING

Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety glasses, against the possibility of flying metal particles.

2-125

184

185

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

An optional wheel adjustment tool, P/N 9824982, is available to move the loosened wheel in or out as required. To use the tool, slide the stepped end, 1, into the notch, 2, between the wedges. Attach the block, 3, to the axle with one of the removed wedge bolts, 4. Turn the adjusting bolt, 5, in or out to move the wheel assembly.

NOTE: The tool is available through your authorized dealer.

Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.

Remove the pusher bolts and replace them in the outer holes, 2, Figure 180.

Tighten the six wedge retaining bolts in increments of

68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.) until a final torque of 391 N·m (290 ft.-lbs.) is achieved.

IMPORTANT: The wedges must be pulled tight evenly.

Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making sure that both rear wheels are the same distance from the ends of the axle shafts.

NOTE: Check the torque of all six wedge retaining bolts on each wheel after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

ADJUSTING REAR WHEELS

WARNING

Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and make sure, when stored, that they cannot fall and cause injury.

NOTE: When changing from one track width setting to another, it may be necessary to interchange the left- and right-hand wheel assemblies. If so, be sure that the “V” of the tire tread remains pointing in the direction of forward travel.

Rear wheel track adjustment is effected by changing the position of the disc, and/or wheel rim, relative to the rear axle as shown in Figures 178 and 179.

In each position, a range of track settings may be achieved by moving the wheel assemblies in or out on the axle shafts.

To change wheel position, follow all steps outlined in

“Rear Wheel Track Adjustment.”

2-126

186

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Adjusting Pressed Steel Wheel

After the rear axle is jacked up and blocked, remove the disc to hub bolts, 1. Using a suitable lifting device, remove the wheel and store the wheel and tire where it won’t fall over. Repeat the procedure on the opposite wheel and install where the first wheel was removed.

Torque the disc to hub bolts to 800 N·m (590 ft.-lbs.) in 68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.) increments using a diagonal pattern.

NOTE: Check bolt torque after driving the tractor for

200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours of operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

Adjusting Cast Center Wheel

After the rear axle is jacked up and blocked, remove the disc to rim attaching hardware, 1. Remove the wheel using a suitable lifting device and store where it won’t fall. Repeat this procedure on the opposite rim and install on the first disc. If the discs, 2, are to be switched, remove wheel weights first, then position discs as required.

Reinstall the rim and weights and tighten all bolts and nuts.

Repeat the procedure on the other wheel.

Tighten the rim to disc retaining nuts uniformly in an alternate pattern, 68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.) at a time, until a torque of 596 N·m (440 ft.-lbs.) for Grade 8 bolts is obtained, is obtained.

NOTE: Check hardware torque after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

WARNING

Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel or rim. Always tighten the bolts to the specified torque and check them frequently.

2-127

187

188

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DUAL REAR WHEELS

WARNING

Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and make sure, when stored, that they cannot fall and cause injury.

NOTE: Dual rear wheels may only be installed on

tractors with 2845 mm (112″) or 3048 mm (120″) rear axles.

The outer wheel track spacing can be adjusted to a maximum of 3251 mm (128″) and the inner wheel to a minimum of 1524 mm (60″). Position the wheels on the axle to achieve the desired track spacing. See

“Outer Wheels” and “Inner Wheels” in this section.

Dual rear wheels may be installed on tractors equipped with the 2845 mm (112″) or 3048 mm

(120″) axle.

Figure 185 shows dual wheel configuration for the

Model 2145 tractor and models 2180 and 2210 tractors with 710/70 duals.

Figure 186 shows dual wheel configuration for

Models 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors.

Outer Wheels

The outer wheels, 1, are pressed steel wheels. They are bolted to extension hubs, 2, that are clamped to the axle shafts using wedges, 3, in the same manner as Model 2145 pressed steel single wheels.

The hub to wedge attaching hardware can be installed in either of two positions to make removal easier depending on wheel spacing.

1. Wheel disc

2. Hub

3. Wedges

4. Six wedge to hub bolt position (option 1)

5. Four wedge to hub bolt position (option 2)

Option 1

Install six 76 mm (3″) long wedge to hub bolts from the wedge side as shown in 4, Figures 185 and 186.

Torque bolts to 391 N·m (290 ft.-lbs.).

Option 2

Install four 178 mm (7″) long wedge to hub bolts from the hub side as shown in 5, Figures 185 and 186.

Torque bolts to 391 N·m (290 ft.-lbs.).

IMPORTANT: These 178 mm (7″) long bolts are included in the optional dual wheel kit available through your authorized dealer. Do not use the standard (shorter) wedge bolts.

189

190

2-128

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

A minimum clearance of 102 mm (4″) must be maintained between the sidewall of the tires measured at the closest point, 1. The tractor should be properly ballasted and the implement attached to accurately measure the tire clearance.

Wheel Removal/Installation

To remove the outer wheel, proceed as follows:

• Block the front wheels, front and rear, then jack up and support the rear axle.

WARNING

Before removing a wheel, make sure it is securely supported.

• Remove the ten wheel disc to hub bolts from the wheel and lower the wheel to the ground using a suitable lifting device. Repeat on the other wheel.

When reinstalling the outer wheels, torque the disc to hub bolts in an alternate pattern to 800 N·m (590 ft.-lbs.).

Inner Wheels

The manual adjust inner wheels can be adjusted in the same way as manual adjust single wheels.

However, due to interference between inner and outer tires or between the inner tires and the fenders, limited track settings may be achieved.

To adjust the inner wheels, first remove the outer wheels as described under “Outer Wheels.”

Follow the instructions under “Rear Wheels Track

Adjustment” in order to adjust the track width of the inner wheels.

NOTE: Check wheel hardware torque after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours of operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service interval.

2-129

191

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BALLASTING AND TIRES

192

BALLASTING

Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon proper ballasting and tire selection. Maximum efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is correct for the application.

Selecting the proper size and type of front and rear tires is also important in achieving maximum tractor efficiency. Various sizes and types of tires are available for your tractor. Your authorized dealer can assist you with this subject.

1. Front weight

2. Rear weight

The tires selected for your tractor must be able to support the weight of the tractor and equipment. The tires must also be able to provide adequate traction to utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful drawbar horsepower.

If your tractor has radial tires, you will find that they produce superior performance over similar bias ply tires. You will have to adjust the ballast, tire pressure and tractor weight split between the front and rear axles for various loads and conditions to achieve the best ride and performance.

2-130

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Always maintain the proper air pressure in the tire to carry the load. Do not over inflate radial or bias ply tires. Radial tires will work with LOWER air pressures. Radial tires will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or BULGE when properly inflated.

The force that enables the tires to drive the tractor must be transmitted through the tire sidewalls. The tires work best when all the tires on a given axle are working at the same rate. Think of them like a shock absorber; they must respond the same way to share the load equally.

Factors Determining Best Tire Performance

Good Performance

Proper air pressure for the load

Proper sidewall deflection

8-15% wheel slip

Proper tire size for expected load

Less than 50% fill of liquid ballast

Maintaining equal tire pressure in all tires on a given axle

Poor Performance

High or low air pressure

Stiff sidewalls

High or low wheel slip

Overloaded or underloaded tire

Excessive liquid calcium in a tire

Treating tires on an axle differently

2-131

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

SELECTING BALLAST

When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum weight of the tractor will change. This means that ballast may have to be added or removed to maintain the best tractor performance. Proper ballast will greatly improve tractor operation and ride.

NOTE: Using these procedures will result in radial ply tires and bias-ply tires having different ballast. Radial tires require less overall weight to achieve the same tractive effort as bias tires. Proper ballasting of radial tires is commonly achieved with cast iron weights alone. While bias tires commonly require both cast iron weights and liquid ballast in the tires.

Always treat all the tires on a tractor axle equally when selecting ballast and tire pressure.

The amount of ballast required is affected by:

ADAPTING BALLAST TO WORK LOAD

AND GROUND SPEED

Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast should be removed when it is not required.

Do not add excessive weight to the tractor to pull heavy loads. Reduce the load because pulling a lighter load at a higher ground speed is more efficient and easier on the tractor.

The recommendations in this manual are based on a 8-10 kph (5-6 MPH) ground speed. If the tractor is operated below 8 kph (5 MPH), additional ballast is required to maintain proper traction. This will cause excessive strain on the tractor drive line components.

NOTE: Heavy draft loads should not be continually pulled in a gear that results in laboring the engine at ground speeds below 8 kph (5 MPH). Reduce the load as required to achieve recommended ground speeds.

• Shipping weight of tractor

• Soil and traction conditions

• Type of implement: fully/semi-mounted or trailed type

• Working speed

• Tractor horsepower load

• Tires - type, size and number of tires

• Tire pressure

Too Little Ballast

Rough ride

Excessive wheel slip

Power loss

Tire wear

Excess fuel consumption

Lower productivity

Too Much Ballast

Higher maintenance costs

Increased driveline wear

Power loss

Increased soil compaction

Reduced fuel economy

Reduced productivity

2-132

CHECKING WHEEL SLIPPAGE

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Wheel Slippage Chart

A good way to monitor ballasting requirements is to check the drive wheel slippage. Slippage should be

8-15% in normal field conditions.

If the drive wheels slip excessively, more weight may be required. However, remember that excessive load and/or poor traction conditions will also cause excessive wheel slip.

Wheel slippage will vary as field conditions change, so always check slippage several times and average the results. Remove weight if slippage is less than

8%.

Wheel slippage is measured automatically by the optional radar in the Tractor Performance Monitor.

Wheel slippage can also be measured manually as described below.

Wheel Revolutions

Counted in Step 4

10

9-1/2

9

8-1/2

8

7-1/2

7

1. Mark a tire with a large white mark.

2. With the tractor fully loaded, mark a starting point on the ground.

3. Keep tractor loaded and mark the ground again when tire completes 10 full revolutions.

4. Drive back over the course again at working speed, with implement raised. Count tire revolutions between the same two marks.

5. Use second count of tire revolutions and the wheel slippage chart to determine percentage of slippage.

NOTE: A rate of 10-15 percent for two-wheel-drive or

8-12 percent for FWD equipped tractors is ideal.

6. Adjust ballast or load to give correct slippage.

NOTE: Available drawbar horsepower is reduced when wheel slip drops below 8 percent because energy is wasted carrying excess weight on the tractor.

2145:

2160:

2180:

2210:

% Slip

10

15

20

0

5

25

30

9875 kg (21,750 lbs)

14300 kg (31,500 lbs)

14300 kg (31,500 lbs)

14300 kg (31,500 lbs)

Result

Remove

Ballast

Proper

Ballast

Add

Ballast

BALLAST LIMITATIONS

IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross vehicle weight shown below. This can cause an overload condition that may void the warranty and may exceed the load rating of the tires and ROPS structure.

Ballast should be limited by the tire capacity or tractor capacity. Each tire has a recommended carrying capacity which should not be exceeded. If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction, either a larger single tire or duals should be used.

Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weight, or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tires.

Bolt-on cast iron weight is recommended because it can easily be removed when not needed.

IMPORTANT: The maximum recommended gross vehicle weight (gvw) is:

2-133

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

ESTIMATING BALLAST REQUIREMENTS

It is possible to estimate the tractor’s operating weight and to calculate the amount of front and rear ballast required. These calculations are general starting points. Contact your authorized dealer or local tire distributor for more information.

Two-wheel drive tractors should be ballasted to achieve 70% rear and 30% front weight distribution.

Tractors with FWD should be ballasted to achieve

60% rear and 40% front weight distribution with towed high draft implements and three-point hitch mounted implement.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

Two-wheel drive and FWD equipped tractors should be operated in a weight range of 54 kg to 64 kg (120 to 140 lbs) per PTO horsepower in order to efficiently develop drawbar horsepower.

CAUTION

See page 2-130 for information about proper ballasting for front end stabilization.

Typical Shipping Weights of Genesis Tractors Without Cast Ballast

Total weight Rear Front

2180 w/FWD

14.9R30/14.9R46

Single tire

8250 kg (18,150) 5478 kg (12,050) 2772 kg (6,100)

2180 UltraSteer FWD

16.9R30/20.8R42

Single tire

8682 kg (19,100) 5788 kg (12,734) 2894 kg (6,366)

2180 w/2WD

14.L-16.1/14.9R46

Single tire

7590 kg (16,700) 5364 kg (11,800) 2227 kg (4,900)

NOTE: These calculations include the weight of a full fuel tank, approximately 318 kg (700 lbs).

EXAMPLE 1

2180 w/UltraSteer FWD, 180 PTO HP - Desired 60%/40% weight split

Total Rear 60% Front 40%

180 PTO HP x

59 kg (130 lbs) per HP =

Shipping weight in kg (lbs)

10636 kg (23400)

-8682 kg (19100)

6381 kg (14040)

-5788 kg (12734)

4254 kg (9360)

-2894 kg (6366)

Weight to be added in kg (lbs) 1954 kg (4300) 593 kg (1306) 1361 kg (2994)

The rear weight needed can be accomplished by adding a set of duals and hubs which weigh approximately

909 kg (2000 lbs) or by adding sixteen 39 kg (85 lbs) weights to the rear wheels.

The front weight can be added by using 12 of the 110 kg (242 lbs) front cast iron weights.

2-134

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

EXAMPLE 2

2180 w/2WD, 180 PTO HP and a desired 70%/30% weight split

Total

180 PTO HP x

59 kg (130 lbs) per HP =

Typical shipping weight in kg (lbs)

10636 kg (23400)

- 7691 kg (16700)

Ballast to be added in kg (lbs) 3045 kg (6700)

Rear ballast can be added in the following manner:

Duals

20 max rear wheel weights

Calcium chloride

TOTAL

908 kg (2000 lbs)

927 kg (2040 lbs)

245 kg (540 lbs)

2082 kg (4580 lbs)

Front ballast can be added in the following manner:

22 small front weights + bracket 1090 kg (2400 lbs)

Rear 70%

7445 kg (16380)

-5364 kg (11800)

2082 kg (4580)

Front 30%

3191 kg (7020)

-2227 kg (4900)

964 kg (2120)

NOTE: For the most accurate results when ballasting a tractor, use the actual weights of the front and rear axles of the tractor to be ballast. This will require weighing the individual axles on a truck scale. These examples are provided to explain how to estimate the amount of ballast required. The specifications provided here are based upon current available information and are subject to change.

Use these examples to estimate your tractor’s ballast requirements.

REMEMBER THAT YOU CAN INCREASE OR DECREASE THE POUNDS PER PTO HORSEPOWER NUM-

BER ( RANGE IS 54-64 kg (120-140 lbs) ) DEPENDING UPON YOUR ANTICIPATED LOAD.

2-135

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

IMPORTANT: To extend tractor life and avoid excessive soil compaction and rolling resistance, do not over ballast. Ballast should never exceed the weight needed to provide traction for sustained full power loads.

CAUTION

Installing liquid ballast requires special equipment and training. Have liquid ballast added by your authorized dealer or a tire store.

TIRES AND BALLASTING

The tire chart in Section 5 shows the load carrying capacity per tire.

IMPORTANT: Do not overload tires. If maximum tractor weight exceeds the load rating of the tire as listed in the tire chart, reduce load, install higher rated ply tires, or reduce road speed.

IMPORTANT: With radial tires NEVER fill a tire to more than 40-50 percent. More liquid ballast solution will leave too little air space to absorb shocks.

Damage to the tire could occur. This occurs due to the lower inflation pressures that are used with radial tires. Bias ply tires can be filled to 75 percent.

A solution of water and calcium chloride provides safe, economical ballast. Used properly, it will not damage tires, tubes, or rims.

NOTE: Use of alcohol as liquid ballast is not recommended. Calcium chloride solution is heavier and more economical.

Radial-ply and bias-ply tires should be handled differently. The following chart shows how much ballast each size and type of tire will hold.

Calculating Tire and Axle Loads

NOTE: Include the weight of fully raised three-point hitch implements when calculating rear axle load when operating at road speeds for an extended period. An example is:

Model 2180 with UltraSteer with rear axle weights with duals = 7470 kg (16434 lbs)

3-point hitch load fully raised = 2727 kg (6000 lbs)

Total rear axle load without additional ballast = 10197 kg (22434 lbs)

Estimated additional ballast 439 kg (966 lbs)

Total rear axle load supported by 4 tires = 10636 kg

(23400 lbs)

Divided by 4

Load supported by each tire with 3-point hitch fully raised = 2659 kg (5850 lbs)

NOTE: An 18.4R46 tire would require 1.6 bar (24

PSI) inflation pressure to carry this weight during extended high speed road use. See tire inflation table in Section 5. If the three-point hitch load was not present, or if three-point load is on the ground, the load per tire would be 1973 kg (4350 lbs). The tire pressure should then be reduced to maintain the proper tire side wall deflection for best traction.

Tire Size

18.4-38

Water

Liters (Gal)

CaCl

2

Kg (Lbs)

Total Wt.

Kg (Lbs)

337 (89) 202 (445) 539 (1187)

20.8-38

18.4-42

20.8-42

14.9-46

431 (114)

352 (93)

259 (570) 690 (1521)

211 (465) 563 (1240)

454 (120) 272 (600) 726 (1600)

246 (65) 147 (325) 393 (867)

18.4-46 397 (105) 238 (525) 635 (1400)

710/70R38 647 (171) 388 (855) 1041

(2295)

ATTENTION: Maximum recommended vehicle weight can be exceeded when tires are filled to 75% fill. See Ballast limitations.

The above weights are based on 75% fill. Radial tires should only be a 40-50% fill. Calculate weight as required.

Some sloshing of the liquid ballast may be noticed when the tractor is first stopped. This is normal.

REAR TIRE WEIGHTING

NOTE: Install cast iron weight first. Use liquid ballast only as required.

2-136

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

REAR WHEEL CAST IRON WEIGHTS

Cast iron weights, 1, are available in two sizes, 39 kg

(85 lbs.) and 204 kg (450 lb.). These weights may be installed on the inside or outside of the rear wheels.

IMPORTANT: The 2145 39 kg (85-lb.) weight is different than the 39 kg (85-lb.) weight used on the other models and cannot be interchanged with the weight for the cast center wheels.

The following table lists the maximum number and location of rear wheel weights:

REAR WHEEL WEIGHTS

Model 39 kg (85 lbs)

Weight

Inside of

Wheel

2

Outside of Wheel

3 2145

2160

2180

2210

5 5

240 kg (450 lbs)

Weight

Inside of

Wheel

N/A

Outside of Wheel

N/A

1 1

NOTE: This table lists the maximum number of weights that are recommended for the tractors.

INSTALLING CAST IRON REAR WHEEL

WEIGHTS

CAUTION

Wheel weights are heavy. Use appropriate lifting equipment or have the job done by your authorized dealer.

To install weights, 1, on the inside of a wheel, the wheel must be removed. See “Rear Wheel Track

Adjustment” section for wheel removal information.

Attach the first weight to the wheel disc and tighten the attaching bolts to 224 N·m (165 ft.-lbs.).

NOTE: Check the torque of all attaching bolts on each wheel after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

Install additional weights by installing bolts through the previous weight. Rotate alternate weights to align bolts with holes in the weights.

Tighten attaching bolts securely to 224 N·m (165 ft.-lbs.). Retighten every two hours of service until bolt torque stabilizes. Check tightness every 300 hours thereafter.

Check to make sure the weights are centered.

Excessive runout can cause an unbalanced condition when operating at high speed.

2-137

193

194

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BALLASTING FRONT END FOR

TRANSPORT

CAUTION

Additional front ballast may be needed when transporting large 3-point hitch mounted equipment.

Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter how much front ballast is used.

Add front end ballast when it is needed for stability and steering control. Never allow the tractor to operate with the front wheels off the ground.

Tractor front end ballast may not always maintain satisfactory stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on rough or hilly terrain. Reduce speed and exercise caution under these conditions.

BALLASTING TWO-WHEEL DRIVE

TRACTORS

The best tractor weight split is 30% on the front axle and 70% on the rear axle to achieve 10%-15% wheel slip.

Two types of front end cast iron weights are available to ballast the front of the tractor.

BALLASTING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

TRACTORS

Ideal tire slippage for FWD tractors is 8-12%. To reduce tire slippage to this level, more weight is needed on the front than two-wheel drive tractors.

The best weight split is 40% front, 60% rear, of total tractor weight. Ballast may be needed in the front tires to obtain this weight split.

2-138

195

196

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

DETERMINING MAXIMUM FRONT

BALLAST

IMPORTANT: Do not overload front tires. If maximum weight shown in the tire chart is below ballasted weight, reduce ballast or install heavier tires.

Use adequate front weight as required for the operating condition. Two-wheel drive tractors should have only enough ballast to maintain safe steering control and keep the wheels on the ground. FWD tractors should have adequate ballast to properly load front wheels - this is especially important when pulling heavy loads. Remove ballast when it is no longer needed.

The tire inflation chart in Section 5 shows the load carrying capacity for the front tires.

FRONT WEIGHTS - CAST IRON

Two different front weights are available as follows:

40 kg (88 lbs), Figure 193, 1.

110 kg (242 lbs), Figure 194, 1.

Weights are available from your authorized dealer.

The following table lists the maximum recommended front weights by model number:

Model

2145

2160

2180

2210

Maximum

40 kg (88 lbs)

Weights

22= 878 kg

(1936 lbs)

22= 878 kg

(1936 lbs)

22= 878 kg

(1936 lbs)

22= 878 kg

(1936 lbs)

Maximum

110 kg (242 lbs)

Weight

N/A

N/A

16=1756 kg

(3872 lbs)

16=1756 kg

(3872 lbs)

70-360-122

70-360-122

2-139

197

198

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

INSTALLING FRONT WEIGHTS

CAUTION

Optional front weights are heavy. Use appropriate lifting equipment or have the job done by your authorized dealer.

Install the front weights on the weight bucket using a suitable lifting device.

To add or remove individual weights, remove the four tie bolts, 1, and loosen the attaching bolts, 2. Add or remove individual weights as required, then reinstall bolts. Torque attaching bolts, 2, to 231 N·m (170 ft.-lbs.) and tie bolts, 1, to 189 N·m (140 ft.-lbs.).

The complete weight assembly can be removed after both attaching bolts, 2, are removed. Use a suitable lifting device to remove the weights.

When the weight assembly is reinstalled, be sure the center weights are seated on the weight bracket alignment tab. Install attaching bolts, 2, and torque to

81 N·m (60 ft.-lbs.).

IMPORTANT: Retorque attaching hardware after 1 hour of use, then at 8 hours of use, thereafter at

50-hour service intervals.

WARNING

The tractor must not be operated unless both the tie bolts and attaching bolts are in position with the bolts tightened as specified. Recheck the bolt torques after one, eight and 50 hours of operation if the bolts have been disturbed for any reason.

199

2-140

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

FRONT TIRES - LIQUID WEIGHT

CAUTION

Installing liquid weight requires special equipment and training. Contact your authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT: With radial tires NEVER fill any tire up to more than 40-50 percent. More liquid ballast solution will leave too little air space to absorb shocks. Damage to the tire could occur. This occurs due to the lower inflation pressures that are used with radial tires. Bias ply tires can be filled to 75 percent.

A solution of water and calcium chloride provides economical ballast and, if used properly, it will not damage tires, tubes, or rims.

The use of alcohol as liquid ballast is not recommended.

Tire Size Water

Liters (Gal)

CaCl

2

Kg (Lbs)

Total Wt.

Kg (Lbs)

11.00-16

14L-16.1

77 (20)

88 (23)

42 (93) 121 (267)

50 (110) 139 (307)

16.5L-16.1

127 (33) 76 (167) 200 (440)

16.9-26 197 (52) 118 (260) 315 (694)

18.4-26

14.9-R28

16.9-R28

14.9-R30

242 (64)

63 (43)

145 (320) 387 (854)

98 (215) 261 (574)

212 (56) 127 (280) 339 (747)

174 (46) 104 (230) 278 (614)

16.9-R30 223 (59) 132 (292) 355 (787)

480/70-30 227 (60) 136 (300) 363 (800)

18.4-30 273 (72) 163 (360) 436 (960)

The above weights are based on 75% fill. Radial tires should only be a 40-50% fill. Calculate weight as required.

2-141

TIRES

Check the air pressure in the tires and recheck every

50 hours or weekly.

When checking tire pressures, inspect for damaged tread and side walls.

Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that a tire may carry. Locate the tire size for your tractor in the Tire Pressure and Load tables in Section 5 of this manual. Do not exceed the load for the pressures listed. Do not over or underinflate the tires.

WARNING

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

Inflating or servicing tires can be dangerous.

Whenever possible, trained personnel should be called in to service or install tires. In any event, to avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow the safety precautions below:

• Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and cause injury.

• Never attempt tire repairs on a public road or highway.

• Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.

• Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift your tractor.

• Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to support the tractor while repairing tires.

• Do not put any part of your body under the tractor or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.

• Never hit a tire or rim with a hammer.

• Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or use a damaged rim.

• Do not inflate a tire unless the rim is mounted on the tractor or is secured so that it will not move if the tire or rim should suddenly fail.

• When fitting a new or repaired tire, use a clip-on valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows the operator to stand clear of the tire while inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.

• Do not inflate a steering tire above the manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on the tire or beyond the maximum shown in the “tire pressure and load” table in section

5 if the tire is not marked.

• Never inflate a traction tire (front tire on a four wheel drive tractor or any rear tire) over 2.4

bar (35 PSI). if the bead does not seat on the rim by the time this pressure is reached, deflate the tire, relubricate the bead with a soap/water solution and reinflate. Do not use oil or grease, inflation beyond 2.4 bar (35 PSI) with unseated beads may break the bead or rim with explosive force sufficient to cause a serious injury.

• After seating the beads, adjust inflation pressure to the recommended operating pressure.

• Do not reinflate a tire that has been run flat or seriously underinflated until it has been inspected for damage by a qualified person.

• Torque wheel hardware after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and

10 hours operation, and thereafter at the

50-hour service intervals.

• Refer to tractor weighting section before adding ballast to the tires.

2-142

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION

GENERAL INFORMATION

This section gives full details of the service procedures necessary to maintain your tractor at peak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenance chart on page 3-8 provides a ready reference to these requirements. Each operation is numbered for easy reference.

FLEXIBLE MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

The intervals listed in the lubrication and maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when operating in normal working conditions.

Adjust the intervals for environmental and working conditions. Intervals should be shortened under adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty) working conditions.

In addition to the regular maintenance operations listed, check the following items every 10 hours or daily during the first 50 hours of operation:

• Wheel nuts for tightness

• Front axle hub oil levels - Four Wheel Drive

(FWD) only

IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, where applicable, extend all cylinders before checking oil levels.

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

CHART - PAGES 3-8 AND 3-9

The chart lists the intervals when routine checks, lubrication, service and/or adjustments should be performed. Use the chart as a quick reference guide when servicing the tractor. The operations follow the chart.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Read and observe all safety precautions listed in

“Servicing the Tractor” in Safety Precaution -

Section 0.

FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE

At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the following additional service operations are carried out. The items are listed in the “First 50-Hour Service” checklist at the rear of this manual.

NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.

CAUTION

Do not check, lubricate, service or adjust the tractor with the engine running.

PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION

To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters, etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level plugs, drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal. Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil contained within them is clean, has not degenerated due to long storage and is of the correct grade.

To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess grease from the fitting after greasing.

• Change engine oil and filter

• Change fuel filter / water separator

• Clean fuel sedimenter

• Change hydraulic oil filter

• Change transmission oil filter

• Check adjustment of front wheel bearings (two wheel drive only)

• Change FWD differential oil

• Change FWD axle hub oil

• Check and adjust park brake

• Check all air intake connections

• Tighten all cooling system hose connections.

• Check torque of front end weight clamp bolts

(when installed)

• Check torque of safety cab mount bolts

• Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts

NOTE: Items listed in the first 50-hour check are important. If not performed, early component failure and reduced tractor life may result.

3-1

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

FUELING THE TRACTOR

When handling diesel fuel, observe the following:

Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not approved due to possible inadequate lubrication of the fuel injection system.

Use only internally grounded fueling hose from storage tank and pump to tractor fuel tank. If in doubt check with your fuel hose supplier. (An acceptable fuel hose would be one with an internal wire that can be checked using a continuity tester.)

If the hose is not grounded, a large static electric charge could occur while refueling and cause damage to the fuel system.

Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.

Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce overnight condensation.

Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine running.

When refueling, make sure the nozzle is in contact with the filler neck of the tractor fuel tank before fuel starts flowing and during the entire time fuel is flowing.

Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the fuel tank.

Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with a Buhler Versatile cap and tighten securely.

Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.

Use Number 2-D in temperatures above -7° C (20°

F). Use Number 1-D in temperatures below -7° C

(20° F).

To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the application and property requirements outlined in the following “Diesel Fuel Selection Chart.”

DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART

General

Fuel

Classification

No. 1-D

No. 2-D

Final

Boiling

Point

(Max)

288° C

(550° F)

357° C

(675° F)

Cetane

(Min.)

40*

40

Sulphur

Content

(Max)

0.30%

0.50%

NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather

conditions below 0° C (32° F) are encountered or when continuously operating at an altitude above

1524 m (5,000′), use Number 1-D fuel.

*When continually operating at low temperatures or high altitude, a minimum cetane of 45 is required.

Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.50% requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the maintenance schedule.

The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above

1.3% is not recommended.

Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below

-7° C (20° F). The cold temperatures will cause

Number 2-D fuel to thicken, which may keep the engine from running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

The quality of fuel used is an important factor for dependable performance and satisfactory engine life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and noncorrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use fuel of a known quality from a reputable supplier.

For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D whenever temperature will permit.

To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties, enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier as well as the fuel user.

3-2

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

FUEL STORAGE

Take the following precautions to ensure that stored fuel is kept free of dirt, water, and other contaminants.

• Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel and form compounds that will contaminate the injection pump and injectors.

• Install bulk storage tanks away from direct sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.

• To facilitate moisture and sediment removal, provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end opposite the outlet pipe.

• If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank filler neck when refueling.

• Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels are not held over and used in winter.

ADDING DIESEL FUEL

1. Clean the area around the fuel cap, 1, to prevent debris from entering the fuel tank, 2.

2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area during refueling.

3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel cap.

NOTE: Fuel tank capacity is 416 liters (110 US gallons).

IMPORTANT: Replace a lost or damaged cap with a genuine Buhler Versatile replacement cap.

1

3-3

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

REMOVING SHIELDING TO GAIN ACCESS

TO COMPONENTS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION

To gain access to perform inspection,lubrication and maintenance operations, shields, access doors, and panels may need to be opened, closed, removed and reinstalled. The following pages cover these procedures.

IMPORTANT: After performing work on the tractor, install all safety shields before operating the tractor.

IMPORTANT: Follow the guidelines listed in

“Servicing the Tractor” heading in the “Safety

Precautions” Section 0 of this book.

ENGINE ACCESS DOORS

An access door, 1, with a hand grip slot, 2, is located on each side of the tractor to provide access for all daily engine fluid level checks and to perform other maintenance.

Located inside the left side access door are the:

• Hood release lever

• Coolant recovery tank

• Engine oil dipstick

• Engine oil fill cap

• Engine oil filter

Located inside the right side access door are the:

• Fuel filter/water separator

• Starter

• Booster battery connection points

OPENING THE ACCESS DOORS

Pull outward on the hand grip, 1, to open the door.

2

3

3-4

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

REMOVING THE ACCESS DOORS

The doors, 1, may be removed to provide improved access.

To remove:

• Open the hood.

• Open the access door, 1, 25 mm (1″).

• Lift straight up on the door and slide the hinge pins from the mount brackets.

HOOD

The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access to the engine area. Two gas springs (located under the hood) assist to raise the hood to either of two positions.

The first position, 1, provides access for routine maintenance except servicing the air cleaner.

The second position, 2, provides access to service the air cleaner.

NOTE: The gas springs can be repositioned to adjust the amount of force needed to open or close the hood. Gas spring adjustment is covered in

“Operation 64” in this section of the manual.

OPENING THE HOOD

To Open the Hood to Position 1:

1. Open the left-hand access door

2. Push forward and up on the hood latch release lever, 1, to unlock the hood.

3. Lift up on the handle, 2, until the gas springs raise the hood to the first position.

4

5

6

3-5

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

To Open the Hood to Position 2:

1

1. slide latch, 2.

2. Push up on the slide latch.

3. Release the handle, 1. The gas springs will raise the hood to the second position.

2

CLOSING THE HOOD

To Close the Hood from Position 1:

Pull down on the handle, 1, until the hood is in the closed position.

7

To Close the Hood from Position 2:

1. Push up on the slide latch, 1. The hood may need to be raised slightly to release the latch.

2. Pull down on the handle, 2, until the hood is in the closed position.

3. Pull up on handle, 2, to be sure the hood is properly latched.

2

1

8

9

3-6

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

REMOVING THE BATTERY COVER

To Remove the Cover:

1. Remove the three attaching bolts, 1.

2. Disconnect the work light electrical connector, 2.

3. Remove the cover, 3, by pulling forward.

10

3-7

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICE

INTERVAL

OPERATION

NUMBER

WHEN

WARNING

LAMP

LIGHTS

1

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER ELEMENT

CHECK LUBE

CLEAN

ADJUST

CHANGE

WASH

DRAIN PAGE NO.

. . .

X . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-10

EVERY

10

HOURS

OR

DAILY

EVERY

50

HOURS

EVERY

300

HOURS

EVERY

600

HOURS

2

3

4

5

ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

RADIATOR, OIL COOLER, CONDENSER

AND AIR/AIR INTERCOOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/HYDRAULIC

OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

3-14

3-15

3-16

8

9

6

7

FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

FUEL SEDIMENTER

. . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X X

X . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAB AIR FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FRONT AND REAR WHEEL HARDWARE

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REAR WHEEL WEIGHT MOUNTING

HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 TIRE PRESSURE AND CONDITION

11/16# 2WD FRONT AXLE GREASE FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17/21# FWD STANDARD STEER AXLE

GREASE FITTINGS / WEIGHT HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

22/28# FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

GREASE FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29# THREE POINT HITCH LINKAGE

GREASE FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30# WIDE SWINGING DRAWBAR

GREASE FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-17

3-17

3-18

3-19

3-19

3-20

3-22

3-25

3-28

3-28

31* ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

32

37

38

39

40

33

34

35

36

41

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FUEL SEDIMENTER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FWD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL OIL LEVEL

FWD AXLE HUB OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A/C RECEIVER DRIER SIGHT GLASS

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

FUEL TANK

. . . . .

. . . . . .

X

X

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAB AIR FILTER

. . . . . . . . . .

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAB RECIRCULATION FILTER

TRANSMISSION DIRECTIONAL

CLUTCH CALIBRATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAFETY CAB MOUNT BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X

X 3-35

X

. .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

3-29

3-31

3-32

3-32

3-33

3-34

3-34

3-36

3-36

3-37

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

CHECK FRT WEIGHT RETAINING BOLTS

ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER FILTER

ENGINE AIR INLET CONNECTIONS

FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE

54** FWD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL OIL

55** FWD AXLE HUB OIL

. . .

. . . . . . .

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AIR CONDITIONER DRAIN TUBES

2WD AXLE FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS

X

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X

X

X

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-38

3-39

3-40

3-41

3-42

3-43

3-43

3-48

3-49

# GREASE AT 10-HOUR INTERVAL WHEN OPERATING IN VERY WET, MUDDY OR EXTREMELY DUSTY

CONDITIONS.

* OIL CHANGE INTERVAL WILL BE REDUCED IF THE DIESEL FUEL HAS A HIGH SULPHUR CONTENT, OR

IF THE TRACTOR IS OPERATED IN EXTREMELY COLD TEMPERATURES.

** FOR SEVERE/HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS, REDUCE CHANGE INTERVAL

FROM 1200 TO 600 HOURS.

3-8

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICE

INTERVAL

OPERATION

NUMBER MAINTENANCE OPERATION

CHECK LUBE

CLEAN

ADJUST

CHANGE

WASH

DRAIN PAGE NO.

EVERY

900

HOURS

OR

ANNUALLY

EVERY

1200

HOURS

OR

ANNUALLY

49

50

51

52

TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/

HYDRAULIC OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET SCREEN

TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER

HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-44

3-45

3-46

3-46

53 ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER AND

OUTER FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54* FWD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL OIL

55* FWD AXLE HUB OIL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

57

58

COOLANT FILTER/CONDITIONER

CAB AIR FILTER

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION

CLUTCH CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-47

3-48

3-49

3-50

3-51

3-52

EVERY

2400

HOURS

OR TWO

YEARS

59

60

FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ENGINE COOLANT AND

FILTER/CONDITIONER

X .

X . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-55

3-57

AS

REQUIRED

62

63

64

PARK BRAKE ADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

HOOD GAS SPRINGS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-61

3-62

3-62

GENERAL

MAINTE-

NANCE

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

3-POINT HITCH CALIBRATION CHECK

BLEED THE FUEL SYSTEM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WORKLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT

TURN SIGNAL, STOP LIGHT AND PARKING LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT -

FENDER MOUNTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT - ROOF MOUNTED

STORAGE PREPARATION

PREPARE THE TRACTOR FOR USE AFTER STORAGE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (EIC) BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-63

3-66

3-67

3-71

3-71

3-72

3-70

3-73

3-74

3-74

+ PERFORM THESE OPERATIONS WITH THE OIL DRAINED IN OPERATION 49.

* FOR SEVERE/HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS, REDUCE CHANGE INTERVAL

TO 600 HOURS.

3-9

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

WHEN THE WARNING LAMP GLOWS

OPERATION 1

SERVICE ENGINE AIR CLEANER

Clean the outer element when the restriction indicator light on the instrument console illuminates.

Perform service within one hour of operation after the indicator lights.

IMPORTANT: Clean the outer element only when the restriction light illuminates. Cleaning the filter too frequently will decrease the service life of the filter.

To service the filter:

1. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outer cover, 2. The wing nut is attached to the cover.

1

2

2. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outer filter element, 2.

IMPORTANT: Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp, lint-free cloth before removing the inner filter element.

NOTE: The inner filter element, 3, should only be serviced every 1200 hours or annually.

3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust is present, the outer element is defective and must be replaced.

3 2 1

11

12

3-10

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

4. Clean the outer element using either method A,

B, or C, depending on the element’s condition.

Methods A or B should be used for dry dust.

Method C should be used if the element is sooty, oily or heavily contaminated, or after cleaning the element six times using methods A or B.

Method A

Lightly tap the ends of the element against the palm of the hand.

IMPORTANT: Do not tap the element against a hard surface as this damages the element.

Method B

Use compressed air, not exceeding 2 bar (30

PSI). Insert the air line nozzle inside the element.

Hold the nozzle 150 mm (6″) from the element and blow the dust from the inside through the element to the outside.

WARNING

Wear eye protection and a face mask when carrying out this operation.

Method C

Immerse the element in warm water containing a small amount of non-sudsing detergent. Allow to soak for at least 15 minutes. Keep the open end of the element above the water line.

IMPORTANT: Never use fuel oil, gasoline, solvent or water hotter than the hand can stand, otherwise the filter element may be damaged.

After soaking, agitate the element in the water, taking care not to allow dirty water outside the element to splash over to the inside.

3-11

13

14

15

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Rinse the element with clean, running water.

Rinse from the inside of the element through to the outside until the water is free of dirt. If a hose is used, do not exceed 2 bar (30 PSI). A gentle trickle of water is sufficient and will ensure that the element is not ruptured.

Shake out excess water from the element and allow to air dry. DO NOT use compressed air, a light bulb or heat to dry the element.

NOTE: It usually takes one to three days for a filter element to dry.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the element with heat or compressed air and do not install until thoroughly dry as it may rupture. It is recommended that a new or previously cleaned element be installed at this service and the washed element put aside for installation at the next service. The spare element should be stored in a dry place and wrapped to prevent dust contamination or damage.

NOTE: An outer filter element may be washed up to six times.

5. Examine the element for damage by placing a light inside the element. Discard the element if pin pricks of light can be seen or if there are areas where the paper appears thin.

6. Check the element material for bunching; the metal casing for distortion; and the rubber gasket for damage. Discard the filter element if it is damaged.

7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not damage the inner filter element.

8. Install a cleaned or a new outer element. Tighten the wing nut.

NOTE: Replace the wing nut seal if it is damaged.

9. Install the air cleaner cover, 2, and wing nut, 1.

If the restriction indicator light continues to illuminate after cleaning the element, replace the element.

1

2

16

17

18

3-12

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 2

CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a level surface and after the engine has been stopped for a minimum of five minutes.

1. Remove the dipstick, 1, wipe clean and reinsert fully.

2. Pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. The oil level should be in the crosshatched area, 2.

3. Remove the filler cap, 3, and add fresh oil as required until the oil level falls in the crosshatched area of the dipstick.

NOTE: Do not operate the engine with the oil level below the bottom mark on the dipstick.

NOTE: Do not fill above the crosshatched area. The excessive oil will burn off and give a false impression of oil consumption.

Oil Specification: API CF-4

Refer to the “Specification” section for the correct oil viscosity.

19

3-13

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 3

CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the recovery tank, 1, when the engine is cold. The coolant level should be to the bottom line, 2, on the recovery tank. If coolant is required, remove the filler cap, 3, and add a 50/50 water and antifreeze mix as specified in the

“Specification” section.

IMPORTANT: Install a new filter/conditioner in the event of a large loss of coolant such as a failed coolant hose. See “Operation 56.”

NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank, the coolant level must be checked in the radiator.

WARNING

The cooling system operates under pressure which is controlled by the radiator pressure cap.

It is dangerous to remove the cap while the system is hot. When the system has cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the radiator cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the coolant filter.

Remove the radiator pressure cap when the system is cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to the bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiator pressure cap and add coolant to the recovery tank.

NOTE: If the coolant level is low, check the system for leaks and repair as required.

20

3-14

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 4

CHECK RADIATOR, OIL COOLER,

AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER,

FUEL COOLER (MODELS 2180/2210)

AND INTERCOOLER CORES.

Check the cores for trash accumulation or blockage.

If any is noted, clean as follows (NOTE: model

2145/2160 arrangement shown):

1. Release the latches, 1, on the air conditioner condenser, 2, and swing it open.

2. Use compressed air or a pressure washer for cleaning. Do not exceed 7 bar (100 PSI).

3. Direct the air or water through each core from the back to the front. Clean the radiator, 3, first; the intercooler, 4, second; the oil cooler, 5, third; the air conditioner condenser, 2, fourth; and if applicable, the fuel cooler (not shown) last.

4. Straighten any bent fins.

NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily substances, apply a detergent solution and remove it with a pressure washer.

CAUTION

Wear eye protection and protective clothing during the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders so they are not struck by flying particles.

21

3-15

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 5

CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR

AXLE/HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine shut off for at least five minutes.

1

1. Remove the dipstick, 1.

2. Check that the oil level is between the full, 2, and add marks, 3, on the dipstick.

3. Remove the filler cap, 4, and add oil as required if oil level is low.

Oil Specification: SEE SPECIFICATIONS

2

3

4

22

3-16

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations plus the following:

OPERATION 6

CHECK FUEL SYSTEM WATER

SEPARATOR

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the area to be worked on.

Drain the separator bowl, 1, if water or sediment are present as follows:

1. Open the drain plug, 2.

2. Operate the hand primer, 3, on the sedimenter,

Figure 24, until all water is drained. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose of properly.

3. Close the drain plug, 2.

4. Press the hand primer repeatedly until resistance is felt.

OPERATION 7

CHECK FUEL SEDIMENTER

Check the sedimenter bowl, 1, and filter screen, 2, for contaminants. If contamination can be seen, clean the sedimenter bowl and screen as described in

“Operation 32.”

NOTE: A partially plugged filter screen can cause reduced fuel supply to the engine which can cause a reduction in engine performance.

1

2

3

23

24

3-17

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 8

CLEAN CAB AIR FILTER

Before servicing the filter, switch off the blower and close all windows and one door. Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the underside of the filter.

NOTE: In humid conditions, such as occur on most early mornings, do not switch on the blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove without washing.

NOTE: The filter is made of specially treated paper with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper surface. Do not damage the element during removal.

To clean the filter:

1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw, 1.

2. Lower the front of the filter cover, 2.

NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the rear.

3. Remove the filter element, 3.

4. Clean the filter using compressed air not exceeding 2 bar (30 PSI). Hold the nozzle at least

300 mm (12″) from the filter to prevent damage to the paper pleats. Direct the compressed air through the filter opposite the normal air flow.

5. Clean the filter chamber with a damp, lint-free cloth.

6. Install the filter with the rubber seal, 4, facing the cab roof.

7. Close the front of the cover and tighten the retaining screw.

NOTE: The filter should be cleaned more frequently when operating in extremely dusty conditions.

WARNING

The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air but will not exclude chemical vapor.

Follow the chemical manufacturers directions regarding protection from dangerous chemicals.

3-18

25

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 9

CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL

HARDWARE, REAR WHEEL WEIGHT

HARDWARE

Check the front and rear wheel hardware, rear wheel weight hardware for tightness using a torque wrench or torque multiplier. The specified torque figures are shown in the table below:

Front disc to hub nuts, 1

(two wheel drive)

203 N·m

(150 ft.-lbs.)

Front disc to hub nuts, 1

(four wheel drive)

Front disc to rim nuts, 2

(four wheel drive)

Rear wedge to disc bolts, 3

(cast disc wheels)

Rear disc to rim nuts (Grade 8), 2

(cast disc wheels)

Rear wedge to hub bolts, 4

(steel disc wheels)

Rear disc to hub bolts, 1

(steel disc wheels)

Rear wedge to hub bolts, 4

(dual wheel - six wedge bolts)

Rear wedge to hub bolts, 4

(dual wheel - four wedge bolts)

391 N·m

(290 ft.-lbs.)

391 N·m

(290 ft.-lbs.)

Rear wheel weight mounting bolts 224 N·m

(165 ft. lbs.)

OPERATION 10

CHECK TIRE PRESSURES AND TIRE

CONDITION

Check and adjust the front and rear tire pressures.

Inspect the tread, 1, and sidewalls, 2, for damage.

Adjust the tire pressures to suit the load being carried.

See “Tire Pressures and Permissable Loads” in

Section 5.

700 N·m

(515 ft.-lbs.)

345 N·m

(255 ft.-lbs.)

391 N·m

(290 ft.-lbs.)

596 N·m

(440 ft.-lbs.)

391 N·m

(290 ft.-lbs.)

800 N·m

(590 ft.-lbs.)

NOTE: If the tires are ballasted with a calcium chloride/water solution, use a special tire gauge as the solution will corrode a standard-type gauge.

Check pressure with the valve stem, 3, at the bottom.

3-19

26

27

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Front Axle Grease

Fittings

Operations 11 through 16 cover 2WD front axle lubrication.

Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.

NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.

Grease Specification: See specifications

OPERATION 11

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE PIVOT PIN

IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at each end of pivot pin.

OPERATION 12

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE BELLCRANK

28

29

OPERATION 13

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE STEERING

CYLINDER

30

3-20

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 14

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE TIE ROD ENDS

(2 FITTINGS ON EACH TIE ROD)

OPERATION 15

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE SPINDLES

(1 FITTING ON EACH SPINDLE)

OPERATION 16

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE WHEEL HUBS

(1 FITTING ON EACH HUB)

31

32

33

3-21

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

Four Wheel Drive (FWD) Standard Steer Front

Axle Grease Fittings

Operations 17 through 21 cover FWD standard steer front axle lubrication.

Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.

NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.

Grease Specification: Use lithium base EP high temperature grease available from your

Buhler Versatile dealer.

OPERATION 17

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER

AXLE PIVOT PIN FRONT

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER

AXLE PIVOT PIN REAR

34

35

3-22

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 18

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER

AXLE KINGPIN BEARINGS

(2 FITTINGS ON EACH AXLE END)

OPERATION 19

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER

AXLE TOP LEFT KINGPIN BEARING

WHEN EQUIPPED WITH TCS, 1.

LUBRICATE DYNAMIC FRONT

FENDER PIVOT.

(1 FITTING ON EACH END), 2.

1

36

2

37

3-23

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 20

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER

AXLE CYLINDERS

(2 FITTINGS ON EACH CYLINDER)

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 21

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER

DRIVE SHAFT SPLINES

38

1

39

THE FRONT WEIGHT PACK RETAINING

BOLTS, 1, SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR THE

CORRECT TORQUE VALUE. ENSURE THAT

THE BOLTS ARE TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE

VALUE OF 250 NM (190 FT. LBS.).

40

3-24

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

Four Wheel Drive (FWD) UltraSteer Front Axle Grease Fittings

Operations 22 through 28 cover FWD UltraSteer front axle lubrication. Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.

NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.

Grease Specification: Use lithium base EP high temperature grease available from your Buhler

Versatile dealer.

OPERATION 22

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

FRONT PIVOT PINS AND ROLLER STOPS

IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at both ends of pivot pin.

41

OPERATION 23

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

REAR PIVOT PIN

IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at both ends of pivot pin.

42

OPERATION 24

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

KINGPIN BEARINGS

(2 FITTINGS ON EACH AXLE END)

43

3-25

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 25

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE TOP

LEFT KINGPIN BEARING WHEN EQUIPPED

WITH TCS, 1.

LUBRICATE DYNAMIC FRONT FENDER

PIVOT (1 FITTING ON EACH END), 2.

1

OPERATION 26

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

CYLINDERS

(2 FITTINGS ON EACH CYLINDER)

2

44

45

46

3-26

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 27

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

REAR PIVOT

OPERATION 28

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

DRIVE SHAFT SPLINE

47

48

3-27

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 29

LUBRICATE 3-POINT HITCH LINKAGE

EVERY 50 HOURS

(3 fittings on each vertical link and 2 fittings on the top link)

Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.

NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.

Grease Specification: Use lithium base EP high temperature grease available from your

Buhler Versatile dealer.

OPERATION 30

LUBRICATE ROLLER DRAWBAR

(IF EQUIPPED)

Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.

NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.

Grease Specification: Use lithium base EP high temperature grease available from your

Buhler Versatile dealer.

49

50

3-28

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations, plus the following:

OPERATION 31

CHANGE ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

IMPORTANT: The sulphur content of diesel fuel affects the engine oil and filter change interval as shown in the following chart:

Sulphur Content Oil Change Interval

Below 0.5%

0.5 - 1.0%

1.0 - 1.3%

300 hours

150 hours

75 hours

The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is not recommended.

WARNING

Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.

If engine oil is extremely hot, allow oil to cool to moderately warm temperature before proceeding.

IMPORTANT: Cold weather operation affects the oil change interval. When operating in temperatures

below -12° C (10° F). Change oil and filter every 150 hours of operation.

Change the oil and filter after the engine has been run until it is warm. Park tractor on level ground and stop engine. Engage park brake.

To change the oil and filter:

1. Remove the engine oil drain plug, 1, and catch the oil in a suitable container. Dispose of oil and filter properly.

2. Replace the drain plug after oil has drained.

Torque plug to 38 NSm (28 ft. lbs.).

3. Clean the oil filter area.

4. Remove the oil filter, 1.

5. Wipe filter mounting surface, 2, clean.

6. Apply a thin film of oil on the new oil filter sealing ring, 3.

51

52

3-29

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

7. Install filter and tighten until sealing ring contacts mounting surface, then tighten an additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

8. Remove filler cap, 1, and fill with 19 liters (5 gallons) of fresh oil of the grade and viscosity prescribed in the “Specification” section.

9. Remove the cover from the right side “B” pillar to get access to the main electrical distribution panel. See “Operation 65” for details on removing the cover.

10. Remove the fuel solenoid relay, 1, (second from the bottom) from the main distribution panel. This will prevent the engine from starting.

11. Crank the engine for 20 seconds. Wait one minute. Repeat the procedure two more times.

IMPORTANT: Cranking the engine provides lubrication to the turbocharger and engine before starting which will extend engine life.

12. Reinstall the fuel solenoid relay, 1, and “B” pillar cover.

13. Run the engine at idle for 3 minutes, then stop the engine.

14. Check drain plug and oil filter areas for leaks.

15. Wait 5 minutes to allow oil to drain into the crankcase, then check the oil level on the dipstick, 2. The oil level should be in the crosshatched area, 3, Figure 53.

16. Add new oil as required until the oil level is in the crosshatched area.

NOTE: Do not fill above the upper line of the crosshatched area. Excessive oil will be burned off within a short time and give a false impression of oil consumption.

Oil Specification: API CF-4

Refer to the “Specification” section for the correct oil viscosity.

Oil Capacity (including filter) - 21 liters (5.5 US gallons)

3-30

53

54

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 32

CLEAN FUEL SEDIMENTER SCREEN

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the area to be worked on.

To clean the sedimenter:

1. Remove the sedimenter bowl, 1, from the lift pump, 2. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose of properly.

2. Inspect the O ring, 3, and replace if damaged.

3. Remove the screen, 4, and spring, 5.

4. Clean screen and bowl.

5. Inspect screen and replace if damaged.

6. Install the spring and screen in the bowl.

7. Fill the bowl with clean, fresh fuel.

8. Install the bowl. Hand tighten only.

9. Depress the hand primer on the fuel filter manifold repeatedly until resistance is felt and the sedimenter bowl is full.

10. Start the engine and check for leaks.

NOTE: A partially plugged filter screen can cause reduced fuel supply to engine. This can cause low power performance.

IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start after cranking for 20 seconds, the fuel system must be purged of air. Refer to “Operation 66” in this section.

55

3-31

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 33

CHECK FWD AXLE HOUSING OIL LEVEL

The correct oil level is determined with cold oil.

To check the oil level:

1

1. Park the tractor on level ground and block the wheels front and back.

2. Carefully loosen the level/fill plug, 1.

WARNING

Hot oil may spray out when the plug is removed.

Wear safety glasses and protective clothing to prevent injury.

3. Check that the oil level is to the bottom of the level/fill plug hole.

4. Add new oil as required.

5. Reinstall level/fill plug.

Oil Specification:

See Specifications

OPERATION 34

CHECK FWD AXLE HUB OIL LEVEL

The correct oil level is determined with cold oil.

To check the oil level:

1. Rotate the hub so the arrow, 1, points horizontal

(level).

2. Park the tractor on level ground and block the wheels front and back.

3. Carefully loosen the level/fill plug, 2 (the

planetary hubs are not vented). If escaping air is heard, allow the pressure to subside before completely removing the plug.

4. Check that the oil level is at the bottom of the level/fill plug hole.

5. Add new oil as required.

6. Reinstall level/fill plug.

Repeat on the other hub.

Oil Specification:

See Specifications

1

2

56

57

3-32

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 35

CHECK A/C RECEIVER DRIER SIGHT

GLASS AND MOISTURE INDICATOR

Check the sight glass for bubbles and the color of the moisture indicator when the outside temperature is

21° C (70° F) or warmer.

To check the sight glass:

1. Start engine and run at 2000 RPM.

2. Depress A/C switch, 1.

3. Position temperature switch, 2, full counterclockwise and blower switch, 3, full clockwise.

4. Inspect the sight glass, 1, ten minutes after depressing the A/C switch. The compressor must be turning when inspecting the sight glass.

If bubbles are visible in the sight glass or the moisture indicator, 2, is pink in color, the air conditioning system should be serviced. Contact your authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT: Do not allow R-134a refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere. Your authorized dealer has the proper handling and recycling equipment to service the system.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains environmentally safe R-134a refrigerant. This system is not compatible with R12 refrigerant. do not use gauges or test equipment with R12 refrigerant as damage to the system will result.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to service the air conditioning system. It is possible to be severely frostbitten or injured by escaping refrigerant.

3-33

58

59

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 36

CHECK BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

Check electrolyte level with the engine stopped, tractor on level ground, and the batteries cold.

To check:

1. Remove battery box cover.

2. Clean the top of the batteries with a damp cloth.

3. Remove the six fill plugs, 1, from each battery.

4. Check that the electrolyte level is 6 mm (1/4″) below the filler neck of each cell.

5. Add distilled or demineralized water as required.

Do not overfill.

6. Replace all fill plugs.

7. Check for loose cable connections, 2, or loose battery clamps, 3. Tighten as required.

8. Replace battery cover.

WARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid. In case of contact with skin, flush the affected area with water for five minutes. Seek medical attention immediately.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye protection when working near batteries.

OPERATION 37

DRAIN FUEL TANK

To drain the fuel tank, 2:

1. Park the tractor with the front wheels on a slight upgrade and block the wheels front and back.

2. Open drain cock, 1, until water and sediment are eliminated. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose of the fuel properly.

3. Close the drain cock when clean fuel appears.

1

2

60

61

3-34

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 38

WASH CAB AIR FILTER

Before servicing the filter, switch off the blower and close all windows and one door. Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the underside of the filter.

NOTE: In humid conditions, such as occur on most early mornings, do not switch on the blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove without washing.

NOTE: The filter is made of specially treated paper with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper surface. Do not damage the element during removal.

1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw, 1.

2. Lower the front of the filter cover, 2.

NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the back.

3. Remove the filter element, 3.

4. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm water containing a small amount of mild detergent. The side of the filter with the sealing strip should remain above the surface of the water.

5. Rinse the filter with running water below 2.8 bar

(40 PSI). Direct the water through the filter in the opposite direction of the normal air flow.

6. Shake off the excess water. Position the filter with the seal side up and allow to dry naturally.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter with heat or compressed air and do not install until thoroughly dry as the filter may rupture. It is recommended that a new filter be installed at this service and the washed filter put aside for installation at a subsequent service. Store the spare filter in a dry place and wrap it to prevent dust contamination or damage.

7. Clean the filter chamber with a damp, lint-free cloth.

8. Install the filter with the rubber seal, 4, facing the cab roof.

9. Close the front of the cover and tighten the retaining screw.

NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently when operating in extremely dusty conditions.

IMPORTANT: Replace the filter if pinholes can be seen when the filter is held up to a strong light, when the filter is dark and dirty appearing after cleaning, when the metal housing is bent, or when the seal is damaged.

WARNING

62

The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air but will not exclude chemical vapor.

Follow the chemical manufacturers directions regarding protection from dangerous chemicals.

3-35

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 39

CLEAN CAB RECIRCULATION FILTER

To clean:

1. Remove the two retaining screws, 1, from the cover, 2.

2. Remove the cover and filter, 3.

3. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm water containing a mild detergent.

4. Rinse the filter with running water below 1.4 bar

(20 PSI).

5. Shake off the excess water and allow to air dry.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter with heat or compressed air and do not install until thoroughly dry as the filter may rupture. It is recommended that a new filter is installed at this service and the washed one put aside for installation at a subsequent service. Store the spare filter in a dry place and wrap it to prevent dust contamination or damage.

6. Install the filter, cover and retaining screws.

NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently when operating in extremely dusty conditions.

IMPORTANT: Replace the filter when holes or tears are visible.

OPERATION 40

TRANSMISSION DIRECTIONAL CLUTCH

CALIBRATION

1. If 9-10 shift has greatly deteriorated or the tractor is in severe duty, the F-1, F-2, and Reverse directional clutches may require calibration.

2. See your authorized dealer or Operation 58.

3. This operation requires that the tractor be at operating temperature.

4. For future reference, always record the shift constant that the EIC displays during the calibration process.

3-36

63

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 41

CHECK SAFETY CAB MOUNTING BOLT

TORQUE

Check the torque of the cab mount bolts and the mount bracket bolts. The specified torque figures are:

Cab mount bolts: 217 N·m (160 ft.-lbs.).

Mount bracket to transmission bolts: 239 N·m (177 ft.-lbs.).

Mount bracket to rear axle bolts:

Model 2145 306 N·m (226 ft.-lbs.)

Models 2160, 2180, and 2210:

239 N·m (177 ft.-lbs.).

FRONT CAB MOUNTS - ALL MODELS

Remove the sill plate, 1, and fold back the floor mat,

2, to access the front cab mounting bolts. Torque mount bolts, 3, as specified. Repeat on the other front mount.

4.

5.

Cab mount bracket

Mount bracket to transmission bolts

REAR CAB MOUNTS - MODEL 2145

Torque bolts as specified.

1.

2.

Cab mount to bracket bolt

Mount bracket to rear axle bolts

64

65

3-37

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

REAR CAB MOUNTS - MODELS 2160,

2180, AND 2210

Torque left and right side mount bolts as specified.

1.

2.

Cab mount bolts

Mount bracket to rear axle bolts

OPERATION 42

THE FRONT WEIGHT PACK RETAINING

BOLTS, 1, SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR THE

CORRECT TORQUE VALUE. ENSURE THAT

THE BOLTS ARE TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE

VALUE OF 250 NM (190 FT. LBS.).

1

66

67

3-38

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 600 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations plus the following:

OPERATION 43

CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER

OUTER FILTER

To change the filter:

1. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the filter cover, 2. The wing nut is attached to the cover.

1

2

2. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outer filter, 2.

IMPORTANT: Do not remove or disturb the inner filter.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not damage the inner filter, 3.

4. Install a new outer filter and tighten the wing nut.

NOTE: Replace the wing nut seal if it is damaged.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner cover and tighten the wing nut.

3 2 1

68

69

3-39

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 44

CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE

CONNECTIONS

Check all intake system connections for proper sealing and the clamps for tightness.

1.

Left side connections

1

1

1.

Right side connections

1

70

71

3-40

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 45

CHANGE FUEL FILTER/WATER

SEPARATOR

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the area to be worked on.

1. Hold the filter, 1, so it cannot turn.

2. Unscrew the plastic water separator bowl, 2, from the filter. Do not damage the bowl or lose the

O ring. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose of properly.

3. Remove the filter, 1. Dispose of filter properly.

4. Clean the filter mount surface, 2.

5. Install the O ring and plastic water separator bowl on the new filter. Hand tighten only.

6. Fill the filter with clean, fresh, diesel fuel.

7. Coat the filter seal, 3, with diesel fuel.

8. Install the filter until the seal contacts the mount, then tighten an additional 1/2 turn.

9. Depress and release the hand primer at the fuel pump until resistance is felt indicating the filter is full.

10. Start the engine and check for fuel leaks.

IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start after cranking for 20 seconds, the fuel system must be purged of air. Refer to “Operation 66” in this section.

3

2

1

72

73

3-41

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 46

CHECK AIR CONDITIONER DRAIN TUBES

Check that the four drain tubes and end caps are open.

One tube, 1, travels down and exits beneath each of the front cab “A” pillars. One tube, 2, travels down and exits beneath each of the cab “B” pillars.

NOTE: There are two tubes on each side of the tractor.

74

3-42

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 47

ADJUST 2WD FRONT AXLE WHEEL

BEARINGS

1. Block the rear wheels front and rear to prevent movement.

2. Raise one side of the front axle until the wheel is off the ground. Put a support under the front axle.

3. Remove the hub cap, 1, from the hub, 2.

4. Remove the cotter pin, 3.

5. Turn the wheel as you tighten the hex nut, 4, to a torque of 20 N·m (15 ft.-lbs.). Back off the hex nut until the first slot where the cotter pin can be installed is aligned with the hole in the spindle.

6. Install the cotter pin, 3, in the spindle, 5.

7. Install the hub cap, 1, on the hub, 2.

8. Raise the axle and remove the support.

9. Adjust the other wheel bearing.

OPERATION 48

CHECK ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE

Check valve clearance with the engine cold.

The correct valve clearance is:

Inlet 0.36 mm - 0.46 mm (0.014″ - 0.018″)

Exhaust 0.43 mm - 0.53 mm (0.017″ - 0.021″)

Remove the rocker cover and adjust as follows:

1. Turn the crankshaft until any pair of valves in the

“Valves Open” column is fully open. Check and adjust the corresponding pairs of valves in the

“Valves to Adjust” column.

Valves Open Valves to Adjust

1 inlet/3 exhaust 4 exhaust/6 inlet

5 inlet/6 exhaust 1 exhaust/2 inlet

2 exhaust/3 inlet 4 inlet/5 exhaust

4 exhaust/6 inlet 1 inlet/3 exhaust

1 exhaust/2 inlet 5 inlet/6 exhaust

4 inlet/5 exhaust 2 exhaust/3 inlet

2. Slide a feeler gauge, 1, of the correct thickness between the valve stem, 2, and rocker arm, 3.

3. Turn the rocker arm adjusting screw, 4, until the proper clearance is obtained. Turn the screw clockwise to reduce clearance and counterclockwise to increase clearance.

4. Repeat the process until all the valves have been checked and adjusted.

5. Install the rocker cover. Use a new gasket if the original shows damage.

3-43

75

76

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 900 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

Complete the appropriate preceding operations plus the following:

OPERATION 49

CHANGE TRANSMISSION/REAR

AXLE/HYDRAULIC OIL

NOTE: Perform this operation in conjunction with

“Operations 50, 51 and 52.”

Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the tractor on level ground, lower three-point linkage and stop the engine. Engage the park brake and block wheels on both sides.

WARNING

Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is extremely hot, allow oil to cool to moderately warm temperature before proceeding.

To change the oil:

1. Remove the drain plug, 1, and catch the oil in a suitable container. Dispose of oil properly.

NOTE: Approximately 136 liters (36 gallons) of oil will be drained depending on the model.

2. Install the drain plug.

IMPORTANT: Perform operations 50, 51 and 52 before refilling with oil.

3. Remove the filler cap, 1, and refill with new oil.

Model 2145 - 83 liters (22 U.S. gal.)

Models 2160, 2180, 2210 - 106 liters (28 U.S.

gal.).

Normal refill quantity will be approximately 23 liters (6 U.S. gal.) less than factory fill capacity, stated on Section 5, due to oil retained in the system.

4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic system. Fully raise the three-point linkage.

5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while checking the system for leaks.

6. Check oil level on the dipstick, 2. Add oil as required to bring the oil level to the full mark, 3.

NOTE: Do not fill above the full mark.

Oil Specification: See Specification

Oil Capacity:

Model 2145 - 113 liters (30 U.S. gal.)

Models 2160, 2180, 2210 - 140 liters (36.9 U.S.

gal.)

NOTE: Capacities listed are for a COMPLETELY

DRAINED system.

2

3-44

3

77

1

78

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 900 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 50

CLEAN HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET SCREEN

NOTE: Perform this operation while oil is drained in

“Operation 49.”

NOTE: Clean inlet screen area before proceeding.

To clean the inlet screen:

1. Remove the three attaching bolts, 1, from the end cover, 2.

2. Pull the end cover, 1, down until it is free of the coupler, 2.

NOTE: Do not damage the O rings, 3, when removing the end cover.

79

80

3. Remove the suction screen, 1, by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Clean the sump area.

5. Clean, then inspect, suction screen and all O rings. Replace if damaged.

6. Install the suction screen. Turn clockwise until hand tight, then turn an additional 1/4 turn. Do not over tighten.

7. Install the O ring, 2, on the housing and lubricate with oil.

8. Oil the exposed O ring, 3, on the coupler.

9. Install the end cover and coupler. Do not damage the O rings.

10. Install the attaching bolts and torque to 50 N·m

(37 ft.-lbs.).

3-45

81

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 900 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 51

CHANGE TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER

NOTE: Perform this operation while oil is drained in

“Operation 49.”

NOTE: Clean filter area before proceeding.

To change the filter:

1. Remove the filter, 1. Dispose of filter properly.

2. Discard the O ring, 2.

3. Clean the filter manifold seal surface, 3.

4. Coat the new O ring, 2, with clean oil.

5. Install the filter and tighten.

OPERATION 52

CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER

NOTE: Perform this operation while oil is drained in

“Operation 49.”

NOTE: Clean filter area before proceeding.

To change the filter:

1. Remove the filter, 1. Dispose of filter properly.

2. Discard the O ring, 2.

3. Clean the filter manifold seal surface, 3.

4. Coat the new O ring, 2, with clean oil.

5. Install the filter and tighten.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to install the correct size filter.

82

83

3-46

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

Complete the appropriate preceding operations plus the following:

OPERATION 53

CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER

INNER AND OUTER FILTER ELEMENTS

To change the filters:

1. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outer cover, 2.

1

2

2 1

84

2. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outer filter element, 2.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp, lint-free cloth.

4. Unscrew the wing nut, 3, and remove the inner filter element, 4.

5. Check the seals on the wing nuts and replace if damaged.

6. Install new inner filter element, 4, and tighten wing nut, 3, hand tight.

7. Install new outer filter element, 2, and tighten wing nut, 1, hand tight.

8. Install air cleaner filter cover and tighten wing nut hand tight.

IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter element properly could result in engine damage.

Therefore it is recommended that the element be installed by an authorized dealer.

3

4

85

3-47

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 54

For severe/high ambient temperature applications, reduce change interval to 600 hours.

2

CHANGE FWD DIFFERENTIAL OIL

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park brake. It is recommended that oil be changed shortly after the tractor has been operating, so that contaminents do not settle out.

To change the oil:

1. Loosen the fill/check plug, 2. Allow air to enter.

2. Carefully remove the drain plug, 1, and completely drain all oil into a suitable container.

Dispose of the oil properly.

WARNING

Hot oil may spray out when the plug is removed.

Wear safety glasses and protective clothing to prevent injury.

1

3. Reinstall drain plug.

4. Remove fill/check plug, 2.

5. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the fill/check plug hole.

6. Reinstall fill/check plug.

Oil Specification:

See Specifications

Oil Capacity: 14.5 liters (15.3 U.S. qts)

86

3-48

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 55

For severe/high ambient temperature applications, reduce change interval to 600 hours.

CHANGE FWD PLANETARY HUB OIL

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park brake. It is recommended that oil be changed shortly after the tractor has been operating, so that contaminents do not settle out.

To change the oil:

1. Position the wheel so the fill/drain/level plug, 1, is at the highest point, at 12:00.

2. Carefully loosen the plug (the planetary hubs are

not vented) and allow any air to escape. Rotate the wheel so plug is in the lowest point. Remove plug and drain oil completely into a suitable container. Dispose of oil properly.

3. Rotate the wheel so the arrow and plug, 2, is pointing straight down.

87

88

4. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the fill/check/level plug hole, 3, when it is horizontal level.

5. Install the fill/drain/level plug.

6. Repeat the process on the other hub.

Oil Specification:

See Specifications

Oil Capacity (each hub):

- 5 liter (5.3 U.S. quarts)

89

3-49

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 56

CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT FILTER/

CONDITIONER

A replaceable coolant filter/conditioner is installed on the tractor. The filter/conditioner canister contains a filter element and a conditioner in the form of a paste.

As coolant flows through the filter, the paste dissolves and mixes with the coolant to provide optimum engine corrosion protection.

The conditioner in the filter will:

• Increase rust prevention.

• Reduce scale formation.

• Minimize cylinder wall erosion (pitting).

• Reduce foaming of the coolant.

As the conditioner works and protects the system, it gradually loses its strength and must be replenished.

Replacing the filter at the specified interval ensures maximum protection.

CAUTION

90

Only change the filter when the engine is cool.

To change the filter:

IMPORTANT: The new filter contains a measured amount of chemical inhibitor in paste form. The amount of conditioner and the size of the filter element are matched to the cooling capacity of the tractor. It is important that this filter is changed every

1200 hours if total protection of the engine cooling system is to be maintained. The use of a non-approved filter may jeopardize this protection.

IMPORTANT: Install a new filter/conditioner in the event of a large coolant loss such as a failed coolant hose.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the filter/conditioner more frequently than specified unless a large coolant loss occurs.

1. Close both shutoff valves, 1.

2. Remove the filter, 2. Dispose of properly.

3. Lubricate the filter seal, 3, on the new filter with clean oil.

4. Clean the filter manifold sealing surface, 4.

5. Install the new filter until the seal contacts the manifold. Tighten an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

6. Open both shutoff valves.

7. Start the engine and run it for 5 minutes.

8. Check the filter area for leaks.

IMPORTANT: Anti-leak additives should not be used. The clogging properties of these additives could affect the performance of the filter and conditioner.

IMPORTANT: If it becomes necessary to replace the filter before the 1,200 hour change interval, or if less than one-half of the coolant is lost, a filter without a conditioner should be installed.

IMPORTANT: If replacing with fully formulated coolant, a coolant filter without the additive should be used.

3-50

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 57

CHANGE CAB AIR FILTER

To change the filter:

1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw, 1.

2. Lower the front of the filter cover, 2.

NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the rear.

3. Remove the filter element, 3, and discard.

4. Clean the filter chamber with a damp cloth.

5. Install a new filter with the rubber seal, 4, facing the cab roof.

6. Close the cover and tighten the retaining screw.

WARNING

The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air but will not exclude chemical vapor.

Follow the chemical manufacturers directions regarding protection from dangerous chemicals.

91

3-51

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 58

CHECK POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION

CLUTCH CALIBRATION

NOTE: The Powershift transmission has three directional clutches. Calibrate the clutches periodically to compensate for wear. This service should be performed after the first 50 hours of operation and every 1200 hours, or more frequently at 300 hours if a deterioration in shift quality is noted (see Operation

40). It is recommended that this operation be performed by an authorized dealer.

WARNING

Before carrying out the calibration procedure, firmly apply the park brake and block the wheels, front and rear.

IMPORTANT: During the calibration procedure, the electronic management system detects precisely the point at which the clutches start to engage. This engagement is detected by a very small reduction in engine speed. During calibration, it is essential that no action is taken to cause the engine speed to vary.

Be sure that the air conditioner and all electrical equipment is switched off. Do not operate the PTO or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot throttle.

Preparing the Tractor for Calibration

NOTE: The clutches should be adjusted when the oil is at normal operating temperatures.

Prior to calibrating the directional clutches, carry out the following:

3-52

92

1. Park the tractor on level ground away from any obstacles in case of unexpected tractor movement. Stop the engine and place remote hydraulic controls in the neutral position.

2. Engage the park brake and block the wheels, front and rear.

NOTE: The LCD will flash “P” if the parking brake is not applied.

3. Turn off the air conditioning.

4. Move the shift lever to the ”NEUTRAL

DOWNSHIFT” position (to the left) and hold in position. While holding it there, turn the key--start switch to the start position.

5. Start the engine. The full LCD will be displayed.

6. Release the shift lever three to five seconds after the engine starts.

NOTE: If lever is held longer than three to five seconds, a ”d” will momentarily appear on the display accompanied by an audible alarm. The display then exits the calibration mode. If this occurs, repeat steps 1 through 6.

7. Verify the digital display is showing a steady ”CC” indicating the electronic management system is in the clutch calibration mode.

NOTE: Repeat steps 1 through 7 if ”CC” is not present.

8. Adjust engine speed to 1200 +/-- 30 RPM using the hand throttle (do not use cruise control).

9. Push the shift lever forward and ”CC” should begin flashing.

10. Proceed to calibrate the clutches if ”CC” is flashing.

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

Calibrate F1 Directional Clutch

To calibrate the low range directional clutch (F1):

1. Move the speed control lever to the forward position.

2. Verify the display shows a flashing “CC.”

3. Move the speed control lever to the left and hold it there.

NOTE: If wheel movement is detected, the LCD will flash “F” (failed). Recheck parking brake engagement and wheel blocks before restarting the calibration procedure.

4. Observe the digital display. It will flash “20” for approximately 4 seconds, then the number displayed will increase by one digit every second until the reading becomes steady. A steady reading indicates that clutch F1 is calibrated.

5. Return the speed control lever to the neutral position after the clutch is calibrated.

6. Verify that the digital display shows a flashing

“CC.”

Calibrate F2 Directional Clutch

To calibrate the high range directional clutch (F2):

1. Move the speed control lever to the forward position.

2. Verify that the display shows a flashing “CC.”

3. Move the speed control lever to the right and hold it there.

4. Observe the digital display. It will flash “20” for approximately 4 seconds, then the number displayed will increase by one digit every second until the reading becomes steady. A steady reading indicates that clutch F2 is calibrated.

5. Return the speed control lever to the neutral position after the clutch is calibrated.

6. Verify that the digital display shown is flashing

“CC.”

93

94

3-53

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

Calibrate Reverse Directional Clutch

To calibrate the reverse range directional clutch:

1. Move the speed control lever to the reverse position.

2. Verify that the display shows a flashing “CC.”

3. Move the speed control to the right and hold it there.

4. Observe the digital display. It will flash “20” for approximately 4 seconds, then the number displayed will increase by one digit for every second until the reading becomes steady. A steady reading indicates that the reverse range clutch is calibrated.

5. Return the speed control lever to the neutral position after the clutch is calibrated.

6. Verify that the digital display shown is flashing

“CC.”

95

EXIT CALIBRATION MODE

To exit the calibration mode:

1. Stop the engine and wait 10 seconds before proceeding.

2. Start the engine in the normal manner.

3. Verify that with the speed control lever in the neutral position, the digital display indicates

“N5.”

The tractor is now ready for normal operation.

PROGRAMMING FAULTS

Flashing “F”: Indicates that the CCM has detected possible transmission output shaft rotation. This can cause drive wheel movement. THE CALIBRATION

PROCESS WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE STOPPED.

To clear it, ensure the wheels are blocked and that service brakes are applied. If the tractor is parked on a slope, move the tractor to level ground.

Flashing “P”: Indicates that the park brake lever was not applied before the calibration process was started. To clear it, apply the park brake and restart the calibration process.

“EH” Error High: During calibration process, the initial application of the clutch occurred too quickly and that the engine speed dropped the 14 RPM before the constant had a chance to ramp up normally. Ensure that all tractor accessories (air conditioning) are turned off. If this continues, contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

“EL” Error Low: During the directional clutch calibration, the CCM increased the constant number to the maximum limit and the clutch did not load the engine down by 14 RPM. The calibration process on this clutch will automatically stop at that point. The constant usually counts up to 99 and the “EL” shows up. If this continues, contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

3-54

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

Complete the appropriate preceding operations, plus the following:

OPERATION 59

CHECK AND CLEAN FUEL INJECTORS

IMPORTANT: The injectors should be cleaned and adjusted by an authorized dealer or an injector specialist.

WARNING

Diesel fuel escaping under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.

Wear eye protection.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before connecting or disconnecting lines.

• Tighten all connections before starting the engine or pressurizing lines.

If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention immediately or gangrene may result.

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the area to be worked on.

IMPORTANT: Remove and replace one injector at a time. This will reduce the chance of dirt entering the engine through the injector opening.

IMPORTANT: Place caps on all open lines or injector openings to prevent the entry of dirt.

The following text assumes that you have a spare set of injectors which have been cleaned and adjusted and are ready to be installed. Use the following procedure to remove and replace the injectors:

1. Disconnect the high pressure injector line, 1, from the injector, 2.

2. Remove the leak off line retaining bolt, 3.

3. Remove the leak off line, 4, and discard the two copper washers (one on either side of the banjo fitting).

96

3-55

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

4. Remove the injector retaining bolts and washers,

1, and hold-down clamp, 2.

5. Turn the injector, 3, clockwise to loosen it, then remove from the head.

6. Remove the copper sealing washer, 4, from the injector. If the washer is not on the injector it has remained in the head and must be extracted.

Discard the copper washers.

7. Remove the cork dust seal, 5, from the injector.

8. Install a new cork dust seal on the replacement injector.

9. Install a new copper washer on the end of the injector.

10. Install the injector.

11. Install the hold-down clamp.

12. Install the retaining bolts and washers. Torque the bolts evenly to 22 N·m (17 ft.-lbs.).

13. Install the leak off line using new copper washers, 6, on either side of the banjo fitting.

14. Torque the leak off line retaining bolt, 7, to 4.5

N·m (40 in.-lbs.).

15. Install the high pressure line and tighten the connector to 24 N·m (18 ft.-lbs.).

16. Repeat the process on the remaining injectors.

17. Bleed the fuel system as detailed in “Operation

66” in this section.

18. Start the engine and visually inspect for leaks.

The injectors which were removed should be serviced by an authorized dealer and retained for use at the next service interval.

NOTE: Unauthorized modification or adjustment of fuel injection equipment outside specification will invalidate the warranty.

NOTE: Be sure to install the clamp with the raised side facing up.

97

3-56

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 60

CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT AND

FILTER/CONDITIONER

The rust and corrosion inhibitors in the antifreeze and the filter/conditioner deteriorate with use and require replacement on a regular basis.

The tractor is equipped with a water filter with coolant conditioner. The water filter/conditioner removes foreign material from the cooling system, controls rust, and conditions the coolant to prevent erosion and cavitation in the cooling system.

See “Operation 56” for additional information on the filter/conditioner.

WARNING

The coolant system operates under pressure which is controlled by the radiator pressure cap.

It is dangerous to remove the pressure cap while the system is hot. When the system has cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor containers, where used.

CAUTION

Drain the coolant when the engine is cool.

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park brake and block the wheels front and rear.

To change coolant and the filter/conditioner:

1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximum position.

2. Check that the heater shutoff valves, 1, are open.

98

3-57

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

3. Open the drain plug, 1, on the radiator and drain all the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the coolant properly. The system holds 26.4

liters (7 U.S. gallons).

WARNING

Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the antifreeze container.

4. Remove the drain plug, 1, from the left rear of the engine block. Drain all the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the coolant properly.

99

100

5. Remove the radiator cap,1, to increase the drainage rate.

101

3-58

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

6. Close the shutoff valves, 1, at the filter/conditioner, 2.

7. Remove the filter/conditioner.

8. Flush the system with a commercial coolant system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied with the cleaner.

9. Drain the cleaner and let the engine cool.

IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot engine.

The difference in temperature could cause the block or head to crack.

10. Fill system with clean water.

11. Run engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. Allow the engine to cool.

12. Close all drain plugs.

13. Coat the filter seal, 3, with coolant.

IMPORTANT: The standard replacement conditioner filter contains conditioning additive. If the replacement coolant is fully formulated and contains the correct amount of conditioner, a coolant filter without conditioner should be used. See “Part

Numbers of High Usage Items” in the specifications section of this manual or contact your Buhler

Versatile Dealer.

14. Wipe the sealing surface of the filter manifold, 4.

15. Install the filter until the gasket contacts the manifold. Tighten an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

16. Open the shutoff valves, 1, at the filter manifold.

17. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections for leaks.

18. Fill the cooling system with a 50/50 blend of low silicate antifreeze and clean soft water. Add coolant slowly through the radiator filler neck until the coolant is to the bottom of the filler neck.

NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the radiator as slowly as practicable thereby allowing any air pockets to disperse.

102

3-59

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

19. Fill the coolant recovery tank, 1, to the lowest mark, 2.

20. Start the engine and run it until normal operating temperature is reached.

NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is pumped around the system.

21. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.

22. Remove the radiator cap and add coolant to the radiator to bring the coolant level to the bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiator cap.

23. Add coolant to the recovery tank as required to bring the level to the cold mark.

NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated immediately following the coolant and filter change, run the engine for one hour to ensure that the chemical conditioner within the filter is dispersed into the cooling system.

Antifreeze Specification: See Specifications

Clean Water Specification (Maximum):

Total Hardness

Chlorides

Sulfates

300 parts per million

100 parts per million

100 parts per million

Coolant Capacity: 26.4 liters (7 U.S. gallons)

103

3-60

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

AS REQUIRED OPERATIONS

OPERATION 62

ADJUST THE PARK BRAKE

The park brake should be fully applied when the park brake handle is raised to the third or fourth notch

(click) on the quadrant.

IMPORTANT: Adjust the park brake when the park brake handle must be raised above the fourth notch on the quadrant to fully apply the park brake.

Adjust the park brake with the tractor parked on level ground, the engine off, and the wheels blocked front and rear.

To adjust the park brake:

1. Position the park brake handle, 1, in the fully lowered, 0, position.

2. Raise the park brake handle to the second notch on the quadrant.

3. Loosen the forward jam nut, 1, as far as possible on the cable housing, 2.

4. Pull the cable housing, 2, rearward until a

20-pound (9 kg) resistance is felt. Hold in position.

5. Tighten the rear jam nut, 3, until it contacts the bracket, 4. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

6. Tighten both jam nuts, 1 and 3, against the bracket, 4.

7. Raise the park brake handle and check for proper adjustment.

104

105

3-61

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

AS REQUIRED OPERATIONS

OPERATION 63

CHECK WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

LEVEL

To add fluid to the windshield washer reservoir:

1. Remove the filler cap, 1.

2. Add washer solvent until the reservoir, 2, is full.

3. Replace the filler cap.

IMPORTANT: In cold weather use a washer solvent with anti-freeze properties.

OPERATION 64

ADJUST THE HOOD GAS SPRINGS

The gas springs, 1, are installed at the factory in the rear mount hole, 2. The gas springs can be installed in the front mount hole to provide additional lift assist.

To reposition the gas spring:

1. Open the hood to the fully raised position.

CAUTION

Fully support the hood before removing either gas spring.

2. Support the hood with a sling or prop rod to prevent the hood from closing when a gas spring is removed.

NOTE: Change the location of one gas spring then change the position of the other gas spring.

3. Unscrew the pivot ball, 3, from the mount hole.

4. Position the pivot ball in the desired mount hole and tighten to 54 N·m (40 ft.-lbs.).

5. Repeat for the other gas spring.

6. Remove the support sling or prop rod.

7. Check the operation of the gas springs.

1

4

3

2

106

107

3-62

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

AS REQUIRED OPERATIONS

OPERATION 65

3-POINT HITCH CALIBRATION CHECKS

Three-point hitch calibration is necessary if:

1. Full travel from 0-99 on the TPM does not occur with the height limit turned fully clockwise.

2. Cylinder rods are not fully retracted when the

TPM indicates “0”.

3. The 3-point looses capture when the quadrant lever is moved rapidly during tractor operation

4. Any 3-point hitch components are changed or disconnected.

When any of these conditions occur, the 3-point hitch requires calibration.

EDC Calibration - Pre-Steps

1. Place mix knob, 1, fully counterclockwise

(position mode).

2. Turn the height limit knob, 2, fully clockwise. A flashing HL on 3-point hitch display during the calibration pre-steps indicates the height limit knob is not turned fully clockwise.

2

1

108

3-63

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

3. Put RAISE/WORK switch, 1, in work position, 3.

(2 = Raise position, 3 = Work position, 4 = lower position)

4. Start the tractor with the parking brake applied.

5. Move the quadrant lever fully forward.

6. Check lift cylinders for exposed chrome. If chrome is visible, use fender switches to lower

3-point until cylinders are fully retracted.

NOTE: The RAISE/WORK switch must be cycled to the raise position then work position before the quadrant lever will capture the hitch and allow you to proceed.

7. Slowly move quadrant lever rearward to full up position, which captures the hitch and raises it to the top of its range.

NOTE: Steps 1-7 allow the modules to establish the limits of the rockshaft and quadrant sensors, (0-99).

EDC Valve Calibration

1. To calibrate the 3-point hitch valve select mode

11 by: a. holding the set up select switch, 1,

(approximately 3 seconds) until a “beep” is head from the alarm. The TPM display will indicate --- 1, 2, which means the EIC is at mode 1.

2

3

4

109

110 b. using the “DIGIT SET” switch, 1, (up arrow) advance to mode 11.

c. enter mode 11 by holding the SET/UP

SELECT switch, 2, (approximately 3 seconds) until a “beep” is heard.

1 2

111

3-64

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

2. When “H1” appears, 1, advance to “H6” using the

SET UP/SELECT switch, 2.

1

The “H6” calibration status, 1, should be “0” indicating the system is OK for valve calibration.

NOTE: If “0” does not appear in “H6” the system will not calibrate. If “H6” indicates any other value exit mode 11 and repeat the Pre Steps then verify system status.

3. Exit mode 11 by depressing the E/M switch, 2, once to display hitch position.

4. Lower the hitch below the 3-point hitch position display of 60, then raise it above 60 but less than

90. You will observe the hitch moving slightly at this time. It will cycle up and down about one position count to find valve raise and lower thresholds.

NOTE: The hitch will cycle up/down three or more times until three cycles are verified by the microcontroller. This will take several minutes.

5. While the hitch is cycling up and down, enter mode 11 and index to “H6”. The “H6” calibration status should still be “0” indicating the system is

OK for calibration.

When three cycles are verified by the microcontroller, the status will change from “0” to “9”,1, showing the system performed 3 calibration cycles.

6. Exit mode 11 by depressing the E/M switch, 2, twice and return to “NORMAL” display. Move the quadrant to full up (“99” will be on the TPM display). Then move the quadrant to full down

(“0” will be on the TPM display) and there should be no chrome showing on the lift cylinders.

7. The 3-point hitch calibration is now complete.

6

11

6

9

2

112

2

113

2

114

3-65

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 66

BLEED THE FUEL SYSTEM

To bleed the fuel system use the following procedure:

1. Loosen fuel line (1) at the injection pump.

2. Operate fuel lift pump piston (2) by hand until the fuel escaping is free from air bubbles.

3. Retighten fuel line (1) when fuel free of air bubbles escapes.

4. Continue pumping until the force needed remains more or less constant. This allows the fuel to be drawn into the injection pump.

5. Start the engine.

6. Run the engine at low idle until the engine runs smoothly.

IMPORTANT: Check the bleed screw after the engine starts to ensure there are no fuel leaks. Do not crank the starter continually for more than 30 seconds at a time. Let the starter cool for two minutes between attempts.Injection System Bleeding

It may be necessary after injection pump removal or injector removal to purge the high pressure lines of air to allow the engine to start.

Injection System Bleeding

If the engine fails to start after several turns bleed the system using the following procedure:

1. “Crack” open in turn, starting at injector number 1, the nut (1) of each high pressure lines. Crank the engine on the starter motor to expel the air. With the aid of an assistant, tighten the injector nuts as the engine begins to fire.

CAUTION

Diesel fuel in the injection system is under high pressure and can penetrate the skin. Always wear protective gloves, safety glasses and clothing when working on the fuel injection system. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury. If fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention immediately or gangrene may result.

1

2

115

116

3-66

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 67

FUSE REPLACEMENT

Power is distributed from the battery to the main fuse panel, 1, to the main distribution panel, 2, and to the individual circuits.

2

Automotive-style block fuses are used to protect circuits from overload.

IMPORTANT: Locate and correct the cause of a blown fuse. DO NOT replace a blown fuse with another of a different rating than specified.

IMPORTANT: Be sure the key switch is in the “Off” position when replacing a fuse.

1

Main Fuse Panel (MFP)

The main fuse panel, 1, is located at the base of the right-hand console. To gain access to the fuses, release the tabs, 2, and remove the cover, 3.

117

118

3-67

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

The main fuse panel has eight fuse locations.

Refer to the table for fuse information and to identify the circuit each protects.

Fuse

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Rating Color

40A

60A

Orange

Red

Circuit

Main electrohydraulic fuse

Main fuse I

40A

50A

50A

40A

40A

40A

Orange Main transmission fuse

Red

Red

Main road lamp fuse

Main work lamp fuse

Orange Main accessory fuse

Orange Main fuse II

Orange Main implement socket fuse

Main fuse locations

119

3-68

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL

The main distribution panel is located behind the cover, 1, on the right-hand “B” pillar. To gain access to the panel, release the latches, 2, and remove the cover.

The panel has thirty-two (32) fuse locations and twenty (20) relay locations.

Refer to the table for fuse and relay information including the circuit each controls.

RELAYS

Relay

No.

Circuit

M1 Lower front and side work lamps

M2 Lower cab rear work lamps

M3 Upper cab rear work lamps

M4 Upper cab front work lamps

M5 Power take-off

M6 Transmission directional interrupt

M7 Brakes

M8 Cold start

M9 Accessory

M10 Auxiliary power #2

M11 Transmission power

M12 Auxiliary power #1

M13 Flasher module

M14 NASO/ISO turn signal, flasher converter module

M15 NASO/ISO turn signal, flasher converter module

M16 Fuel solenoid - engine power

M17 Implement power

M18 Remote valve electro-hydraulics

M19 Right hand trailer lights

M20 Left hand trailer lights

M21 Signal light relay

M22 Signal light relay

M23 Signal light relay

M24 Signal light relay

3-69

120

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

Fuse No.

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F26

F27

F28

F29

F30

F31

F32

F33

F34

F35

20A

15A

5A

5A

5A

10A

Rating

15A

20A

15A

15A

15A

5A

25A

15A

7.5A

15A

25A

15A

20A

20A

15A

10A

20A

7.5A

20A

5A

15A

15A

20A

10A

20A

5A

15A

10A

20A

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL

Yellow

Blue

Tan

Tan

Tan

Yellow

RED

Tan

Blue

Blue

Yellow

Red

Yellow

Tan

Blue

Red

Yellow

Color

Blue

Clear

Blue

Yellow

Yellow

Blue

Blue

Yellow

Blue

Blue

Blue

Tan

Clear

Blue

Brown

Red

Yellow

Brown

Yellow

Circuit

Monitor socket

Climate control

Washer/wiper

Front/Mid work lamps

Lower cab rear work lamps

Upper cab rear work lamps

Upper cab front work lamps

Trailer plug aux power

Park lamp

Brake lamp

Cigar/horn/beacon

Dome lamp

Road Lamp

Hazard lamp

Movable console

Accessory Socket

Seat

Radio Power

Transmission shift control solenoids fuse #1

Transmission shift control solenoids fuse #2

RH console trans/PTO solenoid

ECU Power

RH console

Front console

Control module switches power (VPWR)

VCU power

Turn signal

Road lamp high beam

Main fuse--electronic engine

Ignition switch

Cold Start

Unswitched power direct from battery (KAPWR)

Road Lamp low beam

Remote valve electrohydraulic

Trailer plug light power

20001346

121

3-70

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 68

REPLACE HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY BULBS

IMPORTANT: All headlights have halogen bulbs.

Never touch a halogen bulb with your fingers. Natural oil in the skin may cause the bulb to fail prematurely.

Always use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen bulbs.

To replace a bulb:

1. Disconnect the wire harness connector, 1, from the bulb assembly, 2.

2. Rotate the bulb assembly, 2, counterclockwise until it disengages from the housing, 3.

3. Remove the bulb assembly.

4. Install the new bulb assembly in the housing.

5. Rotate clockwise until the bulb assembly locks in the housing.

6. Connect the wire harness connector.

7. If more than one bulb assembly was replaced, check operation of lights with light switch to ensure harness was reconnected correctly.

OPERATION 69

REPLACE WORK SEALED BEAM UNITS

1. Remove the retaining screws, 1.

2. Pull the beam unit, 2, from the case, 3.

3. Disconnect the connectors, 4.

4. Connect the new beam unit to the connectors.

5. Install the new beam unit into the case.

6. Install the retaining screws.

122

123

3-71

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 70

REPLACE THE FENDER MOUNTED TURN

SIGNAL AND STOP LIGHT/ PARKING

LIGHT BULBS

The turn signal bulbs, 3, are behind the amber lenses. The stop light and parking light bulbs, 2, are behind the red lenses on the rear fenders.

To replace the bulbs:

1. Remove the retaining screws, 1.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the failed bulb by pressing the bulb in and turning it counterclockwise.

4. Install a new bulb by pushing the bulb in and turning it clockwise until it locks in place.

5. Replace the lens and tighten the retaining screws, while being careful to fit lens properly into the rubber gasket base.

OPERATION 71

REPLACE ROOF MOUNTED TURN SIGNAL

BULBS

To replace the bulb:

1. Remove the retaining screws, 1, then remove the lens, 2.

2. Remove the bulb, 3, by pressing the bulb in and turning it counterclockwise.

3. Install a new bulb by pushing the bulb in and turning it clockwise until it locks in place.

4. Replace the lens and tighten the two screws.

IMPORTANT: When replacing the lens, do not overtighten the retaining screws.

NOTE: The lens must fit inside the rubber seal, 4, to ensure a waterproof fit.

124

125

3-72

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 72

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

(EIC) BULB REPLACEMENT

To replace a bulb:

1. Loosen the two retaining screws, 1, then pull the

EIC away from the dash.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector, 1, and ground wire, 2, from the rear of the EIC.

3. Remove the rear cover retaining screws, 3, and remove the rear cover.

126

127

4. Remove the failed bulb assembly, 1, by rotating

1/4 turn counterclockwise with a small screwdriver. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the rear cover.

6. Install the electrical connector and ground wire.

7. Install the EIC in the dash and tighten the two retaining screws.

128

3-73

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 73

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

PREPARATION FOR TRACTOR STORAGE

Before storing the tractor at the end of the season or for an extended period, the following precautions should be taken:

8. Raise the tractor and place supports under the axles to take the weight off the tires.

9. Cover the exhaust pipe opening.

OPERATION 74

PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR USE

AFTER STORAGE

Before placing the tractor in service after an extended storage period, perform the following:

1. Clean the tractor.

2. Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and refill with clean oil.

3. Drain the fuel tanks and pour approximately two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the tank.

Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to ensure complete distribution of the calibrating fuel throughout the injection system. See the next item before running the engine.

4. Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush and refill the system. Run the engine for one hour to disperse the coolant throughout the system.

5. Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position

Control, raise the lift linkage and support the lift arms in the raised position.

6. Lubricate all grease fittings and lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder rams, lift rams, spool valves, etc.

7. Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry place. Recharge periodically to a minimum of

12.6 volts. Do not allow voltage to fall below 12.4

volts.

NOTE: Do not store the tractor for more than 30 days with the batteries connected. The normal key-off current drain of the electrical system modules will completely discharge the batteries. This can cause permanent battery damage. If the batteries are left connected during storage, charge the batteries daily using a low-rate charger connected to a timer. For short term tractor sotrage, removal of the 5 aMP KAM

(Keep Alive Memory) fuse will minimize key off cuurent draw. This will result in loss of radio accessory memory requiring the clock and channel tuner buttons to be reprogrammed. For short term tractor storage, removal of the 5 AMP KAM (Keep

Alive Memory) fuse will minimize key off current draw. This will result in loss of radio/accessory memory requiring the radio clock and channel tuner features to be reprogrammed.

1. Inflate the tires to the correct pressure and lower the tractor to the ground.

2. Refill the fuel tanks.

3. Check the radiator coolant level.

4. Check all oil levels.

5. Install fully charged batteries.

6. Remove the exhaust pipe covering.

7. Prime the engine oil system as detailed in steps

9 through 12 of “Operation 31.”

IMPORTANT: Priming the engine oil system provides lubrication to the turbocharger and engine before starting which will extend engine life.

8. Start the engine and check that all instruments and controls function correctly. Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, fully raise the lift linkage and remove the supports.

9. Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it is operating satisfactorily.

3-74

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING AND FAULT FINDING

INTRODUCTION

The following information is intended as a guide to assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor malfunctions and fault conditions.

Information is divided into three headings:

OPERATOR PROMPTS

FAULT CODES

SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

OPERATOR PROMPTS

Operator prompts, 1, indicate that an operational procedure has been performed out of sequence.

The “prompts” are meant to advise the operator to take correct action.

The following flashing prompts will be displayed on the Electronic Instrument Cluster (EIC) gear shift display.

70-550-357

PROMPT

F

R

P d

U

CAUSE CORRECTION

Gear shift lever in forward while starting Return shift lever to neutral

Gear shift lever in reverse while starting Return shift lever to neutral

Park brake applied when gear selected Return shift lever to neutral and release park brake

Gear shift lever in downshift when starting Return shift lever to neutral

Gear shift lever in up shift while starting Return shift lever to neutral

1

4-1

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

FAULT CODES

A fault code indicates that there has been a malfunction in the tractor electrical system. During normal operation, the READ YOUR MANUAL symbol, 1, will be displayed in the tractor performance monitor (TPM) if a fault has occurred.

Fault codes can be retrieved and view using the procedure detailed in “Electronic Instrument Cluster

- Operator Calibration” section.

Fault codes, 2, will be displayed as a flashing three digit number preceded by the letter “F”. The code will identify the circuit in which the malfunction has occurred, along with the type of malfunction such as short circuit, open circuit, etc.

The following chart identifies the system that corresponds to the range of fault code numbers.

70-550-358

NOTE: Not all numbers in a range are used.

Contact your authorized dealer for assistance in correcting a fault code.

FAULT CODE

NUMBERS SYSTEM

F000-F099 Electronic Draft Control

F100-F199 Right-hand Controls

F200-F299 Electronic Instrument

Cluster

F300-F399 Electronic Transmission

Control

F400-F499 Engine

2

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

The following information lists possible problems, their cause and corrective action. The systems are listed as follows:

ENGINE

TRANSMISSION

ELECTRICAL

HYDRAULIC

3-POINT HITCH

BRAKES

CAB

4-2

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

ENGINE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE

Engine will not start, or starts hard Incorrect starting procedure

Low or no fuel

Air in fuel lines

Incorrect engine oil viscosity

Incorrect fuel for operating temperature

Contaminated fuel system

Clogged sedimenter

Engine runs rough and/or stalls

Clogged fuel filter

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s)

Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or solenoid relay

Clogged sedimenter or fuel filter

CORRECTION

Review starting procedures

Check fuel level

Bleed fuel system

Use correct viscosity oil

Use correct type fuel for temperature conditions

Clean system

Clean sedimenter

Replace filter element

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

Engine does not develop full power

Contaminated fuel system

Fuel solenoid not properly adjusted

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s)

Engine overloaded

Air cleaner restricted

Clogged sedimenter or fuel filter

Incorrect type of fuel

Engine overheated

Low engine operating temperature

Implement incorrectly adjusted

Incorrect valve clearance

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s)

High idle speed is low

Clean sedimenter and replace filter

Clean system

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

Shift to lower gear or reduce load

Service air cleaner

Clean sedimenter and replace filter

Use correct fuel

See Engine Overheats

Check thermostats

See implement operator’s manual

Check and adjust

Have authorized dealer check injectors

See your authorized dealer

4-3

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEM

Engine knocks operating

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Low oil level

Low oil pressure

Engine overheated

Malfunctioning thermostat(s) Low engine temperature

Low oil pressure

Excessive oil consumption

Engine overheats

Excessive fuel consumption

CORRECTION

Add correct grade of oil

See your authorized dealer

See Engine Overheats

Replace thermostat(s)

Low oil level

Wrong grade or viscosity oil

Engine oil level too high

Incorrect viscosity oil

External oil leaks

Plugged breather tube vent filter

Dirty radiator core

Excessive engine load

Low engine oil level

Low coolant level

Faulty radiator cap

Loose or worn fan belt

Add oil as required

Drain and refill with correct grade and viscosity oil

Drain and specifications replace per

Reduce oil level

Use correct viscosity

Repair leaks

Replace vent filter

Clean

Shift to a lower gear or reduce load

Add oil as required.

Fill coolant recovery tank. Check cooling system for leaks.

Replace cap

Check automatic tensioner.

Replace belt if worn

Flush cooling system

Check thermostats

Tighten hose connection

See your authorized dealer

Cooling system plugged

Malfunctioning thermostat(s)

Hose connection leaking

Malfunctioning temperature gauge or sender

Incorrect type of fuel

Clogged or dirty air cleaner

Engine overloaded

Incorrect valve clearance

Implement incorrectly adjusted

Low engine temperature

Excessive ballast

Fuel injection nozzles dirty

Use correct fuel

Service air cleaner

Shift to lower gear or reduce load

Check and adjust

See implement operator’s manual for proper operation

Check thermostats

Adjust ballast to current load

Have authorized dealer service the injectors

4-4

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

TRANSMISSION

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE

Tractor won’t move after starting Flashing “F” “R”

“P” “U” or “d”

Transmission operation performed out of sequence

Poor inching control when using inching pedal

Transmission clutches out of calibration

Transmission will not operate

Low transmission oil pressure

Fault code displayed indicating malfunction

Low oil supply

Clogged transmission oil filter

CORRECTION

Return shift control lever to neutral and release parking brake. See

“Operator Prompts.”

Recalibrate transmission clutches

F1, F2 and R

See “Fault Codes ON/OFF” and contact your authorized dealer

Fill system with oil

Replace filter

4-5

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Electrical system is inoperative

Starter speed low and engine cranks slowly

Starter inoperative

Charge indicator lamp stays on with engine running

Batteries will not charge

Charge

PROBLEM indicating excessive charging voltage indicator flashing

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Loose or corroded battery connections

Sulfated batteries

CORRECTION

Clean and tighten connections

Loose or corroded connections

Low battery output

Incorrect viscosity engine oil

Transmission shift lever in gear

Loose or corroded connections

Dead batteries

Low engine idle speed

Loose belt

Malfunctioning battery(ies)

Malfunctioning alternator

Loose or corroded terminal connections

Sulfated batteries

Loose or worn belt

Malfunctioning alternator

Check battery open circuit voltage for 12.6 volts minimum. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.

See battery storage, page 3-74

Clean and tighten loose connections

Check battery open circuit voltage for 12.6 volts minimum. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.

See battery storage, page 3-74

Use correct viscosity oil for temperature conditions

Place shift lever in neutral

Clean and tighten loose connections

Charge or replace batteries.

Increase idle speed

Check automatic belt tensioner

Check battery open circuit voltage for 12.6 volts minimum. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.

Have authorized dealer check alternator

Clean and tighten connections

Check battery open circuit voltage for 12.6 volts minimum. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.

See battery storage, page 3-74

Check automatic belt tensioner.

Replace belt if required.

Have authorized dealer check alternator

4-6

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

PROBLEM

Complete hydraulic system does not operate

Hydraulic oil overheats

Hoses will not couple

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Low oil level

Restricted hydraulic filter

Restricted charge pump suction screen

Blown fuse - bad relay

Malfunctioning hydraulic system

Oil level low or high

Oil cooler or radiator plugged

Blocked oil filter element

CORRECTION

Fill system

Replace hydraulic filter

Clean screen

Replace fuses and or relay

See your authorized dealer

Adjust oil level

Clean oil cooler and radiator

Replace filter

Flow control improperly adjusted Adjust flow control to lower flow position

Hydraulic load or orbit motor not matched to tractor

Incorrect male connectors

See your authorized dealer

Replace connectors with ISO-

(1/2″) standard connectors available from your authorized dealer

Flow control not properly adjusted Adjust flow control Remote attachment operates too fast or too slow

Remote attachment does not operate

No power to EHR system Ensure power switch is on (raised) position: see engagement switch page 2--79

See your authorized dealer Fuse Blown

Hoses not completely connected

Flow checking in couplers

Load exceed system capacity

Attach hoses correctly

Cycle remote switches. If problem persists replace male couplers.

Reduce load or use correct size cylinder

4-7

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

3-POINT HITCH

PROBLEM

Hitch does not move when control lever is moved

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Hitch not in phase with control lever

Work/raise switch in raise position

Malfunction in lever position or hitch position sensor

Excessive load on hitch

Height limit control not properly adjusted

Work/raise switch in raise position Rear fender raise/lower switches do not function

Hitch does not fully raise

Control lever not positioned full forward

Upper height limit control not correctly set

Hitch drops slowly Drop rate control not properly adjusted

Hitch slow to respond to draft load Position/draft mix control not properly adjusted

CORRECTION

Capture the hitch

Position switch in the work position

See your authorized dealer

Reduce load

Adjust upper height limit control

Position switch in the work position

Push lever full forward

Adjust height limit control

Adjust drop control

Adjust position/draft mix control

Drop rate too slow Adjust drop rate control

Implement not working properly

Hitch over responsive to draft load Position/draft mix control not properly adjusted

Hitch status light flashes continually

See implement operator’s manual

Adjust position/draft mix control

Malfunctioning hitch component(s) See “Fault Codes ON/OFF” and your authorized dealer

4-8

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

BRAKES

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE

Spongy pedal with engine stopped Air in system

Pedal bottoms with engine stopped

Brake piston seal leaking

Worn brake, discs

Brake bleeder not sealing

Excessive pedal travel or kickback with engine running

Leakage in brake valve(s)

Leakage in brake valve

Air in system

Brake piston seal leaking

Brake bleeder not sealing

CORRECTION

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

See your authorized dealer

4-9

PROBLEM

Dust enters the cab

Pressurizer air flow low

Air conditioner does not cool

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

CAB

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Improper seal around filter element

Plugged filter

Defective filter

Excessive air leak(s)

Plugged filter or plugged recirculation filter

Heater core or evaporator core plugged

Condenser plugged

Low refrigerant

Belt slipping or damaged

Heater control turned on

CORRECTION

Check seal condition

Clean or replace filter

Replace filter

Seal air leak(s)

Clean or replace filter(s)

See your authorized dealer

Clean radiator, oil cooler, and condenser

Check sight glass for bubbles.

Contact your authorized dealer.

Check automatic belt tensioner and belt condition

Turn temperature control knob fully counterclockwise for maximum cooling

4-10

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

The specifications on the following pages are given for your information and guidance. For further information concerning the tractor consult your authorized dealer.

Our policy is one of continuous improvement, and the right to change prices, specifications or equipment at any time without notice is reserved.

All data given in this book is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are approximate only. For exact information about any particular tractor, please consult your authorized dealer.

5-1

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

(Two wheel drive)

2145 2160 2180 2210

Height to the Top of Cab mm

(in)

Height to the Top of Exhaust mm

(in)

Minimum Width mm

(in)

Minimum Ground Clearance

Drawbar

Front Axle mm

(in) mm

(in)

Track Setting

Front Axle Minimum

Front Axle Maximum

Rear Axle Minimum mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in)

3080

(121.3)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

507

(19.9)

1575

(62)

2210

(87)

1530

(60.3)

3080

(121.3)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

507

(19.9)

1575

(62)

2210

(87)

1530

(60.3)

3080

(121.3)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

507

(19.9)

1575

(62)

2210

(87)

1530

(60.3)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Rear Axle Maximum

(96″) Hub Out

(112″) Hub Out

(120″) Hub Out mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in)

2738

(107.8)

3144

(123.8)

2639

(103.9)

3046

(119.9)

3251

(128.0)

2639

(103.9)

3046

(119.9)

3251

(128.0)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Overall Length to the

End of Lower Links

Unballasted

Ballasted

- Small Weights

- Large Weights mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

To Edge of Rear Tire

- Large Weights

Wheelbase: Standard

Turning Ratio mm

(in) mm

(in)

3005

(118.3)

2375

(93.5)

3005

(118.3)

2375

(93.5)

3005

(118.3)

2375

(93.5)

N/A

N/A

2375

(93.5)

NOTE: The above dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with the tire sizes as shown:

Front - 2WD 14L - 16.1

14L - 16.1

14L - 16.1

N/A

N/A

N/A)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Rear 480/80R42

(18.4R42)

480/80R42

(18.4R42)

480/80R42

(18.4R42)

N/A

5-2

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

(Four wheel drive)

Height to the Top of Cab

2145 2160 2180 2210 mm

(in)

3080

(121.3)

3080

(121.3)

3080

(121.3)

3080

(121.3)

Height to the Top of Exhaust mm

(in)

Minimum Width mm

(in)

Minimum Ground Clearance

Drawbar

Front Axle mm

(in) mm

(in)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

432

(17)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

432

(17)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

432

(17)

3159

(124.4)

2456

(96.7)

471

(18.6)

432

(17)

Track Setting

Front Axle Minimum

Front Axle Maximum

Rear Axle Minimum mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in)

1525

(60.0)

2235

(88)

1530

(60.3)

1525

(60.0)

2235

(88)

1530

(60.3)

1525

(60.0)

2235

(88)

1530

(60.3)

1525

(60.0)

2235

(88)

1530

(60.3)

Rear Axle Maximum

(112″) Hub Out

(120″) Hub Out mm

(in) mm

(in)

3144

(123.8)

3046

(119.9)

3251

(128.0)

3046

(119.9)

3251

(128.0)

3046

(119.9)

3251

(128.0)

Overall Length to End of Lower Links

Unballasted

Ballasted

- Small Weights

- Large Weights

To Edge of Rear Tire

- Large Weights

Wheelbase:

Standard Steer mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

4997

(196.7)

5396

(212.4)

5639

(222.0)

5273

(207.6)

UltraSteer mm

(in) mm

(in)

3005

(118.3)

3115

(122.6)

3005

(118.3)

3115

(122.6)

3005

(118.3)

3115

(122.6)

3005

(118.3)

3115

(122.6)

Turning radius:

Standard

Without Brakes

UltraSteer

Without Brakes

Rear mm

(in) mm

(in)

3353

(132)

2134

(84)

480/80R42

(18.4R42)

3353

(132)

2134

(84)

2134

(84)

2134

(84)

NOTE: The above dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with the tire sizes as shown:

Front - 4WD 16.9R28

16.9R28

16.9R28

16.9R28

480/80R42

(18.4R42)

3353

(132)

480/80R42

(18.4R42)

3353

(132)

480/80R42

(18.4R42)

5-3

WEIGHT

(Two wheel drive)

Total with Fuel, Oil and Coolant kg

(lbs)

On Front Axle kg

(lbs)

On Rear Axle kg

(lbs)

WEIGHT

(Four wheel drive STD)

Total with Fuel, Oil and Coolant kg

(lbs)

On Front Axle kg

(lbs)

On Rear Axle kg

(lbs)

WEIGHT

(Four wheel drive UltraSteer)

Total with Fuel, Oil and Coolant kg

(lbs)

On Front Axle kg

(lbs)

On Rear Axle kg

(lbs)

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

2145 2160

7180

(15829)

2080

(4586)

5100

(11244)

8140

(17946)

2934

(6468)

5206

(11477)

8312

(18325)

3106

(6848)

5206

(11477)

7858

(17324)

2235

(4927)

5623

(12397)

8818

(19440)

3089

(6810)

5729

(12630)

8990

(19820)

3261

(7189)

5729

(12630)

2180

7858

(17324)

2235

(4927)

5623

(12397)

8818

(19440)

3089

(6810)

5729

(12630)

2210

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

8818

(19440)

3089

(6810)

5729

(12630)

8990

(19820)

3261

(7189)

5729

(12630)

8990

(19820)

3261

(7189)

5729

(12630)

Additional Factory or Dealer Installed Accessories

(Hydraulic Components)

Add 4th Remote Valve

Delete Electronic Draft Control

Delete 3-Point Hitch

HydraFlow Plus Ready

HydraFlow Plus Equipped

(Axle and Drive Components)

(112″) Axles

(120″) Axles

Front Weight Bracket L/UltraSteer

Front Weight Bracket W/UltrarSteer

Front Weight Package 12X40 kg (12x88 lbs)

Front Weight Package 22X40 kg (22x88 lbs)

Front Weight Package 16X110 kg (16x242 lbs)

Rear Weight Package 10X39 kg (10x85 lbs)

Rear Weight Package 2X225 kg (2x450 lbs)

Front Fenders

Duals and Hubs kg

9.07

-7.25

-376.5

27.2

47.6

kg

26.3

34.0

97.0

95.7

499.8

914

1747

395.9

413.6

39.0

(lbs)

(20)

(-16)

(-830)

(60)

(105)

(lbs)

(58)

(75)

(214)

(211)

(1102)

(2015)

(3853)

(873)

(912)

(86)

(2000)

NOTE: The above weights are based on the standard build units and should be used as a guide only.

5-4

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

2145 2160

ENGINE

Max Power at Rated Speed PTO HP

(Din HP)

Rated Speed RPM

PTO Speed at Rated Speed RPM

Low Idle Speed

High Idle Speed

RPM ± 25

RPM ± 25

Aspiration

Intercooled

Number of Cylinders

Bore

Stroke

Displacement mm

(in) mm

(in)

L

(in 3)

Compression Ratio

Firing order

Valve Tappet Clearance (cold)

Intake

Exhaust mm

(in) mm

(in)

145

(170)

2100

1103

900

2285

Turbo

Yes

6

112

(4.4)

127

(5.0)

7.5

(456)

17.5:1

153624

0.406

(0.016)

0.483

(0.019)

0.406

(0.016)

0.483

(0.019)

160

(190)

2100

1103

900

2285

Turbo

Yes

6

112

(4.4)

127

(5.0)

7.5

(456)

17.5:1

153624

2180

180

(210)

2100

1103

900

2285

Turbo

Yes

6

112

(4.4)

127

(5.0)

7.5

(456)

17.5:1

153624

0.406

(0.016)

0.483

(0.019)

2210

210

(240)

2100

1103

900

2285

Turbo

Yes

6

112

(4.4)

127

(5.0)

7.5

(456)

17.5:1

153624

0.406

(0.016)

0.483

(0.019)

FUEL SYSTEM

Injection Pump Type (Inline)

Timing BTDC

Injector Cracking Pressure

Degrees bar

(PSI)

Fuel Cooler

Bosch

P 3000

0

300

(4400)

No

Bosch

P 3000

0

300

(4400)

No

Bosch

P 3000

0

300

(4400)

Yes

Bosch

P 3000

0

300

(4400)

Yes

5-5

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

2145 2160

COOLING SYSTEM

Type

Thermostats

Begin to Open

Fully Open

Radiator Pressure Cap

°C

(°F)

°C

(°F) bar

(PSI)

Viscous Fan

Number of Blades

Fan Diameter mm

(in)

TRANSMISSION

Type

POWER TAKE-OFF

Type

Engine Speed for 540 RPM

PTO Speed

ERPM

Engine Speed for 1000 RPM ERPM

PTO Speed

DRAWBAR

Drawbar pin dia

Drawbar clevis throat mm

(in)

Distance from hitch point to PTO shaft

Rear drawbar hole

Center drawbar hole

Forward drawbar hole mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in) mm

(in)

1880

1900

38

(1.5)

92

(3.6)

355

(14)

406

(16)

508

(20)

38

(1.5)

92

(3.6)

406

(16)

508

(20)

609

(24)

2180

Pressurized with full flow bypass, recovery tank and filter with conditioner

2 2 2 2

81

(178)

95

(203)

0.9

(13)

Yes

8

686

(27)

81

(178)

95

(203)

0.9

(13)

Yes

8

686

(27)

81

(178)

95

(203)

0.9

(13)

Yes

8

686

(27)

18x9 Powershift with power shuttle

Independent PTO

NA

1900

NA

1900

38)

(1.5)

92

(3.6)

406

(16)

508

(20)

609

(24)

2210

81

(178)

NA

1900

38

(1.5)

92

(3.6)

406

(16)

508

(20)

609

(24)

95

(203)

0.9

(13)

Yes

8

686

(27)

5-6

Maximum Static Downward Load

Rear drawbar hole

Center drawbar hole

Forward drawbar hole kg

(lbs) kg

(lbs) kg

(lbs)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Type

Nominal System Pressure

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

2145 2160 bar ± 3.0

(PSI ± 50)

200

(2900)

2180

Closed center load sensing (CCLS)

200

(2900)

200

(2900)

Variable displacement axial piston pump Hydraulic Pump

Flow at Rated Engine Speed

Standard

2449

(5400)

2086

(4600)

1587

(3500)

2750

(6000)

2131

(4700)

1770

(3900)

2750

(6000)

2131

(4700)

1770

(3900)

HydraFlow Plus (option)

L/min 117

(US gal/min) (31.0)

L/min 208

(US gal/min) (55.0)

117

(31.0)

208

(55.0)

117

(31.0)

208

(55.0)

Remote Control Valves

Max Flow Capacity at

One Coupler

Standard Pump

HydraFlow Plus Pump

L/min ± 8 102

(US gal/min± 2) (27)

L/min ± 8 102

(US gal/min± 2) (27)

102

(27)

102

(27)

102

(27)

102

(27)

200

(2900)

117

(31.0)

208

(55.0)

102

(27))

102

(27)

2210

2750

(6000)

2131

(4700)

1770

(3900)

THREE-POINT LIFT

Linkage

Category Adaptor

Lift Capacity kg

(lbs)

Cat III

Yes

5670

(12500)

Cat III

Yes

5670

(12500)

Cat III

Yes

5670

(12500)

Cat III

Yes

6804

(15000)

BRAKES

Type

Disc Diameter OD-ID

No. of Discs (total)

Self Adjusting

Parking Brake mm

(in)

Inboard wet

368 - 305

4 yes

Inboard wet

368 - 305

(14.5 - 12.0) (14.5 - 12.0) (14.5 - 12.0) (14.5 - 12.0)

4 yes

Inboard wet

368 - 305

4 yes

Rear axle - oil immersed 3 disc

Inboard wet

368 - 305

4 yes

5-7

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

2145 2160 2180 2210

STEERING

Type

Maximum Pressure

Two Wheel Drive

Maximum Pressure

Four Wheel Drive

Front Wheel Toe-in

Two Wheel Drive

Four Wheel Drive

Hydrostatic with tilt and telescopic steering wheel bar +7/-0 172

(PSI +100/-0) (2500)

172

(2500)

172

(2500)

N/A

N/A bar ±+7/-0 186

(PSI +100/-0) (2700)

186

(2700)

186

(2700)

186

(2700) mm

(in) mm

(in)

6.3 - 12.7

(0.25 - 0.5)

0.0 - 6.3

(0.0 - 0.25)

6.3 - 12.7

(0.25 - 0.5)

0.0 - 6.3

(0.0 - 0.25)

6.3 - 12.7

(0.25 - 0.5)

0.0 - 6.3

(0.0 - 0.25)

N/A

N/A

0.0 - 6.3

(0.0 - 0.25)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Batteries Required

CCA Rating

Alternator Heavy-Duty

Starter Motor

MAXIMUM TRACTOR OPERATING ANGLE

Front End Up

Rear End Up

Right Side Up

Left Side Up

25

25

25

25

2

950

2

950

2

950

12v - 130 amp

Positive engagement, solenoid operated

6.0 HP (4.5 kw)

2

950

25

25

25

25

DEGREES

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

5-8

CAPACITIES

Main Fuel Tank

Auxiliary Fuel Tank

Total Fuel Capacity

L

(US gal)

L

(US gal)

L

(US gal)

Cooling System

Engine Oil (with filter)

Four Wheel Drive Front Hubs

(amount shown is for one hub only)

L

(US qts)

Four Wheel Drive Differential Case

L

(US qts)

Transmission/*

Rear Axle/

Hydraulic System

L

(US gal)

L

(US gal)

L

(US gal)

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

2145 2160

246

(65)

170

(45)

416

(110)

25

(6.6)

21.0

(5.5)

5

(5.3)

14.5

(15.3)

117

(30.9)

5

(5.3)

14.5

(15.3)

140

(36.9)

246

(65)

170

(45)

416

(110)

25

(6.6)

21.0

(5.5)

2180

246

(65)

170

(45)

416

(110)

26.4

(7)

21.0

(5.5)

5

(5.3)

14.5

(15.3)

2210

246

(65)

170

(45)

416

(110)

26.4

(7)

21.0

(5.5)

5

(5.3)

14.5

(15.3)

140

(36.9)

140

(36.9)

NOTE: When operating remote cylinders, the rear axle oil level will be affected. When topping up the rear axle to accommodate the oil requirement of remote cylinders, no more than 38 liters (10 US gallons) should be added to bring the oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick when all rams are fully extended.

Remote cylinders with a total oil capacity of up to 23 liters (6 US gallons) may be connected to the tractor hydraulic system without adding oil, provided the tractor is being operated on level ground.

*NOTE: Normal oil change capacities may be 19-23 liters (5-6 gallons) less than these factory fill capacities. This difference is that oil remains in hydraulic tubes, passages and wet areas within the transmission and rear axle center sections.

LUBRICANTS

Area

Four Wheel Drive Differential

Four Wheel Drive Front Hubs

Front Wheel Bearings (2 WD) and

Front Hub Swivel Bearings (4 WD)

Lubrication Fittings

Transmission/Rear Axle

Engine

Specification

All season ag. transmission Hydraulic oil----See NOTE below

All season ag. transmission Hydraulic oil----See NOTE below

Lithium Base EP High Temperature with moly

Lithium Base EP High Temperature with moly

All season agricultural transmission Hydraulic oil----See NOTE below

API CF-4

5-9

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:

Lubricant brand equivalency chart for all season agricultural transmission hydraulic oil:

BRAND Imperial Oil Shell

Esso

SPECIFICATION Hydraul 56 Donax TD

Texaco

TDH

Amoco

2016 (USA)

01055 (Can)

Petro--

Canada

Duratran

Exxon Mobil

424

ENGINE LUBRICANT

It is recommended that an oil which meets API service category CF-4 (preferred), CF-4/SF or CF-4/SG be used.

If API CF-4 oils are not available, the API CE or CE/SF or CE/SG category may be used. For low temperatures

-18° C (below 0° F), an SAE 5W-30 SG/CD may be used.

NOTE : Engines are filled with 10W-30 oil at the factory. The oil should be changed after the first 50 hours of operation.

Selecting the Right Viscosity for Your Climate

To choose the right viscosity grade, you must consider the temperature in which you will operate your vehicle.

If you regularly operate in temperatures that are consistently above -12° C (10° F), use SAE 15W-40 oil. If you regularly operate in temperatures that are below -18° C (0° F), use SAE 5W30 and change oil and filter every

150 hours. Select the proper viscosity grade to correspond with the ambient temperature range shown in the following chart.

IMPORTANT: Using oil quality and/or viscosity grades other than those recommended may result in engine damage.

-25° C

<

(-13° F)

SAE 5W-30

-18° C

<

(0° F)

-12° C

<

(10° F)

15° C

>

SAE 15W-40 (Perferred)

SAE 10W-30

(60° F)

>

>

OIL CHANGE INTERVAL

NOTE: Engines are filled with 10W-30 oil at the factory. The oil should be changed after the first 50 hours of operation.

The engine oil change interval is 300 hours under average operating conditions; however, locally available fuel may have a high sulphur content, in which case adjust the oil change period as follows:

Sulphur Content Oil Change Period

Below 0.5%

0.5 - 1.0%

1.0 - 1.3%

Normal

Half the normal

One quarter normal

The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is not recommended.

Engines operating in temperatures below -12° C (10° F) should have the oil and filter changed every 150 hours of operation.

5-10

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

DIESEL FUEL

Use a high quality number 1-D or number 2-D diesel fuel as listed in the chart.

Temperature

Below -7°C (20° F)

Above -7°C (20° F)

Fuel

No. 1-D

No. 2-D

Cetane

(min)

40*

40

Sulphur Content

(max)

0.30%

0.50%

* When continually operating at low temperatures or high altitude, a minimum cetane of 45 is required. Using diesel fuel with a sulphur content above 0.5% requires more frequent oil changes, as detailed in the “Engine Oil” section.

The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is not recommended.

NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather conditions below 0°C (32°F) are encountered or when continuously operating at an altitude above 1524 m (5,000 ft.) use number 1-D fuel.

ENGINE COOLANT

Use an engine coolant that contains Propylene Glycol or Ethylene Glycol. Mix with an equal amount of clean water.

Change coolant every 2400 hours or 24 months (whichever occurs first).

Change coolant filter every 1200 hours or 12 months (whichever occurs first).

NOTE: In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water used in the cooling system should not exceed the following limits:

Total hardness 300 parts per million

Chlorides 100 parts per million

Sulphates 100 parts per million

ROAD SPEEDS

The following charts show the road speeds for tractors fitted with 18.4 - 42 rear tires. If the rear tires of your tractor are of a different size, multiply the road speeds shown in the printed charts by the following conversion factors.

NOTE: For your convenience, a blank chart follows the printed charts so you may insert your own calculated road speeds.

Tire Size

Conversion Factor

14.9 - 46

0.998

18.4 - 46

1.056

20.8 - 38

0.984

20.8 - 42

1.041

710/70R38

1.032

EXAMPLE:

From the following table with 18.4 - 42 tires - locate the speed for gear ratio F16 at 2100 ERPM - A forward speed of 29.9 KPH (18.55 MPH) listed.

To calculate the speed with 14.9 x 46 rear tire for the same gear ratio and engine speed use the following formulas:

29.9 KPH (18.51 MPH) x 0.998 (conversion factor) = 29.9 KPH (18.51 MPH)

NOTE: To determine creeper speeds multiply the ground speed for each gear listed in the ground speed chart or calculated ground speed by 0.10.

Example: 0.10 x 1.98 KPH (1.23 MPH) = 0.198 kph (0.123 MPH)

5-11

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

GROUND SPEED: 2145 WITH 18X9 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION (18.4 - 42 TIRES)

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

F7

F8

F9

F10

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

REVERSE GEARS

R2

FORWARD GEARS

Gear Ratio

2.29

2.70

3.16

3.62

4.27

5.00

5.89

6.96

8.15

4.86

5.74

6.71

7.80

9.22

10.80

12.35

14.61

1500 engine RPM 1900 engine RPM 2100 engine RPM

KPH

1.88

(MPH)

(1.17)

KPH

2.38

(MPH)

(1.48)

KPH

2.64

(MPH)

(1.64)

2.23

2.60

(1.38)

(1.62)

2.82

3.29

(1.75)

(2.06)

3.11

3.65

(1.94)

(2.27)

2.99

3.53

4.13

(1.85)

(2.19)

(2.56)

3.78

4.47

5.23

(2.35)

(2.78)

(3.25)

4.18

4.94

5.77

(2.59)

(3.06)

(3.59)

17.09

20.12

23.78

27.82

(3.02)

(3.56)

(4.18)

(4.85)

(5.73)

(6.69)

(7.68)

(9.08)

(10.62)

(12.50)

(14.78)

(17.29)

6.16

7.27

8.51

9.88

11.68

13.67

15.65

18.50

21.65

25.49

30.12

35.24

(3.82)

(4.51)

(5.29)

(6.14)

(7.26)

(8.49)

6.80

8.04

9.40

10.92

12.91

15.11

(9.73) 17.30

(11.50) 20.45

(13.46)

(15.83)

(18.72)

(21.90)

23.93

28.17

33.29

38.95

(14.87)

(17.50)

(20.69)

(24.21)

(4.23)

(5.00)

(5.85)

(6.79)

(8.02)

(9.39)

(10.76)

(12.71)

(1.42)

(1.68)

(1.96)

(2.25)

(2.66)

(3.11)

(3.66)

(4.32)

(5.06)

2.89

3.42

4.01

4.58

5.42

6.34

7.46

8.82

10.32

(1.80)

(2.12)

(2.49)

(2.85)

(3.37)

(3.94)

(4.64)

(5.49)

(6.42)

3.20

3.78

4.42

5.06

5.98

7.00

8.25

9.75

11.40

(1.99)

(2.35)

(2.75)

(3.15)

(3.72)

(4.35)

(5.13)

(6.06)

(7.09)

Based on rear tire 480/80R42 (18.4 - 42) Rear Tires

Divide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: (10.609) to obtain creeper gear speeds.

5-12

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

GROUND SPEED: 2160, 2180 AND 2210 WITH 18X9 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION (18.4 - 42 TIRES)

F10

F11

F12

F13

F6

F7

F8

F9

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

REVERSE GEARS

R2

R3

FORWARD GEARS

Gear Ratio

2.31

2.73

3.19

3.66

4.32

5.06

5.96

7.04

8.23

4.17

4.91

5.80

6.79

7.89

9.32

10.91

12.50

1500 engine RPM 1900 engine RPM 2100 engine RPM

KPH

1.90

(MPH)

(1.18)

KPH

2.41

(MPH)

(1.50)

KPH

2.67

(MPH)

(1.66)

2.25

2.63

3.02

3.56

(1.40)

(1.63)

(1.87)

(2.22)

2.85

3.33

3.82

4.51

(1.77)

(2.07)

(2.37)

(2.80)

3.15

3.69

4.23

5.00

(1.96)

(2.30)

(2.62)

(3.10)

14.76

17.28

20.35

24.04

28.14

(2.59)

(3.05)

(3.60)

(4.22)

(4.90)

(5.79)

(6.78)

(7.77)

(9.18)

(10.74)

(12.64) 25.77

(14.95) 30.45

(17.48)

5.28

6.22

7.35

8.61

9.99

11.81

13.82

15.83

18.70

21.89

35.64

(3.29)

(3.87)

(4.57)

(5.35)

(6.21)

(7.34)

(8.59)

(9.84)

(11.63)

(13.60)

(22.14)

5.84

6.88

8.13

9.51

11.05

13.05

15.97

17.49

20.67

24.20

(16.01) 28.48

(18.93) 33.66

39.39

(12.85)

(15.03)

(17.70)

(20.92)

(24.48)

(3.63)

(4.27)

(5.05)

(5.91)

(6.86)

(8.11)

(9.49)

(10.87)

(1.43)

(1.70)

(1.99)

(2.28)

(2.69)

(3.14)

(3.70)

(4.37)

(5.12)

2.92

3.46

4.04

4.63

5.48

6.41

7.54

8.91

10.43

(1.82)

(2.15)

(2.52)

(2.88)

(3.40)

(3.99)

(4.69)

(5.54)

(6.48)

3.24

3.82

4.48

5.12

6.05

7.08

8.34

9.86

11.53

(2.01)

(2.37)

(2.78)

(3.18)

(3.77)

(4.40)

(5.19)

(6.13)

(7.17)

Based on rear tire 480/80R42 (18.4 - 42) Rear Tires

Divide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: (10.609) to obtain creeper gear speeds.

5-13

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

GROUND SPEED -- 18X9 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION

FORWARD GEARS

Gear Ratio 1500 engine RPM 1900 engine RPM 2100 engine RPM

KPH (MPH) KPH (MPH) KPH (MPH)

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F1

F2

F3

F4

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

REVERSE GEARS

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

TIRE SIZE

Divide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: (10.609) to obtain creeper gear speeds.

5-14

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TIRE COMBINATIONS

The tires fitted to tractors with optional four wheel drive have been carefully selected to match the gearing of the transmission and axles. When replacing worn or damaged tires, always install tires of the same make, model and size as those removed. The installation of other tire combinations may result in excessive tire wear, loss of useable power or severe damage to driveline components. If in doubt, consult your authorized dealer.

Radial Tire Identification

Radial tires are identified according to rating by a star code - either one star ( ), two stars ( ) or three stars ( ).

Tires with are inflated to a maximum of 1.2 bar or 18 PSI.

Tires with are inflated to a maximum of 1.6 bar or 24 PSI.

Tires with are inflated to a maximum of 2.0 bar or 30 PSI.

Refer to the identification panel on the side of the tire sidewall.

TIRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

IMPORTANT: The figures in the following charts are for guidance only. Tire specifications vary by tire manufacturer. For exact tire loading information, refer to the information provided by the manufacturer of the tires on the tractor.

To avoid the possibility of tire to rim creep, tire pressures below 0.40 bar (6 PSI) with radial tires and 0.80 bar

(12 PSI) with bias ply should not be used for operations having a high torque requirement, e.g., subsoiling, plowing, heavy cultivation, etc.

Tire loading figures in the following tables are for a single wheel. To determine the maximum tire loading for single wheel applications, multiply the load figure in the table by two, the total number of wheels on the axle.

Example:

Rear

2 wheels (singles) x table figure = Maximum tire load

To determine the maximum tire loading for units with duals, multiply the load figure in the table by the total number of wheels on the axle, then multiply by 88%.

Example:

Rear

4 wheels (models with duals) x table figure x 88%= Maximum tire load

Axle loading must be within the capacities listed in Section 3 of this manual.

Remember the information in the charts and the examples cited are for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and tractor loading, consult your authorized dealer or the tire manufacturer.

When front mounted implements are fitted, front tire loads may be increased by up to 35% with no increase in inflation pressure when operated at speeds not exceeding 20 KPH (12 MPH).

At speed not exceeding 8 KPH (5 MPH), the load on the front tires may be increased by 50% provided the inflation pressures are increased by 25%.

When mounted implements are used, rear tire loads may be increased by up to 20% with no increase in inflation pressure when operated at speeds not exceeding 20 KPH (12 MPH).

5-15

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-16

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-17

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-18

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-19

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-20

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-21

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

HARDWARE TORQUE VALUES

Check the tightness of hardware periodically.

Make sure fastener threads are clean and not damaged.

Use the following charts to determine the correct torque when checking, adjusting or replacing hardware on the tractor.

NOTE: A torque wrench is necessary to properly tighten.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the values listed in the charts if a different torque value or tightening procedure is specified in this manual for a specific application. Torque values listed are for general use only.

5-22

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

NOMINAL

SIZE

CLASS 5.8

UNPLATED PLATED

W/ZnCr

CLASS 8.8

UNPLATED PLATED

W/ZnCr

CLASS 10.9

UNPLATED PLATED

W/ZnCr

LOCKNUT

CL.8

W/CL8.8

BOLT

M4

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

15* (1.7) 19* (2.2)

51* (5.8) 67* (7.6)

23* (2.6)

79* (8.9)

30* (3.4)

102* (12)

33* (3.7)

115* (13)

42* (4.8)

150* (17)

16* (1.8)

56* (6.3)

124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)

21 (28)

36 (49)

27 (36)

46 (63)

32 (43)

55 (75)

41 (56)

72 (97)

45 (61) 58 (79)

79 (107) 102 (138)

22 (30)

39 (53)

89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)

175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)

303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION

HEX CAP SCREW AND CARRIAGE BOLTS

CLASSES 5.6 AND UP

MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION

PROPERTY CLASS

HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP

MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION

PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING

5-23

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED

SIZE or

PLATED

SILVER

W/ZnCr

GOLD or

PLATED

SILVER

W/ZnCr

GOLD or

PLATED

SILVER

W/ZnCr

GOLD

LOCKNUTS

GR.B

w/GR5

BOLT

GR.C

w/GR8

BOLT

1/4

5/16

3/8

7/16

1/2

9/16

5/8

3/4

7/8

1

55* (6.2)

115* (13)

17 (23)

72* (8.1)

149* (17)

22 (30)

27 (37)

42 (57)

60 (81)

35 (47)

54 (73)

77 (104)

83 (112) 107 (145)

146 (198) 189 (256)

142 (193) 183 (248)

213 (289) 275 (373)

86* (9.7)

178* (20)

26 (35)

42 (57)

64 (87)

92 (125)

128 (174)

226 (306)

365 (495)

547 (742)

112* (13)

229* (26)

34 (46)

121* (14)

250* (28)

37 (50)

157* (18)

324* (37)

48 (65)

61* (6.9)

125* (14)

19 (26)

54 (73)

83 (113)

59 (80)

91 (123)

120 (163) 130 (176)

77 (104)

117 (159)

169 (229)

30 (41)

45 (61)

65 (88)

165 (224) 180 (244)

293 (397) 319 (432)

233 (316)

413 (560)

90 (122)

160 (217)

473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350)

708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523)

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION

CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS

86* (9.8)

176* (20)

26 (35)

42 (57)

64 (88)

92 (125)

127 (172)

226 (306)

364 (494)

545 (739)

NOMINAL

SIZE

1/4

5/16

3/8

7/16

1/2

9/16

5/8

3/4

7/8

1

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

REGULAR NUTS SAE GRADE 5

HEX NUTS

SAE GRADE 8

HEX NUTS

LOCKNUTS

GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES

GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCH

GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCHES

GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO MARKS

GRADE B THREE MARKS

GRADE C SIX MARKS

MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED

AT CORNERS

GRADE A NO MARK

GRADE B LETTER B

GRADE C LETTER C

GRADE IDENTIFICATION

5-24

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORIES

86030437

86593079

86030509

86032122

V59624

86520481

86029289

86031849

86031847

86031206

86031207

86029890

86029294

86029891

86030502

86031169

Part Number Qty

86014147 1

86014146

86013781

1

1

9845903

86030112

86018543

1

1

1

86014389

86014391

86012421

86020974

86500295

86018083

86013437

86030111

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

86029289

9824857

9824982

9840406

9843942

86029318

86029319

86029320

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Description

Kit, Block Heater, Engine

Kit, Transmission Heater

Kit, Radiator Baffle

Kit, EDC

Kit, (132”) Rear Wheel Spacer

Kit, (15”) Rear Dual Spacer Kit (Not applicable to 2145)

Kit, Rear Dual Hubs -- 2145

Kit, Rear Dual Hubs -- 2160, 2180 & 2210

Kit, Toolbox, Side Mount

Kit, Deluxe RH & LH Rear View Mirrors

Kit, Sunvisor

Kit, Rear Wiper/Washer

Kit, Solid Fan Hub

Kit, Radar Installation

Kit, Side Monitor Mtg

Kit, Side Monitor Mtg, Deluxe

Kit, Monitor Mount/Power Bar Auxiliary

Kit, Accessory Implement Plug, 3 Prong

Kit, Accessory Implement Plug, 7 Pin

Kit, Toolbox, Front

Kit, HydraFlow Plus Conversion

Kit, Low Pressure Hydraulic Return Line

Kit, Hydraulic Trailer Brake

Kit, (12,500 lb) HPL L/EDC

Kit, (15,000 lb) HPL L/EDC

Kit, Dynamic Front Fenders -- 520 mm (20.5 in)

Kit, Dynamic Front Fenders -- 470 mm (18.5 in)

Kit, Dynamic Front Fender -- 620 (24.4 in)

Kit, 4th Remote Valve

Kit, “HydraFlow Plus” (Only for “HydraFlow Plus” Ready units) prior to S/N

Kit, HydraFlow Plus (On)

Front Worklamp, High Mount

Wheel Adjustment Tool

Shaft, PTO, 1000 -- 20 Tooth (1.75”)

Shaft, PTO, 1000 -- 21 Tooth (1.35”)

Radio Kit -- Standard Cassette

Radio Kit -- Premium Cassette

Radio Kit -- CD Player

7.0

0.7

N/A

1.0

1.0

0.1

0.1

0.1

4.0

4.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

6.0

7.0

Approximate.

Installation Time

1.5

2.0

0.3

1.5

2.0

3.0

1.0

2.0

1.0

1.0

4.0

4.0

0.5

1.0

0.1

0.5

7.0

0.3

0.2

0.5

1.2

0.1

5-25

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORIES CONT’D

Part Number Qty

86026864 1

86032174

86505861

1

1

86513451

9843487

86029309

86500265

1

1

1

1

86029321

86029270

86029274

86029278

86029282

86030472

86033740

96033914

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Part Numbers For High Usage Items

Description

Front Dual Wheel Kit

Front Wheel Spacer Kit (11”)

Rear Fender Extension Kit

“Y” Harness Assembly, Radar/Monitor

Controls, Limited Slip (Requires Radar)

Decal Kit, French Canadian

Rotating Beacon

Quick Hitch, Cat. III

Red paint -- aerosol

Cream paint -- aerosol

Black paint -- aerosol

Chassis grey paint -- aerosol

Kit, Front (A-post) Monitor Bracket

Kit, Cigar Lighter Power Adapter

Draw Bar Kit -- Heavy Duty

Component

Belt, Fan -- Standard

Belt, Fan -- Air brake compressor option

Block Heater

Block Heater Cord

Filter, Engine Air (Inner)

Filter, Engine Air (Outer)

Filter Engine Fuel/Water Separator

Filter, Engine Oil

Filter, Engine Coolant (With conditioner)

Filter, Engine Coolant (Less conditioner)

Filter, Hydraulic -- Standard Hydraulic

Filter, Hydraulic -- HydraFlow Plus Option

Filter, Transmission

Flasher

Fuse 5-amp

Fuse 7.5-amp

Fuse 10-amp

Fuse 15-amp

Fuse 20-amp

Fuse 25-amp

Fuse 40-amp

Fuse 50-amp

Fuse 60-amp

2145 2160 2180

86029736

86029735

82019779

86539137

86029108

86029107

(O--Ring, Bowl -- 87840137)

86029164

96029672 (Seal Ring -- 9617873)

86031985 (Seal Ring -- 9617873)

86029161

86029162

86029161

9821783

9623775

9623776

9811773

9623774

9804895

9846342

86507935

86507936

86031151

Approximate.

Installation Time

8.0

1.0

1.5

0.2

0.6

1.0

2.0

0.5

0.1

0.1

1.8

0.5

N/A

0.5

0.5

2210

5-26

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

Part Numbers For High Usage Items -- Cont’d

2145 Component

Fuse Puller

Key Ignition

Replacement Bulbs

2160

86000363

86502201

2180

Description

Instrument Cluster (6 bulb kit)

Console Lamp -- Roof Mounted

Cab Interior Lamp

Head Lamps -- Side Facing

Head Lamps -- Front Facing

Worklamps

Stop/Tail Lamps

Wide Transport Marker Signal Lights

Rocker Switch Indicator

Roof Warning Lamps

BVI Bulb Number

86503542

276433

470016

9847313

9847312

9848640

9626318

529068

9825842

529068

2210

5-27

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-28

Adapting ballast to work load and ground speed

Adding diesel fuel

Automatic hitch pin

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic engine shutdown

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-132

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustable pressurizer vents

Adjusting drawbar length

Adjusting PTO speed

Adjusting rear wheels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioner activation switch

Air conditioning operation

Area accumulator

Area preset

Audible alarm

Auto shift

Auxiliary connector, seven pin

Ballast limitations

Ballast, selecting

Ballasting

Ballasting, points to remember

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ballasting two wheel drive tractors

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

1-17

2-109

2-126

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Area per hour forcaster

Ballasting and tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attaching and detaching trailed equipment

Attaching equipment to the PTO shaft

Attaching 3-point equipment

Automatic display information

Auxiliary control cable routing

. . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary connector, single pin

Auxiliary connector, three pin

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary control mounting locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ballasting front end for transport . . . . . . . . . .

Ballasting four wheel drive tractors . . . . . . . .

2-75

1-17

2-7

Brakes

Brakes specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-30

2-1

2-85

2-44

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake locking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breaking-in procedure

5-7

1-15

Cab

Cab identification

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cab toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cancel flashing service indicator

2-68

2-2

1-5

2-10

Capacities

Central display (LCD)

Changing the PTO output shaft

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

Checking wheel slippage

Cigar lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clearing fault codes

2-34

5-9

2-22

2-71, 2-72

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the cab interior

Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cold start aid switch

Cold weather starting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting double-acting cylinders

Connecting single-acting cylinders

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control and instruments, overview

Control console illumination lights

Control switches

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-133

1-18

2-37

2-11

3-6

1-13

2-62

2-84

2-84

2-87

1-10

1-18

2-78

2-27

2-22

2-106

2-41

2-42

2-42

2-43

2-43

2-28

2-28

2-36

2-111

2-74

2-105

2-13

2-53

2-133

2-132

2-130

2-130

2-138

2-138

2-134

2-138

Bar graph displays

Battery cover

Battery voltage

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bleeding remote cylinders

2-20

1-8

INDEX

Cooling system specifications

Creeper gears

Creeper switch

Cruise control operation

Dealer installed accessories

Delivery Reports

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Determining maximum front ballast

5-6

2-55

1-12

1-24

. . . . . . .

Determining 3-point hitch mode of operation . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-25

5-33

2-139

2-95

Diesel fuel

Diesel fuel selection chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Differential lock, engaging and disengaging

5-11

3-2

2-60

Differential lock switch

Digital display

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disconnecting the negative battery cable

Disengaging the PTO

Distance measurement

. . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-60

1-22

2-47

1-26

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-76

2-30

Doors

Draft control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drawbar height adjustment

Drawbar length

Drawbar specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

2-92

2-108

2-108

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drawbar-towing attachments

5-6

2-106

Driving the tractor

Dual rear wheels

EIC lighting display

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drop rate control knob

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EIC programming

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EIC tractor performance monitor (TPM)

2-69

2-88

2-128

2-38

. . . . .

2-31

2-26

1-14, 2-12 Electronic instrument cluster

Engagement switch

Engaging the PTO

Engine access door, left side

Engine access door, right side

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine access doors

. . . . . . . . .

Electrical equipment specifications . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency stopping and parking brake

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-8

2-45

2-79

2-76

Engine block heater

Engine coolant

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

1-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

2-64

Engine coolant temperature

Engine hood

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11

2-21

Engine hour meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine identification

1-6

2-24

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

2-21 Engine load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil pressure

Engine specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine shutdown override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine shutdown override switch

Engine speed-digital display

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-10

2-20

2-67

1-12

Entering the cab

Exiting the set up mode

Exterior toolbox

External 3-point hitch controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Estimating ballast requirements . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5

2-23

2-2

2-134

2-38

2-10

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-97

1-6 Fan shields, left side

Fan shields, right side

Fast raise/work switch

Fault codes

Fault code indicator

Fault codes on/off

Field operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

2-90

4-2

2-27

2-36

2-91

5-29

Flexible link ends

Foot brakes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flexible maintenance intervals

First 50-hour service

Flow control adjustment

Foot and floor controls

Foot throttle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Forward operator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-101

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foot brake pedals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four wheel drive (FWD)

Four wheel drive (FWD), engaging and disengaging . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four wheel drive (FWD) front axle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four wheel drive (FWD) front axle track spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four wheel drive operating precautions

3-1

3-1

2-82

1-15

2-44

1-15

1-15

1-11

2-59

2-59

1-4

Four wheel drive steering stops

Four wheel drive (FWD) switch

Front tires - liquid weight

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Four wheel drive tire combinations

Four wheel drive track adjustment

Front weights - cast iron

Front wheel positions

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front wheel track spacing

Front/rear lights

Front wheel position (2WD)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-116

2-59

2-120

1-22

5-15

2-116

2-141

2-139

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front windshield wiper/washer switch

2-117

2-112

2-41

2-114

Fuel level

Fuel requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General dimensions

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel storage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel system specifications

Fueling the tractor

Fuses

2-9

1-18

2-20

3-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

5-5

3-2

3-68

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance -

1-1, 3-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

3-66 bleed the fuel system

General maintenance electronic instrument cluster (EIC) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance - fuse replacement . . .

General maintenance main distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance preparation for tractor storage . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance preparing the tractor for use after storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance - relays . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-73

3-68

3-70

3-74

3-74

3-69

General maintenance replace the fender mounted turn signal and stop light/parking light bulbs

General maintenance replace headlight assembly bulbs

General maintenance -

. . . . . . .

. . . . . .

3-72

3-71 replace roof mounted turn signal bulbs . .

3-72

General maintenance replace work sealed beam units

Ground speed charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ground speed calibration

Ground speed display

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-71

5-12

2-35

2-25

5-30

Guide blocks, spacers and shims

Hand throttle control lever

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hauling the tractor on a transporter . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning light switch

Hazard warning lights

Headlight flash

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Headlights high/low beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-102

1-20

5-22

1-28

1-13

2-39

2-40

2-40

Heater operation

Height limit control knob

Hitch disabled symbol

Hitch enabled display

Hitch position display

Hood

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7

2-88

2-27

2-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-27

3-5

2-40 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HydraFlow Plus system

HydraFlow Plus tractor

Hydraulic oil sump heater

Hydraulic return kit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulic motor application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulic systems introduction

2-77

2-78

2-85

2-64

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-25

2-77

Hydraulic system specifications

Implement to cab clearance

Inch hardware and locknuts

Inching pedal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator, warning lamps, and audible alarm .

5-7

2-105

5-24

1-15, 2-48

Installing cast iron weights

Installing front weights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-14

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-136

2-140

1-18, 2-40

1-18

Key start/stop switch

Lift control lever

Lift rods

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lighting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and accessory power points

Linkage category conversion

Low pressure return circuit

Lower link float

Lubricants

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication and maintenance

Lubrication and maintenance chart

Lubrication and maintenance, as required

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

3-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication and maintenance, every 10 hours or daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication and maintenance, every 50 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication and maintenance, every 300 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication and maintenance,

3-13

3-17

3-29

1-12

2-87

2-99

2-38

2-39

2-104

2-83

2-100

5-9

3-1

3-8 every 600 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication and maintenance, every 900 hours or 12 months

Lubrication and maintenance, every 1200 hours or 12 months

Lubrication and maintenance,

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

3-39

3-44

3-47 every 2400 hours or 24 months

Lubrication and maintenance, general maintenance

Manual operation

Master light switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual-programmable operation switches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maximum tractor operating angle . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-55

3-66

2-80

. .

2-80

1-13, 2-39

5-8

Metric hardware and locknuts . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Minimum hardware tightening torques and locknuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modes of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Monitor mount -- auxiliary power bar kit

5-23

5-23

2-86

. . . . .

2-42

1-13, 2-40 Multi-function switch

Oil change interval

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Opening the access doors

Opening the hood

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-10

3-4

3-5

Operating continuous flow hydraulic equipment

Operating the engine

Operation

Operator’s seat

Overhead controls

Panel dim control

Parking brake

Position control operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating remote equipment simultaneously . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator prompts

Operator calibration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator’s manual holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Position/draft control test

Position/float control test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Position/draft sensitivity control knob . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Possible track adjustments

2-84

2-85

2-61

2-1

4-1

2-31

1-1

2-3

1-16

2-39

Power Beyond Applications

Powershift transmission

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershift transmission control lever with neutral lock

Power take-off display

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power take-off (PTO) independent

Power take-off specifications

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-20

2-25

2-70

5-6

Precautionary statements

Pre-operation checks

Preparing to start the tractor

Pressurizer fan speed switch

Pressurizer operation

Pressurizer vents

Preventing system contamination

Product Publications

Programmable operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming reverse gear ratios

Programming the up/down shift

0-4

1-28

2-61

1-17

2-7

2-8

. . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

5-57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programmable up shift-down shift

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

Protecting the electronic/electrical systems

.

2-58

2-57

Programming the “Service Alert Indicators” 2-33

2-81

2-56

PTO status light

Quick couplers

Quick hitch

Radio

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear axle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear tire weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear wheel cast iron rear wheel weights

Rear wheel track adjustment

Rear wheel track spacing

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

2-75

2-30

2-30

1-22

2-83

2-104

2-10

1-5

2-136

2-137

2-125

2-121, 2-122

1-15

2-91

2-88

2-96

2-95

2-113

2-85

2-46 during charging or welding

Protective shielding

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PTO engagement switch

PTO master shield

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PTO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PTO speed 540 rpm scale

PTO speed 1000 rpm scale

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-25

1-6

1-22

2-70

5-31

Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window grommet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window wiper/washer switch . . . . . . . . .

Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote valve electro-hydraulic control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote valve electro-hydraulic

2-8

2-43

2-9

1-18

2-77, 2-78

1-21 engagement switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote valve electro-hydraulic flow control knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote valve electro-hydraulic

1-20

1-21 manual/programmable operation switches 1-21

Removable panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing equipment

Removing shields

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the access doors

Right side window

Road speeds

Rotary beacon

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotary beacon switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-43

2-105

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the battery cover

Right hand console

Right side console controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Right side console position switch . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

3-5

3-7

2-6

1-19

1-24

2-9

5-11

Safety

Safety decals

Seat adjustments

Seat belt

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selectable display information

Service engine air cleaner

Service Reports

Setting the slip alarm point

Shield locations

Shuttle operations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selectable displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting implement width

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-39

1-13

0-6

0-10

2-4

2-5

2-24

2-28

3-10

5-41

2-32

2-32

Slip alarm

Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Slip limit control knob

1-6

2-52

2-29

1-23

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-90

5-1 Specifications

Speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard flow systems

Standard flow tractors

Starter solenoid shield

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting the engine and moving forward

Starting the engine in cold weather

Starting the engine in warm weather

. . . .

Starting the engine and moving in reverse . .

. . . . . . . .

or when engine is hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting the tractor with jumper cables

2-52

2-77

2-78

1-8

2-49

2-51

2-62

Steering column telescopic adjustment

. . . . . .

control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering column tilt control lever . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-62

2-65

1-12

1-12

Steering specifications

Steering wheel and column

Stopping the engine

Sway blocks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Swinging drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temperature control switch

5-8

2-5

2-66

Three-point lift specifications

Three-point hitch controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three-point hitch fast raise/work switch . . . . .

2-102

2-106

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-17

5-7

2-86

1-21

Three-point hitch float

Tractor hauling

Tractor towing

Transmission

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three-point hitch height limit control

Three-point hitch lift control

Three-point hitch linkage

Three-point hitch rate of drop control

Three-point hitch status light

Tire pressures and permissible loads

Tires

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

Tire pressures and permissible loads charts . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires and ballasting

Toolbox

Top link

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction Control System (TCS)

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three-point hitch position/draft control . . . . . .

Three-point hitch position -- area counter . . .

. . . . . . .

2-94

1-23

1-24

2-99

1-24

2-37

1-23

1-22, 2-89

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission auto shift switch

5-15

5-16

2-142

2-136

2-10

2-100

. . . . . . . . . . . .

2-60

1-2, 1-3 Tractor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tractor identification data

Tractor master PTO shield

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tractor PTO stub shaft cover

1-2

1-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-9

1-28

Transmission identification

Transmission programming

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission gear shift position display . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-27

2-46

1-20

2-23

1-4

2-57

Transmission specifications

Transmission up/down shift switch

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting, electrical system

Troubleshooting, engine

Troubleshooting, hydraulic system

Troubleshooting, 3-point hitch

Troubleshooting, transmission

Turn signals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Two wheel drive axle adjustment

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting and fault finding

Troubleshooting, brakes

Troubleshooting, cab

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

Two wheel drive front axle track spacing . . . .

5-6

1-21

4-1

4-1

4-9

4-10

4-6

4-3

4-7

4-8

4-5

2-40

2-114

2-113

Two wheel drive front wheel track spacing 2-113

Two wheel drive front wheel toe-in

Universal symbols

Vehicle identification data

. .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-115

0-15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

3-10 Warning lamp glows

Weight specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel slip indicator light

5-4

2-29

Wheel toe-in (FWD)

Work lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wide swinging roller drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-23

2-118

2-109

2-39

5-32

OWNER COPY

DELIVERY REPORT/SERVICE

CHECK AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED

STATIONARY CHECKS -- ENGINE OFF: _____4.

Neutral start switches operative

_____1.

Tire pressures and condition

_____2.

Lift--rod adjusting blocks for proper operation

_____3.

Radiator coolant level and specific gravity

1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____4.

Poly V belt

_____5.

Engine oil level

_____6.

Drain diesel fuel filter and clean fuel sedimenter

_____7.

Air Cleaner element and hose connections

_____8.

Coolant lines and clamps

_____9.

Windshield wiper washer and fluid

_____10. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____11. Front axle differential oil level (FWD)

_____12. Front axle hub oil level (FWD)

_____13. Upper link, drawbar pins in position

_____14. Wheel disc--to--rim hardware torque

_____15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____17. Front end wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____18. Fuel level

_____19. Sheet metal and paint condition

_____20. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____21. Seat mounting and adjustment

_____22. Side console operation

_____23. Tilt telescopic steering column operation

_____24. Cab door and lock operation and seal condition

_____25. Cab interior upholstery, trim and moldings

_____26. Cab window operation, gas springs, latches and seal condition

_____27. Cab filter installation

_____28. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____29. Hood gas springs in proper mounting position

_____5.

Parking brake operative

_____6.

Flashing lights/taillights operation

_____7.

Operator’s manual supplied

_____8.

SMV emblem installed

_____9.

Battery cables

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE RUNNING:

All operative checks are to be performed with the tractor at normal operating temperature:

_____1.

Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____2.

Fluid and oil leaks

_____3.

Maximum no--load speed and idle speed adjustments and fuel shut--off

_____4.

PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft and position control operation

___ Draft control operation

___ Remote control valves

___ Flow control operation

___ Pressure detent operation

_____6.

Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____7.

Transmission clutch calibration

_____ F1_____ F2_____Rev

PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS

_____1.

Dynomometer HP test, engine operation including throttle and governor operation

_____2.

Transmission

_____3.

Steering control

_____4.

Differential lock and FWD engagement and disengagement

_____5.

Brake action

_____6.

All optional equipment and accessories

___30--amp and 8--amp sockets

_____7.

Ballasting

SAFETY ITEM CHECKS:

_____1.

Seat belt operation

_____ 2. Safety decals installed

_____ 3. All Safety shields installed

5-33

Service Performed Actual Engine Hours__________

Delivery Date ____________________________________________________________________

Owner’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address ________________________________________________________________________

Dealer’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address ________________________________________________________________________

Tractor: Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Engine: Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Using the operator’s manual as a guide, instruction was given as indicated by the check marks.

( ) Safety precautions and practice

( ) Lubrication points and schedule

( ) Maintenance areas, adjustments and schedule

( ) Operation of all controls

( ) Electro--hydraulics (EHR) programming--time delay

( ) Transmission programming – forward/reverse shuttle, upshift--downshift

( ) Transmission and three point hitch calibration

( ) Preseason service

( ) End--of--season service

( ) Warranty coverage

( ) Proper use of operator’s manual

( ) Customer given operator’s manual

Dealer Representative’s Signature ___________________________________________________

Date ________________

“I have been instructed in the operation, maintenance, and safety features of this machine as detailed in the operator’s manual.”

Owner’s Signature ________________________________________________________________

Date ________________

5-34

DEALER COPY

DELIVERY REPORT/SERVICE

CHECK AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE OFF: _____4.

Neutral start switches operative

_____1.

Tire pressures and condition

_____2.

Lift--rod adjusting blocks for proper operation

_____3.

Radiator coolant level and specific gravity

1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____4.

Poly V belt

_____5.

Engine oil level

_____6.

Drain diesel fuel filter and clean fuel sedimenter

_____7.

Air Cleaner element and hose connections

_____8.

Coolant lines and clamps

_____9.

Windshield wiper washer and fluid

_____10. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____11. Front axle differential oil level (FWD)

_____12. Front axle hub oil level (FWD)

_____13. Upper link, drawbar pins in position

_____14. Wheel disc--to--rim hardware torque

_____15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____17. Front end wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____18. Fuel level

_____19. Sheet metal and paint condition

_____20. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____21. Seat mounting and adjustment

_____22. Side console operation

_____23. Tilt telescopic steering column operation

_____24. Cab door and lock operation and seal condition

_____25. Cab interior upholstery, trim and moldings

_____26. Cab window operation, gas springs, latches and seal condition

_____27. Cab filter installation

_____28. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____29. Hood gas springs in proper mounting position

_____5.

Parking brake operative

_____6.

Flashing lights/taillights operation

_____7.

Operator’s manual supplied

_____8.

SMV emblem installed

_____9.

Battery cables

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE RUNNING:

All operative checks are to be performed with the tractor at normal operating temperature:

_____1.

Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____2.

Fluid and oil leaks

_____3.

Maximum no--load speed and idle speed adjustments and fuel shut--off

_____4.

PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft and position control operation

___ Draft control operation

___ Remote control valves

___ Flow control operation

___ Pressure detent operation

_____6.

Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____7.

Transmission clutch calibration

_____ F1_____ F2_____Rev

PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS

_____1.

Dynomometer HP test, engine operation including throttle and governor operation

_____2.

Transmission

_____3.

Steering control

_____4.

Differential lock and FWD engagement and disengagement

_____5.

Brake action

_____6.

All optional equipment and accessories

___30--amp and 8--amp sockets

_____7.

Ballasting

SAFETY ITEM CHECKS:

_____1.

Seat belt operation

_____2.

Safety decals installed

_____3.

All Safety shields installed

5-35

Service Performed Actual Engine Hours ___________

Delivery Date ____________________________________________________________________

Owner’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address

_______________________________________________________________________________

Dealer’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address

_______________________________________________________________________________

Tractor:

Engine:

Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Using the operator’s manual as a guide, instruction was given as indicated by the check marks.

( ) Safety precautions and practice

( ) Lubrication points and schedule

( ) Maintenance areas, adjustments and schedule

( ) Operation of all controls

( ) Electro--hydraulics (EHR) programming--time delay

( ) Transmission programming – forward/reverse shuttle, upshift--downshift

( ) Transmission and three point hitch calibration

( ) Preseason service

( ) End--of--season service

( ) Warranty coverage

( ) Proper use of operator’s manual

( ) Customer given operator’s manual

Dealer Representative’s Signature __________________________________________________

Date ________________

“I have been instructed in the operation, maintenance, and safety features of this machine as detailed in the operator’s manual.”

Owner’s Signature _______________________________________________________________

Date ________________

5-36

OWNER COPY

FIRST 50--HOUR SERVICE

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE OFF:

_____ 1. Tire pressures and condition

_____ 2. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity

1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____ 3. Poly V Belt

_____ 4. Engine oil and filter change

_____ 5. Change Diesel fuel filter, clean fuel sedimenter, and bleed system

_____ 6. Change transmission filter

_____ 7. Change Hydraulic filter

_____ 8. Air cleaner element and hose connections

_____ 9. Coolant lines and clamps

_____ 10. Windshield wiper/operation and washer fluid level

_____ 11. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____ 12. Change front axle differential oil (FWD)

_____ 13. Change front axle hub oil (FWD)

_____ 14. Wheel--to--rim hardware torque

_____ 15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____ 16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____ 17. Front wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____ 18. Check adjustment of front wheel bearings

(two--wheel drive only)

_____ 19. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____ 20. Seat operation

_____ 21. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____ 22. Exhaust manifold bolt torque

_____ 23. Clean cab air filter

SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:

All operative checks are to be performed with the tractor at normal operating temperature:

_____ 1. Seat belt operation

_____ 2. All Safety shields installed

_____ 3. Neutral start switches operative

_____ 4. Parking brake operation & adjustment

_____ 5. Battery Cables

_____ 6. Cab bolt torque

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE RUNNING:

_____ 1. Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____ 2. Fluid and oil leaks

_____ 3. Maximum no--load speed and idle speed adjustments

_____ 4. PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System:

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft and position control operation

___ Draft control operation

___ Remote control valves

___ Flow control operation

___ Pressure detent operation

_____ 6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____ 7. Calibrate transmission directional clutches

_____ F1 _____ F2 _____ Rev

PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS

_____ 1. Road test engine operation including throttle and governor operation

_____ 2. Transmission, transmission programming

_____ 3. Steering control

_____ 4. Differential lock and FWD engagement and disengagement

_____ 5. Brake action

_____ 6. All optional equipment and accessories

NOTE: Engines are filled with 10W--30 at the factory.

The oil must be changed after the first 50 hours of operation. Change oil and filter.

5-37

5-38

DEALER COPY

FIRST 50--HOUR SERVICE

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE OFF:

_____ 1. Tire pressures and condition

_____ 2. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity

1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____ 3. Poly V Belt

_____ 4. Engine oil and filter change

_____ 5. Change Diesel fuel filter, clean fuel sedimenter, and bleed system

_____ 6. Change transmission filter

_____ 7. Change Hydraulic filter

_____ 8. Air cleaner element and hose connections

_____ 9. Coolant lines and clamps

_____ 10. Windshield wiper/operation and washer fluid level

_____ 11. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____ 12. Change front axle differential oil (FWD)

_____ 13. Change front axle hub oil (FWD)

_____ 14. Wheel--to--rim hardware torque

_____ 15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____ 16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____ 17. Front wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____ 18. Check adjustment of front wheel bearings

(two--wheel drive only)

_____ 19. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____ 20. Seat operation

_____ 21. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____ 22. Exhaust manifold bolt torque

_____ 23. Clean cab air filter

SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:

All operative checks are to be performed with the tractor at normal operating temperature:

_____ 1. Seat belt operation

_____ 2. All Safety shields installed

_____ 3. Neutral start switches operative

_____ 4. Parking brake operation & adjustment

_____ 5. Battery Cables

_____ 6. Cab bolt torque

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE RUNNING:

_____ 1. Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____ 2. Fluid and oil leaks

_____ 3. Maximum no--load speed and idle speed adjustments

_____ 4. PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System:

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft and position control operation

___ Draft control operation

___ Remote control valves

___ Flow control operation

___ Detent operation

_____ 6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____ 7. Calibrate transmission directional clutches

_____ F1 _____ F2 _____ Rev

PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS

_____ 1. Road test engine operation including throttle and governor operation

_____ 2. Transmission, transmission programming

_____ 3. Steering control

_____ 4. Differential lock and FWD engagement and disengagement

_____ 5. Brake action

_____ 6. All optional equipment and accessories

NOTE: Engines are filled with 10W--30 at the factory.

The oil must be changed after the first 50 hours of operation. Change oil and filter.

5-39

5-40

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

100 – 250 HOUR SERVICE

1.

Service

Check engine oil level

2.

3.

6.

7.

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

5. Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

Clean cab air filter

8.

9.

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

100 hours 150 hours 200 hours 250 hours

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

100 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

150 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

200 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

250 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

300 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-41

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

300 HOUR SERVICE

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____19. Front end weight bolt clamp tightness

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-42

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

350 – 550 HOUR SERVICE

Service 350 hours

400 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

8.

9.

Clean cab air filter

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

450 hours

500 hours

550 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

350 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

400 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

450 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

500 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

550 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-43

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

600 HOUR SERVICE

_____1. Change Engine Oil and Filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____19. Change Engine Air Cleaner Outer Filter

_____20. Check Engine Air Intake Connections

_____21. Change Fuel Filter/Water Separator

_____22. Check Air Conditioner Drain Tubes

_____23. Adjust 2WD Front Axle Wheel Bearings

_____24. Check/adjust Engine Valve Clearance

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-44

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

650 – 850 HOUR SERVICE

Service 650 hours

700 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

8.

9.

10.

Clean cab air filter

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

750 hours

800 hours

850 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

650 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

700 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

750 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

800 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

850 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-45

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

900 HOURS OR 12 MONTH SERVICE

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check fuel system water separator

_____15. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____16. Check tire pressure and condition

_____17. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____18. Change transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil

_____19. Clean hydraulic pump inlet screen

_____20. Change hydraulic transmission filter

_____21. Change hydraulic filter

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-46

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

950 – 1150 HOUR SERVICE

Service 950 hours

1000 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

Clean cab air filter

8. Check front and rear wheel hardware

9.

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

1050 hours

1100 hours

1150 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

950 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1000 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1050 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1100 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1150 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-47

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS SERVICE

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Change FWD Differential Oil

_____4. Change FWD Planetary Hub Oil

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Change Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Change Engine Coolant Filter/Conditioner

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____19. Change Engine Air Cleaner Inner and Outer Filter Elements

_____20. Check Engine Air Intake Connections

_____21. Change Fuel Filter/Water Separator

_____22. Change Rocker Cover Ventilation Filter

_____23. Check Air Conditioner Drain Tubes

_____24. Check/Adjust 2WD Front Axle Wheel Bearings

_____25. Check/Adjust Engine Valve Clearance

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-48

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

1250 – 1450 HOUR SERVICE

Service 1250 hours

1300 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

8.

9.

Clean cab air filter

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

1350 hours

1400 hours

1450 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

1250 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1300 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1350 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1400 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1450 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-49

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

1500 HOUR SERVICE

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-50

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

1550 – 1750 HOUR SERVICE

Service 1550 hours

1600 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

8.

9.

Clean cab air filter

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

1650 hours

1700 hours

1750 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

1550 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1600 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1650 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1700 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1750 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-51

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

1800 HOUR OR 24 MONTHS SERVICE

(WHICHEVER COMES FIRST)

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____19. Change transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil

_____20. Clean hydraulic pump inlet screen

_____21. Change hydraulic transmission filter

_____22. Change hydraulic filter

_____23. Check/adjust Engine Valve Clearance

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-52

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

1850 – 2050 HOUR SERVICE

Service 1850 hours

1900 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

8.

9.

Clean cab air filter

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

1950 hours

2000 hours

2050 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

1850 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1900 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

1950 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

2000 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

2050 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-53

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

2100 HOURS SERVICE

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-54

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

2150 – 2350 HOUR SERVICE

Service 2150 hours

2200 hours

1.

2.

3.

Check engine oil level

Check engine coolant level

Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

4.

5.

6.

Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

Check fuel system water separator

Check fuel sedimenter

7.

8.

9.

Clean cab air filter

Check front and rear wheel hardware

Check tire pressure and condition

10.

Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

2250 hours

2300 hours

2350 hours

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

2150 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

2200 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

2250 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

2300 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

2350 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________

5-55

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT

EVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS SERVICE

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Change FWD Differential Oil

_____4. Change FWD Planetary Hub Oil

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Change Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Change Engine Coolant and Filter/Conditioner

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition

_____18. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____19. Change Engine Air Cleaner Inner and Outer Filter Elements

_____20. Check Engine Air Intake Connections

_____21. Change Fuel Filter/Water Separator

_____22. Change Rocker Cover Ventilation Filter

_____23. Check Air Conditioner Drain Tubes

_____24. Check/Adjust 2WD Front Axle Wheel Bearings

_____25. Check/Adjust Engine Valve Clearance

_____26. Check and Clean Fuel Injector (Injectors should be cleaned and adjusted by an authorized dealer or an injector specialists)

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-56

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

Product Publications

Available through your local Buhler Versatile Dealer.

VERSATILE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE PUBLICATIONS

Part No.

89002000

89002001

89002002

89002003

89002004

89002005

89002006

89002007

89002008

89002009

89002010

89002011

89002012

89002013

89002014

89002100

89002101

89002102

89002103

89002104

89002105

89002106

89002107

89002108

Description

Complete repair manual set (includes 13 sections)

1-Engine

2-Fuel System

3-Electrical System

4-Transmission

5-Axles

6-Brake System

7-Power Take-Off System

8-Hydraulic System

9-Steering System

10-Shielding/Frame

11-Cab

12-Climate Control

13-3 Point Hitch

Repair Manual 1402/1407 Transmission

Operator’s Manual L4WD (Before S/N 300601)

Models 2240, 2270, 2310, 2360, 2425

Assembly Instructions (Before S/N 3006001)

Oper/Maint Manual-8.3L Engine

Oper/Maint Manual-M11 Engine

Oper/Maint Manual-N14 Engine

Operator’s Manual L4WD (After S/N 300600)

Models 2290, 2335, 2360, 2375, 2425

Oper/Maint Manual-QSM11 Engine

Oper/Maint Manual-1407 Transmission

Assembly Instructions (After S/N 300600)

GENESIS PUBLICATIONS

Part No.

89007000

89007001

89007002

89007003

89007004

89007005

89007006

89007007

89007008

89007009

89007010

89007011

89007012

89007100

89007102

89007102A

Description

Complete repair manual set (includes 12 sections)

1-Engine

2-Fuel System

3-Electrical System

4-Transmission

5-Rear Axles

6-Brake System

7-Power Take-Off System

8-Hydraulic System

9-Front Axle and Steering System

10-Separating the Components

11-Cab

12-Climate Control

Operator’s Manual BVI-Genesis (Before S/N 500701)

Operator’s Manual BVI--Genesis (After S/N 500700)

Operator’s Manual Supplement -- Shuttle--Shift

5-57

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

5-58

CALIFORNIA

Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

Buhler Versatile Inc.

Box 7300, 1260 Clarence Ave

Winnipeg, Manitoba R3C 4E8

Buhler Versatile Inc., Winnipeg, MB

Printed in Canada